Chalenger 604

Highlights
CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO: HOLDERS OF SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(SMM) FOR CHALLENGER 604 AIRCRAFT SERIAL NUMBER 5596
REVISION A DATED NOV 10/2006
HIGHLIGHTS
Pages which have been added or revised are outlined below together with the highlights of the revision.
Remove and insert the affected pages as listed.
Chapter/Section and
Description of Change
Page No.
All Due to the extent of the changes, the entire document has been revised and
reissued. Remove the old manual in its entirety and replace with the new one.
Highlights Page 1
Nov 10/2006
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Highlights Page 2
Nov 10/2006
Cover
Supplemental
Maintenance Manual
Aircraft S/N: 5596

CHALLENGER 604* (MODEL CL-600-2B16)
SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bombardier Inc.
P. O. Box 6087, Station Centre-ville
Montreal, Quebec, Canada H3C 3G9
http://www.cic.bombardier.com
For more information please contact:
Bombardier Business Aircraft Customer Support

Technical Publications and Information
Distribution
North America 1-866-273-2638
Outside North America 514-855-7051
FAX 514-855-7072
Ordering
To ease the ordering process, the following Document

Identification Number should be used: CH 604 COMP TLMC
User Comment Group 514-855-9304
E-mail bbad.user.comments@aero.bombardier.com
It is understood that this documentation, comprising technical data and other information in any media
shall not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part without Bombardier’s written authorization, is
proprietary and confidential to Bombardier and that all rights to patent, copyright, trademark, trade
secret and other intellectual property rights therein belong to Bombardier. Such documentation,
technical data and other information shall not be modified, translated, reverse assembled, reverse
engineered or de-compiled and shall be used solely to maintain, operate or repair the aircraft.
Copyright © 2005-2006 by Bombardier Inc. All rights reserved.

*Trademark of Bombardier Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Printed in Canada
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
General
This Supplemental Maintenance Manual (SMM) contains information describing custom installation(s) and
modification(s) to this aircraft, and may include procedures for periodic maintenance. The SMM supplements
the Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM) and should be used concurrently with the AMM for maintenance
activities. This manual does not supersede the AMM, except in those instances where a custom installation or
modification has completely replaced a production-installed system.
Organization
Content and format of the SMM is based on the ATA-100 Specification and standard conventions. This
maintenance information is organized according to ATA chapter designation. A separate table of contents is
provided for each chapter. The information within each chapter may be organized under one or more of the
following subject categories and page number identifiers. These categories need not all be included in every
chapter.
System Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 1 - 99

Maintenance Practices - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 201 - 299
Servicing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 301 - 399
Removal/Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 401 - 499
Adjustment/Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 501 - 599
Inspection/Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 601 - 699
This supplemental maintenance manual may reference a manufacturer’s maintenance document or the AMM
for additional maintenance procedures. Unless identified in the manufacturer’s maintenance document(s),
specific parts identified for maintenance and/or replacement in the SMM are also identified in the Supplemental
Illustrated Parts Catalog.
Figures such as tables, diagrams, illustrations, or photographs may be provided to assist with system or
component identification or location. Figures in pages 1 through 99 are identified by title; other figures are
numbered consecutively within each page block.
Warnings, cautions, or notes may be included in various sections of the text. It is important to understand the
significance of each:
WARNING: WARNING STATEMENTS IDENTIFY METHODS, PROCEDURES, OR LIMITS THAT MUST

BE PRECISELY FOLLOWED TO AVOID INJURY TO PERSONS.
CAUTION: CAUTION STATEMENTS IDENTIFY PROCESSES THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED TO AVOID

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: Notes call attention to details which may make the job easier.
This manual was published and released in accordance with the latest technical data available at the time of
publication.
EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM
Revision A Introduction Page 1
Nov 10/2006
Revision A Introduction Page 2
Nov 10/2006
Revision Log
REVISION LOG
REVISION NO. REVISION DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
First Issue Jun 21/2005 N/A
Revision A Nov 10/2006 Completely revised and reissued
Revision A Revision Log Page 1
Nov 10/2006
Revision A Revision Log Page 2
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 07 - LIFTING AND SHORING
CHAPTER 07 - LIFTING AND SHORING
THIS SECTION INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 1

Revision A Nov 10/2006

CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND
TAXIING
List of Effective Pages CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND TAXIING
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Ch-Se-Su Page Date Ch-Se-Su Page Date
09 - Effective Pages 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
09 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
09-10-17 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006

Revision A 09 - Effective Pages Nov 10/2006

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND TAXIING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subject Ch-Se-Su Page
TOWBAR STORAGE 09-10-17

Description/Operation
Description/Location 1

Revision A 09 - Contents Nov 10/2006

TOWBAR STORAGE
TOWBAR STORAGE - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION/LOCATION
Mounting provisions for the towbar and towbar head have been installed in the forward equipment
compartment at approximately FS185.70, BL0.0. The towbar and towbar head are supplied as loose
equipment.
TOWBAR AND
TOWBAR HEAD
WL
79.50
REF
(VIEW LOOKING INBOARD)
FS FS
202.75 169.00
REF REF
TOWBAR AND TOWBAR HEAD
EFFECTIVITY: TE-55965000-SMM
Revision A 09-10-17 Page 1
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS
AND MARKINGS
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
11-00-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
11-00-01 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
11-30-00 601 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006
11-31-00 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-00-00

Description/Location/Operation 1
Removal/Installation
Removal 401
Installation 401
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Cabin Placards - Internal 601
Servicing
Discard Self-Illuminated Exit Sign 301


PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION/LOCATION/OPERATION
For aircraft placard information, refer to Bombardier Completion Center drawing, Placard General
Arrangement, drawing number 6041100006, revision (B), or the latest approved revision:
For water system placard information, refer to the following Bombardier Completion Center drawings:
• Plumbing Instl - Split Lav, drawing number TM433810-41, revision (G), or the latest approved
revision
• Plumbing Assy - Galley, Lav, drawing number TM433810-34, revision (E), or the latest
approved revision
• Plumbing Instl - Palletized, drawing number TM433811-44, revision (H), or the latest approved
revision
• Palletized Water System Assembly, drawing number TM433811-43, revision (E), or the latest
approved revision
For external markings information, refer to Bombardier Completion Center drawing, A/C External
Markings and Placards, drawing number 6041110012, revision (NC), or the latest approved revision.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the self-illuminated exit sign:
WARNING: RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL - THE RECEIPT, POSSESSION, USE, AND TRANSFER

OF THIS DEVCE IS SUBJECT TO A GENERAL LICENSE OR THE EQUIVALENT,
AND THE REGULATIONS OF THE U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION
(NRC), OR A STATE WITH WHICH THE NRC HAS ENTERED INTO AN
AGREEMENT FOR THE EXERCISE OF A REGULATORY AUTHORITY. DO NOT
ABANDON OR DISPOSE OF THIS SIGN EXCEPT BY TRANSFER TO PERSONS
SPECIFICALLY LICENSED BY THE NRC OR AN AGREEMENT STATE.
NOTE: Typically, the self-illuminated exit sign is located on the aft side of forward cabin bulkhead.
NOTE: The sign is secured to the bulkhead with self-adhesive material.
(1) Use a spatula or a knife to lift a corner of the sign.
(2) Carefully pull the sign away from the mounting surface.
(3) Discard the self-illuminated exit sign in accordance with the instructions included with the
replacement sign.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the self-illuminated exit sign:
(1) Use a clean, low-lint cloth, moist with the TT-N-95 solvent, to clean the area specified for
installation of the placard (AMM TASK 51-25-00-110-801).
(2) Remove the protective backing layer from the sign. Discard the protective backing layer
after removal.
(3) Put the sign in position at the mounting location.
(4) Apply pressure to the sign to secure it to the bulkhead.
(5) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE CABIN PLACARDS - INTERNAL

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 11-30-60-601
(2) Reference Information
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
6041100006 Placard General Arrangement
TM411100-01 Placard Details English
B. Procedure
(1) Inspect the cabin to make sure that the required placards are installed, and that the placards
are legible.
(2) Refer to the aircraft specific interior placard installation drawing(s) listed above for the
location and quantity of each placard.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - SERVICING
1. DISCARD SELF-ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 11-31-62-601
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the self-illuminated exit sign per REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
(2) Obtain a new self-illuminated exit sign.
(3) Install the self-illuminated exit sign per REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 20 - STAN-
DARD PRACTICES - AIR
FRAME CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
List of Effective Pages
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES - AIR FRAME

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
20-12-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
20-12-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006
407 Nov 10/2006
408 Nov 10/2006
409 Nov 10/2006
410 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES - AIR FRAME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
STANDARD PRACTICES - LIGHTING 20-12-00

Description 1
Removal/Installation 401


STANDARD PRACTICES - LIGHTING
STANDARD PRACTICES - LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
This section contains procedures to replace the interior lighting lamps installed by the completion center.
For more information on these lights, see their individual lighting sections. Incandescent lamps can
usually be replaced by removing a lens without removal of the light assembly.
Table 1 lists the lamps covered in this section, and their associated circuit breakers.
Lighting
Location Light Assembly Circuit Breakers
Section
Aft lavatory dome lights Grimes incandescent 33-25-50 CBP5 A-10, BOARD; CBPG-13,
LAV; Emergency lights power
(see NOTE below)
Aft lavatory mirror lights Aerospace Lighting 33-25-50 CBPG-7, LAV MIRROR
fluorescent
Airstair/Boarding lights Grimes incandescent 33-45-00 CBP5 A-10, BOARD; CBPG-3,
ENTRY AREA; CBPG-13, LAV;
Emergency lights power (see
NOTE below)
Baggage dome lights Grimes incandescent 33-33-00 CBPG-5, BAGGAGE
Baggage door flush-mounted Grimes incandescent 33-33-00 CBPG-5, BAGGAGE
dome lights
Cabin indirect lights Aerospace Lighting 33-21-02 CBP1 C-12, UPR CABIN LTS;
fluorescent CBP1 E-14, CABIN LTS CONT;
CBPG-32, LOWER CABIN LTS
Cabin reading/table lights Wemac incandescent 33-22-20 CBPG-11, LH READ TABLE;
CBPG-12, RH READ TABLE;
Emergency lights power (see
NOTE below)
Cockpit map lights Wemac incandescent 33-05-00 CBP1 P-4, PLT OVHD MAP LT;
CBP2 N-12, CPLT OVHD MAP
LT
Emergency lights Aft lavatory dome; Aft 33-51-00 CBPG-3, ENTRY AREA;
entry dome; Cabin CBPG-11, LH READ TABLE;
reading/table CBPG-12, RH READ TABLE;
CBPG-13, LAV; CBP5 A-10,
BOARD; Emergency lights
power (see NOTE below)
Entertainment equipment Vista incandescent 33-21-08 CBPG-4, CABIN FLOOR
lights
Entry dome lights Grimes incandescent 33-10-00 CBPG-3, ENTRY AREA; CBP5
A-10, BOARD; Emergency lights
power (see NOTE below)
Nov 10/2006
Lighting
Location Light Assembly Circuit Breakers
Section
Floor accent lights Vista incandescent 33-22-01 CBPG-1, GALLEY LAV
ACCENT; CBPG-4, CABIN
FLOOR
Forward wardrobe dome light Whelen incandescent 33-10-00 CBPG-3, ENTRY AREA
Galley work and effect lights Aerospace Lighting 33-26-00 CBPG-2, GALLEY WORK
fluorescent
Jumpseat light Wemac incandescent 33-10-00 CBPG-3, ENTRY AREA
Ordinance sign lights Grimes incandescent 33-24-00 CBP1 F-11, PASS WARN
SIGNS; Emergency lights power
(see NOTE below)
LAMPS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TABLE 1
NOTE: To prevent emergency lights battery power from being provided to the associated lights, ensure
that the EMER LTS toggle switch, located in the cockpit, is placed in the OFF position.
EMER
LTS
ON
OFF
ARM
COCKPIT EMER LTS SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
STANDARD PRACTICES - LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Passenger Service Unit and Headliner Indirect Lights
(1) To remove a Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or headliner indirect lamp (Figure 401):
(a) Open and lock out associated circuit breaker(s) listed in Table 1.
(b) If applicable, remove lens per 1.A.(2).
(c) Disconnect wiring from lamp.
(d) Pull lamp from clips.
(e) Remove lamp.
(2) To remove a PSU indirect light lens:
NOTE: Due to lap joints on lenses, it is necessary to remove overlapping lenses first.
(a) Identify lenses using tape labeled with position (i.e., RS1, RS2, etc.).
(b) Gently pull down on lower edge of PSU.
(c) Pull bottom of lens away from PSU to release hook-and-loop strips.
(d) Pull lens out and remove from aircraft.
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
FLUORESCENT
LAMP
MOUNTING
CLIP
PSU AND HEADLINER INDIRECT LIGHTS

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
(3) To install a PSU or headliner indirect lamp (Figure 401):
(a) Install lamp into clips.
(b) Restore electrical connections to lamp.
(c) Install lens per 1.A.(4), if applicable.
(d) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify that lamp turns on.
(e) Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
(4) To install a PSU indirect light lens:
(a) While putting downward pressure on lower edge of PSU, slide top of lens up into slots;
then slide bottom of lens toward PSU and into place.
(b) Repeat step (a) for each lens.
B. Galley Fluorescent Lights
(1) To remove a galley work or effect lamp (Figure 402):
(b) Remove fasteners securing lens to galley.
(c) Remove lens.
(d) Pull lamp from clips.
(e) Disconnect wiring from lamp.
(f) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
EFFECT
LIGHTS
WORK
LIGHTS
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD)
GALLEY FLUORESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 402
(2) To install a galley work or effect lamp (Figure 402):
(c) Position lens and secure with fasteners.
C. Grimes Incandescent Lights
(1) To remove an incandescent lamp from a Grimes light assembly (Figure 403):
(b) Verify that boarding and emergency lighting systems are off (33-45-00 and 33-51-00).
(c) Remove protective screen (if applicable).
(d) Push on lens, rotate counterclockwise, and remove lens.
(e) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
LIGHT
ASSEMBLY
LENS
LAMP
GRIMES INCANDESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 403
(2) To install an incandescent lamp into a Grimes light assembly (Figure 403):
NOTE: Do not touch the lamp directly with fingers during installation. If touched with bare
fingers, wipe finger oil off of the lamp with a soft cloth and alcohol. Finger oil will
cause momentary smoking and premature lamp failure when the lamp is energized.
(a) Install lamp.
(b) Position lens and rotate clockwise to secure.
(c) Install protective screen (if applicable).
D. Grimes Flush-mounted Incandescent Lights
(1) To remove an incandescent lamp from a Grimes flush-mounted light assembly (Figure 404):
(b) Remove hardware securing cover.
(c) Remove cover, protective grill, and lens.
(d) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
AIRCRAFT
STRUCTURE
LENS
PROTECTIVE
GRILL
LAMP
COVER
GRIMES FLUSH-MOUNTED INCANDESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 404
(2) To install an incandescent lamp into a Grimes flush-mounted light assembly (Figure 404):
(a) Install lamp.
(b) Position lens, protective grill, and cover.
(c) Install hardware securing lens, protective grill, and cover.
E. Whelen Incandescent Lights
(1) To remove an incandescent lamp from a Whelen light assembly (Figure 405):
(b) Remove protective screen (if applicable).
(c) Remove fasteners securing inner ring.
(d) Remove inner ring.
(e) Drop down lens and remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
INNER RING
LAMP
INNER RING
FASTENERS
LENS
WHELEN INCANDESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 405
(2) To install an incandescent lamp into a Whelen light assembly (Figure 405):
(a) Install lamp.
(b) Position lens and inner ring, and secure with fasteners.
(c) Install protective screen (if applicable).
F. Wemac Incandescent Lights
(1) To remove an incandescent lamp from a Wemac light assembly (Figure 406):
(b) Grasp bezel and pull to remove from lamp assembly.
(c) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
AIRCRAFT
STRUCTURE
LIGHT ASSEMBLY
BEZEL
LAMP
WEMAC INCANDESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 406
(2) To install an incandescent lamp into a Wemac light assembly (Figure 406):
(a) Install lamp.
(b) Position bezel and press onto lamp assembly.
(c) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify that lamp turns on.
(d) Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
G. Vista Incandescent Lights
(1) To remove a Vista accent light strip (Figure 407):
(b) If applicable, gently pull up bottom edge of carpet strip on lower air duct.
(c) Using an offset screwdriver, remove fasteners securing lighting strip to underside of
kick panel or cabinet, as applicable.
(d) Disconnect wiring from light strip.
(e) Remove light strip.
Nov 10/2006
LIGHT STRIP
VISTA INCANDESCENT LIGHTS

FIGURE 407
(2) To install a Vista accent light strip (Figure 407):
(a) Restore electrical connections to light strip.
(b) Position light strip and secure with fasteners.
(c) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify that floor accent light turns
on.
H. Grimes Incandescent Ordinance Sign Lights
(1) To remove an incandescent lamp from a Grimes ordinance sign light assembly (Figure 408):
(b) Gain access to the back side of ordinance sign or grasp ordinance sign with fingers,
pull to release clips, and pull out far enough to reach lamp.
(c) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
PANEL
LAMP
LIGHT
ASSEMBLY
CLIPS
GRIMES INCANDESCENT ORDINANCE SIGN LIGHTS

FIGURE 408
(2) To install an incandescent lamp into a Grimes ordinance sign light assembly (Figure 408):
(a) Install lamp.
(b) Insert ordinance sign into slot until it clips snaps into place or close PSU, as
applicable.
(c) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify that lamp turns on.
I. Mirror Fluorescent Lights
(1) To remove a lavatory mirror fluorescent lamp:
(b) Remove fasteners securing lens to mirror box.
(c) Remove mirror light lens from mirror box.
(d) Disconnect wiring from lamp.
(e) Pull lamp from clips.
(f) Remove lamp.
Nov 10/2006
(2) To install a lavatory mirror fluorescent lamp:
(c) Position and secure mirror light lens with fasteners.
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 21 - AIR CON-
DITIONING
CHAPTER 21 - AIR CONDITIONING

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
21-22-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
21-22-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
21-22-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
21-40-03 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
21-40-03 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
21-61-18 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
21-61-18 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
21-61-18 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 21 - AIR CONDITIONING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DISTRIBUTION 21-22-00

Ecs Return Air Distribution 1
Conditioned Air Distribution 1
Gasper Air Distribution 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
ENTRY AREA HEAT 21-40-03

Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL 21-61-18

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DISTRIBUTION
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. ECS RETURN AIR DISTRIBUTION

A. Description/Location
Return air ducts and adapter assemblies have been added to the Environmental Control System
(ECS) on the left and right sides of the cabin. Return air from the main cabin circulates through an
opening between the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) and cabin headliner on each side of the
cabin.
Air ventilation holes have been added to the aft side of the forward wardrobe near floor level to
allow air to be drawn from the entry area. An air duct is installed to allow air to be drawn through
these air ventilation holes down into the existing ductwork. The air duct is located in the aft
outboard section of the forward wardrobe under an easily removed closeout box or closeout panel.
Air from the area near the smoke detector closeout is drawn through an existing manifold into a
duct assembly located outboard of the water tank.
B. Operation
The production-installed ECS equipment controls return air through the remaining ductwork. Refer
to the ECS Return Air Distribution graphic to view a layout of the return air modifications.
2. CONDITIONED AIR DISTRIBUTION

New air conditioning ducts have been installed on the left and right sides of the aircraft at floor
level. Modifications include added duct assemblies to supply the cabin, aft lavatory, and baggage
areas. Conditioned air is delivered into the entry area through manifold assemblies that are
located at floor level in the lower galley assembly.
Conditioned air is also distributed through smaller ducts to the aft lavatory through vents in the
vanity kick panel, to the baggage area through a vent on the left-hand bulkhead, and to the water
tank compartment.
B. Operation
The production-installed ECS equipment controls distribution of conditioned air. For information
regarding cabin temperature control, see 21-61-18. Refer to the Conditioned Air Distribution
graphic to view a layout of the conditioned air modifications.
3. GASPER AIR DISTRIBUTION

Gasper air ducts have been installed on the left and right sides of the aircraft to distribute air to
gaspers located in the cabin PSU assemblies. Splice assemblies have been added to connect the
left- and right-hand gasper air ducts. Ancillary ducts distribute air to the pilot, copilot, jumpseat,
galley, and aft lavatory. Cooling air is also supplied to the main avionics compartment,
entertainment cabinet, and bulkhead monitors.
Nov 10/2006
B. Operation
The production-installed ECS equipment controls distribution of gasper air. Refer to the Gasper Air
Distribution graphic for a layout of the gasper air modifications.
LH HEADLINER
FS FS
RETURN AIR DUCTS FS FS FS
621.00 529.00 409.00 379.00 280.00
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
RETURN AIR DUCTS
FS FS FS FS FS FS
280.00 280.00 379.00 529.00 574.00 621.00
WL
97.50
WL
73.50
RH HEADLINER RETURN
AIR DUCTS
ECS RETURN AIR DISTRIBUTION
Nov 10/2006
FS
555.00
FS FS FS
353.00 542.00 621.00
GRILL IN
BAGGAGE
HEADLINER
WL
97.50
WL
73.50
RH MAIN AIR DUCT
FS
555.00
FS FS FS FS
621.00 589.00 542.00 353.00
WL
97.50
WL
73.50
LH MAIN AIR DUCT
CONDITIONED AIR DISTRIBUTION
Nov 10/2006
LH MAIN GASPER LH CABIN

FS FS AIR DUCT FS PSU ASSY FS
621.00 574.00 379.00 280.00
WL
73.50
AVIONICS COOLING
DUCT
RH MAIN GASPER RH CABIN

GALLEY FS FS AIR DUCT PSU ASSY FS FS
280.00 353.62 574.00 621.00
COOLING
WL
73.50
GASPER AIR FOR PILOT,

COPILOT, JUMPSEAT,
AND GALLEY
GASPER AIR DISTRIBUTION
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DISTRIBUTION - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the return air duct from the forward wardrobe:
(1) Remove contents from wardrobe.
(2) Remove air duct closeout (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(3) Remove fasteners securing air duct to floor.
(4) Remove air duct.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the return air duct in the forward wardrobe:
(1) Position and secure air duct to floor with fasteners.
(2) Install air duct closeout (secure with hook-and-loop strips).
(3) Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
(4) Perform test in accordance with ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DISTRIBUTION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the air distribution
system to ensure proper air pressure.
NOTE: The following test procedure requires qualified operators using approved aircraft
operational procedures.
B. Equipment and Facilities Required
(1) Equipment
• Pressure gauge (0-20 inches of water)
(2) Facilities
• None
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Prepare aircraft electrical, APU, and ECS systems for outside operations.
B. Start APU and engage electrical and ECS systems.
C. Engage utility buses.
3. TEST
A. Perform integrity check of air distribution system in accordance with Bombardier Completion
Center Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-131, revision (A), or the latest
approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Disengage aircraft electrical buses and ECS system.
B. Shut down APU unless required for further testing.
C. Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA HEAT
ENTRY AREA HEAT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An air heater has been installed to provide additional heat to the entry area through outlets in the galley
kick panel and the jumpseat well risers. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.
Component (Qty) Location

ENTRY HTR CONT switch Galley Circuit Breaker Panel
Heater B1HR Main avionics compartment
Relay K1HR Adjacent to heater B1HR
ENTRY HEATER circuit breaker CBPG-38
ENTRY AREA HEAT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
NOTE: The entry area heater does not have a blower. The cabin Environmental Control System (ECS)
must be ON and operating to provide air flow through the heater (21-22-00).
Toggle the ENTRY HTR CONT switch to send a signal via the cabin data bus. This signal energizes
relay K1HR and sends power from the 115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 2 bus to the heater. Circuit breaker
CBPG-38 provides circuit protection for the heater. An over-temperature sensor in the heater will turn the
system OFF in case of overheating.
Nov 10/2006
28VDC - CABIN BUS 1

LIGHTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 5 2.5 5 5 2 1 1.5 1 2
GALLEY GALLEY ENTRY CABIN BAGGAGE CONF LAV GALLEY HTR SYSTEM
LAV WORK AREA FLOOR READ MIRROR CONTROL CONT
ACCENT
WATER
28VDC - CABIN BUS 2
LIGHTS ENTERTAINMENT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
3 3 2.5 7.5 4 3 3 5 5 2
LH READ RH READ LAV TOILET ENT MGMT 1 MGMT 2 FWD AFT CONTROL
TABLE TABLE
CABIN MONITORS
115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 1 115VAC 60Hz

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7.5 5 15 15
OVEN GALLEY UTILITY MICROWAVE

WATER OUTLETS
HTR
115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 2

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 5 15 10 10 5
LOWER LAV AUDIO HOT COFFEE ENTRY ENTRY

CABIN WATER AMP WATER MAKER HEATER HTR
LTS HTR DISP CONT
GALLEY CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (CBPG)
RBL
20.00
AIR FLOW
(VIEW LOOKING AFT AT FS320)
ENTRY AREA HEATER
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA HEAT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the entry area
heater system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• None
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Start APU or aircraft engines.
B. Verify that system circuit breaker(s) are closed.
3. TEST
A. Test the entry area heaters in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Cabin Management
System Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-251, revision (F), or the latest
approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Shut down engines or APU.
B. Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The cabin environmental control system has been modified to allow the cockpit crew to transfer control
of the cabin temperature to the cabin switch panels. Cabin switch panels with temperature control
capabilities interface to the production cabin environmental control system through a potentiometer built
into the cabin management system Cabin Control Module 1 (CCM 1) (23-90-00). Flexible hoses and a
muffler assembly have been installed outboard of the dado panel at FS462R to facilitate air flow to the
relocated production cabin temperature sensor. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

CABIN TEMP annunciator/switch Auxiliary Annunciator Panel
Relay K200HN In bulkhead FS280R, behind production closeouts
Relay K201HN In bulkhead FS280R, behind production closeouts
Relocated production cabin temp sensor Outboard of dado panel at FS478R
Temperature control module Outboard of dado panel at FS428R
CABIN TEMP AUTO circuit breaker CBP2 E-15
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
NOTE: For the CABIN TEMP annunciator/switch to transfer temperature control to the cabin, the CABIN
switch on the cockpit overhead air conditioning panel must be in the NORM or STBY position.
The cabin temperature sensor draws cabin air through the muffler from an air inlet screen on the inboard
side of the dado panel at FS442R. The air is returned to the cabin from the cabin temperature sensor to
the forward side of the divan end cabinet, diffuser, and floor area.
To transfer cabin temperature control to the cabin, press the CABIN TEMP annunciator/switch to
extinguish the COCKPIT annunciator and illuminate CABIN. Cabin temperature control is returned to the
cockpit by pressing the CABIN TEMP annunciator/switch to illuminate COCKPIT, or by turning the
CABIN switch on the cockpit overhead air conditioning panel to the MAN position.
Relay K200HN disconnects the 1 kΩ potentiometer in the cockpit overhead panel from the cabin
temperature controller and connects the 1 kΩ potentiometer in the Temperature Control Module (TCM)
to the cabin temperature controller, transferring temperature control to any cabin switch panel with
temperature control capabilities.
To adjust the temperature from the cabin, verify that the cockpit CABIN TEMP annunciator/switch is set
to CABIN. Then press CABIN TEMP and CONTROL ADJUST -/+ on the VIP Switch Panel. The selected
cabin temperature is displayed on the panel.
Nov 10/2006
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL
AIRSHOW AFT FWD CABIN

AUDIO MODE VIDEO VIDEO CABIN UPWASH
SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT TEMP LIGHTS
AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

SPEAKER TONE MONITOR MONITOR FLOOR DNWASH
ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF LIGHTS LIGHTS
VIP SWITCH PANEL
CABIN CALL SMOKE

DET
COCKPIT CABIN
CABIN LAV
TEMP RESET TEST
ENTRY
LIGHTS
ON
OFF
AUXILIARY ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
Nov 10/2006
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the cabin temperature sensor box:
(1) Open and lock out circuit breaker(s) listed in Table 1.
(2) Remove dado panel at FS478R (25-27-10).
(3) Disconnect electrical and air connections from sensor box.
(4) Remove fasteners securing sensor box to panel.
(5) Remove sensor box.
B. To remove the temperature control module:
(2) Remove dado panel at FS428R (25-27-10).
(3) Disconnect electrical connections from control module.
(4) Remove fasteners securing control module to panel.
(5) Remove control module.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the cabin temperature sensor box:
(1) Position sensor box and restore electrical and air connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing sensor box.
(3) Install dado panel (25-27-10).
(4) Perform Challenger AMM Task 21-61-00-710-801.
B. To install the temperature control module:
(1) Position control module and restore electrical connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing control module.
(4) Perform Challenger AMM Task 21-61-00-710-801.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the cabin
temperature control system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• None
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Verify that all circuit breakers are closed on all circuit breaker panels, except those necessary for
ground safety.
B. Verify that all equipment necessary for the test is installed in the aircraft before proceeding.
3. TEST
A. Test the cabin temperature control system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center
Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-187, revision (B), or the latest approved
revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Disengage aircraft electrical buses and ECS system.
B. Shut down APU unless required for further testing.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 22 - AUTO
FLIGHT
CHAPTER 22 - AUTO FLIGHT

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
22-30-00 1 Dec 3/03

2 Dec 3/03
3 Dec 3/03
4 Dec 3/03
22-30-00 401 Dec 3/03

402 Dec 3/03
403 Dec 3/03
404 Dec 3/03
405 Dec 3/03
406 Dec 3/03
407 Dec 3/03
408 Dec 3/03
409 Dec 3/03
410 Dec 3/03
22-30-00 501 Dec 3/03

502 Dec 3/03
503 Dec 3/03
504 Dec 3/03
505 Dec 3/03
506 Dec 3/03
507 Dec 3/03
508 Dec 3/03
509 Dec 3/03
510 Dec 3/03
511 Dec 3/03
512 Dec 3/03
22-30-00 601 Dec 3/03

602 Dec 3/03


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 22 - AUTO FLIGHT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM 22-30-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 2
Removal 401
Installation 404
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Adjustment Completion 502
Test Set-up 503
Test 503
Test Completion 511
Inspection/Check
Introduction 601
Job Set-up 601
Procedure 601
Job Completion 602


AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM

Prepared by DAS-605786-NM
AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
The Safe Flight Instrument Corporation Enhanced Autopower Auto Throttle System (ATS) incorporates
dual-servo control of the thrust levers to enable thrust and speed control for takeoff, climb, cruise,
descent, landing, and go-around modes of operation. The ATS is available in Automatic Flight Control
System (AFCS) coupled (autopilot or flight director modes), as well as AFCS-disengaged flight. In
addition, the enhanced system includes automatic full-time N1 engine synchronization with
pilot-selectable N2 engine synchronization available in cruise.
The ATS is interfaced with the Precision Plus update of the Collins FMS 6000 (Challenger Service
Bulletin SB604-34-031) and is capable of controlling engine thrust from takeoff to touchdown in
conjunction with AFCS vertical modes and Vertical Navigation (VNAV) plan speeds. The system uses
the Flight Management System (FMS) thrust management table-based N1 limit and target calculations
as displayed on the primary Engine Instrument Control And Indication System (EICAS) N1 fan speed
displays. It is operational through all phases of flight, allowing the system to control engine thrust.
Installation of the ATS includes a dual servo clutch pack, an ATS computer, dual Mode Status Displays
(MSD), and an ATS Control Panel (CP). In addition, the original thrust lever quadrant is replaced with a
quadrant that includes ATS disconnect switches on both thrust levers. The thrust lever friction control is
deactivated, and proper thrust lever friction is maintained by the ATS clutch system. Circuit breaker
CBP1 G-7, AUTO THROTTLE, provides circuit protection for this system. Circuit breaker CBP2 P-8,
AUX ANNUN, provides circuit protection for the ATS MSD.
The ATS consists of the components listed in Table 1. The ATS computer is interfaced through an
ARINC 429 data bus to the Air Data Computer (ADC), Inertial Reference Unit (IRU) 1, left Input/Output
Concentrator (IOC), and ground proximity warning computer. The engine N1 speeds are picked up at the
left engine control amplifier, A1KH; and the right engine control amplifier, A2KH. The ATS computer is
also interfaced to the flap control lever, which supplies a ground from the flaps in the 0, 20, 30, and 45
degree positions. Weight-on-Wheels (WOW) logic is also interfaced to the ATS computer.
NOTE: Refer to Safe Flight Repair Procedure Document No. R-2830 (included as an attachment) for
additional information pertaining to installation, repair and part replacement.
2. LOCATION
The main components of the ATS and their locations are listed in the following table and figure.
Component Location
ATS computer Forward avionics bay, FS244.4, LBL19.75, WL59.35
Dual servo clutch actuator assembly Forward avionics bay, FS250, BL 0.00, WL76.5
ATS mode status display Pilot’s and copilot’s glareshield
Control panel with engage switch (ATS), Pilot’s glareshield
green LED engaged mode annunciators,
and N2 synchronization selector (N2 SYNC)
ATS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
EFFECTIVITY: TE-22305001-SMM-2
22-30-00 Page 1
Dec 3/03
A1.0
FS FS
250.00 244.40
REF REF COMPUTER
FS
234.95
REF
LBL
19.75
REF
CLUTCH AND
BL
SERVO KIT 0.00
REF
WL
76.50
REF
CLUTCH AND
COMPUTER SERVO KIT
AUTO THROTTLE EQUIPMENT LOCATION
3. OPERATION
The ATS is controlled at the ATS CP, which incorporates an ATS system engage switch, and green LED
engaged annunciators. It also incorporates the N2 synchronization push-button selector (N2 SYNC).
Additionally, an MSD that provides mode annunciation and caution messages for the system is located
in the glareshield in front of each pilot.
The ATS CP has two green LED annunciator lights located immediately to the left and right of the ATS
push-button switch. These lamps illuminate whenever the ATS servos are engaged. Each MSD
incorporates a 2-line, 8-character LED alphanumeric display. The top line is green and displays ATS
mode messages. The bottom line is amber and displays ATS caution and disengaged messages. If a
flashing amber FAIL is displayed, the ATS push-button switch can be pressed and held until an amber
fail-fault message is displayed to aid in troubleshooting.
Table 2 lists the ATS operating modes and displays.
THRUST/SPEED
ATS MODE MSD MESSAGE AFCS
MODE
Takeoff N1 N1 TO TO
Climb (except FLC) Mach or IAS SPEED Any (except FLC)
Climb (FLC) N1 N1 CLB FLC
Cruise Mach or IAS SPEED Altitude
Cruise (N2 sync) Mach SPEED N2 Altitude
Descent (except FLC) Mach or IAS SPEED Any (except FLC)
Descent (FLC) Disengaged DESCENT FLC
Maneuvering/Approach IAS SPEED Any (except FLC)
Landing (<50 ft. RA) Thrust Lever Retard RETARD Disengaged
Go-Around N1 N1 TO GA
ATS OPERATING MODES AND DISPLAYS

TABLE 2
22-30-00 Page 2
Dec 3/03
The ATS system drives the thrust levers directly, providing direct indication to the flight crew of thrust
lever/engine control operation of the system while engaged. The reverse-locking mechanical clutches
driven by each servo provide the identical feel to the pilot when manually operating the thrust levers with
the ATS engaged or disengaged, or when overriding the system. With the ATS installed, the aircraft’s
thrust lever friction mechanism is not required and is disabled. The force required to overcome the thrust
lever friction is approximately 5 pounds.
When the ATS is engaged, the thrust levers may be manually overridden. Upon release of the thrust
levers, the ATS servos will resume control of the thrust levers.
The ATS can be manually disengaged by:

• Pressing the ATS switch on the ATS control panel. The ATS MSD will display the flashing
amber DISENG’D caution message. The caution message may be cancelled by pressing
either of the ATS DISC push-button switches on the forward face of each throttle lever knob.
• Pressing either ATS DISC push-button switch on the forward face of each throttle lever knob.
The ATS MSD will display the flashing amber DISENG’D caution message. The message may
be cancelled by pressing either of the ATS DISC push-button switches.
• Pulling the CBP1 G-7 AUTO THROTTLE circuit breaker. The ATS MSD will display the
flashing amber FAIL warning message. The warning message may be cancelled by pressing
one of the ATS DISC push-button switches.
The ATS will automatically disengage and illuminate the flashing amber DISENG’D message on the ATS
MSD if either thrust reverser unlocks or if a 13% or greater N1 speed difference occurs.
The ATS will automatically disengage and illuminate the flashing amber FAIL message on the MSD
whenever the ATS disengages due to ATS system or sensor faults. If the ATS FAIL message is flashing
and the cause is unknown, press either ATS DISC push-button switch to cancel the FAIL message. The
ATS may be re-engaged if the fault has cleared. Press the ATS push-button switch on the ATS CP. If the
fault is still present, the ATS flashing amber FAIL message will re-appear.
The ATS will automatically disengage and illuminate the flashing amber FAIL message in the MSD for
the following reasons:
• An ATS malfunction is detected
• A sensor used by the ATS fails
• Engine N1speed is above 98.4% N1
The ATS MSD steady amber FAIL message will be displayed if the ATS MSD does not receive data from
the ATS computer. Depress either ATS DISC push-button switch to confirm disengagement of the ATS
and cancel the FAIL message. Do not engage the ATS.
Refer to Bombardier Operating Manual Supplement Document for operational instructions pertaining to
preflight, take-off, climb, cruise, descent, approach, and landing.
NOTE: The ATS is a supplemental system and is not required for aircraft dispatch. If the system has
been determined to be inoperative or has failed on the ground, the Auto Power Computer
C-88635-3 and/or the ATS Mode Status Displays C-88604-5 and C-88604-6 may be removed
for repair. Circuit breaker CBP1 G-7, AUTO THROTTLE, must be pulled, collared, and
placarded INOPERATIVE. All manual operations of the throttles will remain functional.
22-30-00 Page 3
Dec 3/03
FLIGHT
ATS SPEED CONTROL
ATS MODE STATUS DISPLAY SWITCH KNOB PANEL ATS MODE STATUS DISPLAY
FD VS DOWN SPEED NAV HDG APPR ALT XFR AP ENG FD
ATS
CRS1 SPEED 1/2 BANK HDG ALT AP DISC CRS2

VNAV B/C TURB
P US H P US H P US H
P US H
MODETEXT N2 SYNC
IAS/
MACH
ALT SEL
MODETEXT
T
D
I R
E C
T
L
C
S Y A N I R
NC CE E C
CAUTIONS UP CAUTIONS
ATS ATS
ATS CONTROL N2 SYNC

PANEL SWITCH
AUTO THROTTLE CONTROL AND DISPLAY INDICATORS
22-30-00 Page 4
Dec 3/03

AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: Refer to Safe Flight Repair Procedure Document No. R-2830 for additional information
pertaining to installation, repair, part replacement, and rigging.
A. To remove the ATS computer:
(1) Open and lock out circuit breaker(s) listed in SMM 22-30-00, DESCRIPTION.
(2) Gain access to ATS computer in forward avionics bay.
(3) Loosen ATS computer retaining knob.
(4) Slide ATS computer out from mounting tray.
B. To remove a servo drive sub-assembly motor (Figure 401):
NOTE: The replacement of the servo drive sub-assembly motor has no effect on the auto throttle
system rigging; therefore a rigging check will not be required.
(2) Gain access to the servo drive assembly in forward avionics bay.
(3) Remove motor cover by removing eight flat-head screws on lower edge of cover. Do not
disconnect the electrical connector on the cover. Allow the cover to hang by the electrical
cable.
(4) Disconnect the flat electrical connector on the motor body. Note the orientation of the
connector for later reinstallation.
(5) Mark the position of the motor in relation to the servo sub-assembly. Remove four cap
screws holding the motor flange to the servo sub-assembly.
(6) Carefully remove the motor. There is a plastic mating adapter for the motor shaft. This piece
is now loose and must be secured and retained for later reinstallation of the motor.
C. To remove a servo drive sub-assembly (Figure 401):
NOTE: The replacement of a servo drive sub-assembly has no effect on the auto throttle system
rigging; therefore a rigging check will not be required.
(3) Disconnect servo assembly harness electrical connector.
(4) Remove the servo assembly harness connector from the support bracket.
22-30-00 Page 401
Dec 3/03
A1.0
(5) Support the shaft between the servo drive and clutch assembly with safety wire attached to
the support structure.
(6) Using the modified 3mm Allen wrench (see Safe Flight Repair Procedure R2830), remove
the six screws and lock washers that attach the shaft connection to the servo drive. These
screws are located on the opposite side of the support structure from the servo drive,
between the clutch assembly and the servo support structure.
(7) Remove the six Allen head screws from the flange on the base of the servo drive
sub-assembly.
(8) Remove the servo drive sub-assembly.
NOTE: If the stub shaft comes out of the servo drive, reinstall it.
D. To remove the clutch pack assembly (Figure 401):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of the clutch pack assembly.
(3) Remove one servo drive sub-assembly (Step 1.C. above).
(4) Remove and discard cotter pin and retaining ring from the outboard ends of the four pivot
pins that connect the clutch servo arms to the control rods and control links.
(5) Remove the pivot pins to the inside and allow the rods and links to hang free.
(6) Using the modified 3mm Allen head wrench, remove the six metric screws and lock washers
attaching the shaft flange to the remaining servo drive sub-assembly. The shaft will not fall
since it is supported by the stub shaft of the servo drive output.
(7) The shaft, together with the two clutches, constitutes the clutch pack assembly that can now
be manipulated through the hole left by the removal of the servo drive sub-assembly to free
it from the stub shaft of the remaining servo drive sub-assembly. Maneuver the shaft until it
can be removed downward with the clutches mounted on it.
NOTE: If the stub shaft comes out of the servo drive, reinstall it.
NOTE: The shaft is a two-part assembly. Do not allow the two parts to become axially separated.
E. To remove a bell crank assembly (Figure 401 and Figure 403):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of a bell crank assembly.
22-30-00 Page 402
Dec 3/03
(3) Remove and discard cotter pin and retaining ring from one end of the pivot pin connecting
the inner arm of the bell crank assembly to the control link.
(4) Remove pivot pin and allow control link to hang free.
(5) Disconnect outer arm of the bell crank assembly from the push pull engine cable (AMM Task
76-11-04-000-801).
(6) Remove four Allen-head screws retaining the bell crank assembly.
(7) Remove the bell crank assembly from support structure.
F. To remove a control rod (Figure 402):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of a control rod.
(2) Remove access panels to gain access to the cockpit pedestal interior.
(3) Disconnect control rod from thrust lever.
(5) Remove and discard cotter pin and retaining ring from the control rod pivot pin end closest to
the clutch.
(6) Remove pivot pin connecting the control rod to the clutch servo arm.
(7) Manipulate the control rod up and remove.
G. To remove the ATS control panel or a mode status display:
(2) Remove glareshield front face cover screws.
(3) Remove ATS control panel or display mounting screws.
(4) Pull out and disconnect wiring to the component.
(5) Remove component.
22-30-00 Page 403
Dec 3/03
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the ATS computer:
(1) Verify protective covers have been removed from ATS computer.
(2) Position ATS computer on the mounting tray and slide into electrical connectors.
(3) Secure ATS computer with retaining knob.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of auto throttle
system in accordance with SMM 22-30-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
B. To install a servo drive sub-assembly motor (Figure 401):
NOTE: The replacement of a servo drive sub-assembly motor has no effect on the auto throttle
system rigging, therefore a rigging check will not be required.
(1) Position plastic shaft adapter removed during motor removal onto servo sub-assembly shaft.
(2) Position motor and insert motor shaft into shaft adapter, being careful to align fork on shaft
with adapter. Push the motor firmly in place and rotate to same position noted during
removal.
(3) Install the four cap screws securing motor to servo sub-assembly.
(4) Attach the flat electrical connector using the orientation noted during removal.
(5) Secure the motor cover with eight flat-head screws.
C. To install a servo drive sub-assembly (Figure 401):
NOTE: The replacement of a servo drive sub-assembly has no effect on the auto throttle system
rigging; therefore a rigging check will not be required.
(1) Position servo drive sub-assembly and secure with the six Allen-head screw/lock washer
combinations.
(2) Using the modified 3mm Allen wrench (see Safe Flight Repair Procedure R2830), install the
six screws and lock washers that attach the shaft connection to the servo drive.
(3) Remove the wire supporting the shaft connection.
(4) Attach the servo assembly harness connector to the support bracket.
(5) Connect the servo assembly harness electrical connector.
22-30-00 Page 404
Dec 3/03
D. To install the clutch pack assembly (Figure 401):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of the clutch pack assembly.
NOTE: The shaft is a two-part assembly. Do not allow the two parts to become axially separated.
(1) Support the clutch pack assembly and position onto the stub shaft of the servo drive.
(2) Using the modified 3mm Allen wrench (see Safe Flight Repair Procedure R2830), install the
six screws attaching the shaft flange to the servo drive sub-assembly.
(3) While supporting the assembly, install the remaining servo drive sub-assembly (Step 2.C.
above).
(4) Install the four pivot pins that connect the clutch servo arms to the control rods and control
links.
NOTE: Read the adjustment procedures before securing the pivot pins.
(5) Install new retaining rings and cotter pins on each pivot pin.
(6) Verify proper adjustment of auto throttle system in accordance with SMM 22-30-00,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
E. To install a bell crank assembly (Figure 401, Figure 403):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of a bell crank assembly.
NOTE: The left (pilot) and right (copilot) bell cranks are not interchangeable. The outside end of
the bell crank shaft is stamped with -1 or -2 to indicate left or right, respectively.
(1) Position bell crank assembly inner arm into the support structure.
(2) Install the four Allen-head screws attaching the bell crank assembly to the support structure.
(3) Connect the outer arm of bell crank assembly to the push-pull engine cable (AMM Task
76-00-04-400-801).
(4) Connect the inner arm of bell crank assembly to the control link and insert the pivot pin.
(5) Install new retaining ring and cotter pin on pivot pin.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
22-30-00 Page 405
Dec 3/03
F. To install a control rod (Figure 402):
NOTE: A rigging check and adjustment is required after replacement of a control rod.
NOTE: The left (pilot) and right (copilot) control rods are not interchangeable. Control rod
1135-105-1 is for the left side, and 1135-105-2 is for the right side.
(1) Ensure the control rods are the same length within 1/2 turns of the rod ends. Adjust rod
length by turning rod ends. Adjust the length with a 1/4" diameter rig pin through the clutch
assembly, while the throttles are positioned at flight idle.
(2) Verify that threads are visible in the witness hole.
(3) Tighten jam nuts and secure with lockwire.
(4) Orient control rods such that the flats at the lower rod ends are adjacent to each other
(i.e., flats to inboard).
(5) Connect control rod to clutch servo arm and install pivot pin.
(6) Install new retaining ring and cotter pin on pivot pin.
(7) Connect control rod to thrust lever.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(9) Install cockpit pedestal access panels and secure with fasteners.
G. To install the ATS control panel or a mode status display:
(1) Connect wiring to ATS control panel or display and position into glareshield.
(2) Secure with mounting hardware.
(3) Install glareshield front face cover and secure with screws.
22-30-00 Page 406
Dec 3/03
MOTOR COVER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
PUSH PULL CABLE
SERVO DRIVE CONNECTION
SUB-ASSEMBLY
BELL CRANK
MOUNTING SCREWS (6) ASSEMBLY
CONTROL LINK
(TYPICAL - 2 PLACES)
METRIC ALLEN-HEAD
SCREWS (6)
CLUTCH PACK
ASSEMBLY C
L
A A
METRIC ALLEN
HEAD SCREWS (6)
PIVOT PINS
(TYPICAL - 6 PLACES)
MOUNTING SCREWS (6)

BELL CRANK
ASSEMBLY
SERVO DRIVE
SUB-ASSEMBLY PUSH PULL CABLE
CONNECTION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
MOTOR-COVER
B B
FORWARD
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
SERVO DRIVE, CLUTCH PACK, AND BALL CRANK ASSEMBLIES

FIGURE 401
22-30-00 Page 407
Dec 3/03
THRUST LEVER
CONNECTION
CONTROL ROD
PIVOT PIN
CLUTCH SERVO
ARM
CONTROL LINK
BELL CRANK
INNER ARM
PIVOT PIN
RIG PIN
CLUTCH PACK (IDLE POSITION)
CLUTCH SERVO
ASSEMBLY
ARM
FORWARD
VIEW A-A
(LOOKING OUTBOARD LHS)
CONTROL RODS AND LINKS

FIGURE 402
22-30-00 Page 408
Dec 3/03
CONTROL ROD
CLEVIS (PART OF
PUSH PULL CABLE)
BELL CRANK
OUTER ARM
RIG PIN
(OPPOSITE, AT IDLE POSITION)
VIEW B-B FORWARD

(LOOKING INBOARD RHS)
BELL CRANK ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 403
22-30-00 Page 409
Dec 3/03
22-30-00 Page 410
Dec 3/03

AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The adjustment procedures give instructions for adjusting the auto throttle system. The test
procedures are used to verify that the auto throttle system is functioning properly and performs its
intended function in all available modes without interfering with the operation of other aircraft
systems.
NOTE: The following adjustment and test procedures require qualified operators using approved
aircraft operational procedures.
(1) Equipment
• Vendor supplied rig pin

• Special tools per Safe Flight Repair Procedure, R2830
• Force Gauge, 8 to 10 ft-lb
• Pitot-static Test Set capable of simulating airspeeds to 350 knots and altitudes to
45,000 feet
• Communications Cable, Safe Flight P/N SK103379 or SK102930
• IBM-compatible Personal Computer (PC), 386 or higher, DOS 5.0 or higher, VGA
or Hercules graphics adapter
• 3.5" Diskette of PC Maintenance Software, Safe Flight P/N 1613-1509
• N1 Transducer Simulator
• N2 Transducer Simulator
• GSE 71-00-32 Power Plant Rigging Kit
(2) Facilities
• External power
C. Reference Documents
• Bombardier Completion Center Drawing TM4332230-10, Autothrottle Clutch and Servo

Install - Enhanced
• CL-604 AMM
• Safe Flight Repair Procedure, R2830
Adjustment Set-up
D. Prior to proceeding with adjustment of the auto throttle system, obtain the required tolerances for
throttle split and throttle cushion at maximum power, idle, and shutoff.
Adjustment
E. Fuel Control Cable Adjustment
NOTE: This procedure assumes the fuel control cable(s) and control rod(s) are disconnected at
the ATS bell crank and throttle levers, respectively.
22-30-00 Page 501
Dec 3/03
A1.0
(1) Set cable assembly swivel fittings to provide equal adjustment forward and aft, and tighten
jam nuts.
(2) Release aft and forward most clamps on forward fuel control cable assembly.
(3) Ensure fuel control lever on the engine is in the idle position (15o- 18o) using the protractor
supplied in the Power Plant Rigging Kit, GSE 71-00-32.
(4) Set throttle levers at idle, against the stops.
(5) Install vendor-supplied rig pin to position ATS clutch and bell crank in the idle position (Figure 402).
(6) Connect upper end of control rod to throttle lever using existing hardware.
(7) Remove the rig pin and exercise throttle lever through full travel to ensure smooth operation,
and verify that the control rod does not foul on any structure. Position throttle lever in the idle
position against the stop. Reinstall rig pin.
(8) Check witness hole on clevis end of forward fuel control cable assembly. Approximately 1/2
inch of thread should be exposed.
(9) Align clevis hole on cable end with bell crank outer arm using clevis pin. When alignment is
complete, install clevis pin, and secure with circular clip and cotter pin. Tighten clamps on
fuel control cable. Remove rig pin.
(10) Repeat steps 3.B.(1) through 3.B.(9) for the other fuel control cable.
(11) Ensure that all jam nuts, rod ends, and clevis bolts are secured with lockwire or cotter pins.
F. Throttle Lever Split Adjustment
(1) Check throttle lever split. Throttle lever split is to be less than 1/8" per CL-604 AMM.
(2) Release aft and forwardmost clamps on the forward cable assembly.
(3) To retard a throttle lever, adjust cable housing at the swivel fitting aft.
(4) To advance a throttle lever, adjust cable housing at the swivel fitting forward.
(5) Verify throttle cushion for max power, idle, and shut-off.
(6) Tighten jam nuts and secure with lockwire.
(7) Tighten aft and forwardmost clamps on the forward cable assembly.
2. ADJUSTMENT COMPLETION
A. Remove all equipment used for maintenance.
B. Perform test per section 6.
C. Return the aircraft to its initial condition.
22-30-00 Page 502
Dec 3/03
3. TEST SET-UP
A. Configure aircraft in standard configuration for maintenance.
4. TEST
A. Operational Test of the Throttle Controls
(1) Perform CL-604 AMM Task 76-10-00-710-801, Operational Test.
NOTE: If the throttle controls fail to meet any of the requirements of the operational test of the
throttle controls, perform CL-604 AMM Task 76-10-00-720-801, Functional Test of the
Throttle Controls.
NOTE: If the throttle controls fail to meet any of the requirements of the functional test of the
throttle controls, perform CL-604 AMM Task 76-10-00-820-801, Rigging of the Throttle
Controls.
B. Friction Test of the Throttle Controls
(1) Operate each throttle lever through travel range a minimum of six (6) times.
(2) Ensure the operation is smooth and does not bind.
(3) Perform the throttle control friction test per CL604 AMM Task 76-10-00-720-802, except that
breakout forces must not exceed 6.5 ft.-lb. and operational forces must not exceed 6.5 ft.-lb.
Omit S76-10-00-720-006, with friction damper at maximum. Friction damper will be fixed at
minimum per TM432230-10-3.
C. Fuel Control Rigging Test
NOTE: Perform the following procedure for both left and right throttle controls.
(1) Verify that throttle control gearbox and main fuel control rig pins can be inserted per CL-604
Task 76-10-00-710-801, Operational Test of the Throttle Controls. Perform steps 1, 4, 5, and
7 of the procedure.
NOTE: When performing step 7 (i), ensure that the quadrant friction is adjusted to full OFF
and the throttle lever stays hard against the stop.
(2) Verify correct fuel control lever angle per CL-604 Task 76-10-00-720-801, Functional Test of
the Throttle Controls. Perform step 5 (a) (do not connect AC power), step 6 (a) to (i), and
step 11 of the procedure.
NOTE: When performing step 6 (d) ensure the quadrant friction is adjusted to full OFF and
the throttle lever stays hard against the stop.
(3) If the throttle control fails to meet any of the above requirements, perform CL-604 Task
76-10-00-820-801, Rigging of the Throttle Controls.
NOTE: CL-604 AMM does not reference the ATS. The forward throttle cables attach to the
input arms to the ATS clutch pack. If forward throttle cable adjustments are required,
22-30-00 Page 503
Dec 3/03
they shall be made to the cable ends that attach to the ATS assembly, not to the
control rods between the throttle quadrant and the ATS assembly.
D. Configuration Procedure
(1) Configure aircraft in standard configuration for maintenance.
(2) Connect external power to the aircraft.
(3) Set EXT AC and BATT to ON.
(4) Verify that all circuit breakers are in on all circuit breaker panels, except those necessary for
ground safety (pitot heat, sensor heat).
(5) Aircraft should be on ground (weight-on-wheels).
(6) Place the IND LTS switch on the miscellaneous lights overhead panel to BRT.
(7) Align IRS 1.
(8) Select Autopilot (AP) to AP #1.
(9) Set flaps at 0 degrees.
(10) Enter OAT in the FMS Performance Thrust Limit Page. The FMS will select Take-Off (TO)
Thrust Limit.
E. Equipment Connections
(1) Connect Communications Cable Assembly, P/N SK103379 or SK102930, between the
AutoPower® Computer test connector and the PC serial port. If SK102930 is used, make
sure all switches on the test cable assembly are set to the CONNECT position.
(2) Apply power to the PC. Upon boot-up, transfer control to the 3.5" floppy drive. Load the 3.5"
floppy disc, P/N 1613-1509. Type APDIAG and press ENTER. Observe that the
maintenance computer calibration page appears on the PC monitor.
F. Input Test
(1) Wait until SYS FAIL on the PC monitor is OFF before proceeding.
(2) Record ATS computer software revision level as displayed on the PC monitor.
(3) The state of the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
NOTE: Only the status or data of parameters noted are of interest. Parameters not listed
may change.
WOW ON T/R UNLOCK OFF

GEAR DN ON DESCEND OFF
22-30-00 Page 504
Dec 3/03
LAMP TEST OFF CLIMB OFF

ENG PB OFF ALT CAP OFF
DISC PB OFF ALT HOLD OFF
VERT TO OFF IAS OFF
DIMMING OFF GA OFF
AP #1 SEL ON AP ENG OFF
OVERSPD OFF N2 SYNC PB OFF
(4) Place the IND LTS switch on the miscellaneous lights overhead panel to the DIM position,
and then press and hold the ATS and N2 SYNC push-button switches. The state of the
following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
ENG PB ON DIMMING ON
N2 SYNC PB ON
(5) Release the ATS and N2 SYNC buttons. Engage AP and place in an Altitude Hold mode.
Press and hold ATS DISC switch on the left-hand thrust lever. The state of the following
parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
ENG PB OFF IAS ON

DISC PB ON AP ENG ON
ALT HOLD ON N2 SYNC PB OFF
(6) Release ATS DISC switch on the left-hand thrust lever. Disengage AP. Set the Altitude
Preselector to an altitude above the current aircraft altitude. Select FLC mode on the FCC,
then press and hold ATS DISC switch on the right-hand thrust lever. The state of the
following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor.
DISC PB ON AP ENG OFF

CLIMB ON
(7) Release ATS DISC switch on the right-hand thrust lever. Set the Altitude Preselector to an
altitude below the current aircraft altitude. Select FLC mode on the FCC. The state of the
following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor.
DISC PB OFF DESCEND ON

CLIMB OFF
(8) Set the Altitude Preselector to an altitude near the current aircraft altitude. Select FLC mode
on the FCC. Adjust Altitude Preselector to current aircraft altitude and note AFCS transition
to Altitude Capture mode. Adjust BARO set knob if necessary to accomplish capture. The
state of the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
22-30-00 Page 505
Dec 3/03
ALT CAP ON DESCEND OFF

ALT HOLD OFF
(9) Approximately 3 seconds later, note the AFCS transition to Altitude Hold mode. The state of
the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
NOTE: Repeat steps 8 and 9 as necessary to note transition below.
ALT CAP OFF ALT HOLD ON
(10) Set the Altitude Preselector to an altitude above the current aircraft altitude. Press a
throttle-mounted TOGA push-button switch. The state of the following parameters should be
indicated on the PC monitor:
VERT TO ON ALT HOLD OFF
(11) Put the aircraft in a weight-off-wheels (in air) configuration in accordance with CL-604
Aircraft Maintenance Manual Task 32-61-00-867-801.
(12) Set the left-hand thrust lever at the MAX POWER position on the throttle quadrant.
(13) Obey all Thrust Reverser System Safety Precautions in accordance with TASK
78-30-00-910-801.
(14) Manually extend left-hand thrust reverser in the deployed direction approximately 3 inches
(76.2 mm) in accordance with Task 78-30-00-910-802. Make sure that while the thrust
reverser extends, the left-hand thrust lever moves near the IDLE position. Note that the
amber L REV UNLOCKED message is displayed in the primary EICAS display. The state of
the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor.
T/R UNLOCK ON WOW OFF
(15) Manually extend left-hand thrust reverser to the deployed position. Move the left-hand thrust
lever to the IDLE position. Use a force gauge and push the thrust lever forward with a
maximum force of 8 to 10 lbs. Measure the thrust lever movement at the bottom of the lever.
Make sure that thrust lever does not move more than 1.0 inch forward of the IDLE position
on the quadrant.
(16) Manually retract the left-hand thrust reverser to the stowed position in accordance with Task
78-30-00-910-803. Note that the L REV UNLOCKED message is extinguished. The state of
the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor.
T/R UNLOCK OFF
22-30-00 Page 506
Dec 3/03
(17) Move the left-hand thrust lever to the MAX POWER position and then to the SHUTOFF
position. Ensure that the thrust lever moves freely and smoothly.
(18) Repeat steps 3.B.(12) through 3.B.(17) for the right-hand thrust reverser.
(19) Hold the LAMP TEST toggle switch on the miscellaneous test panel in position 1. The state
of the following parameter should be indicated on the PC monitor.
LAMP TEST ON
(20) Release the LAMP TEST toggle switch, then simulate or place the landing gear up. The
state of the following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor.
GEAR DN OFF LAMP TEST OFF
(21) Place the landing gear down. Put the airplane in weight-on-wheels (on ground) configuration
(Task 32-61-00-867-802).
(22) Connect the Pitot-Static Test Set to the airplane. Engage the DCU 1, DCU 2, and (if
installed) DCU 3 Audio Warning Disable. Adjust the pressure altitude to 5000 feet. Set the
AFCS Airspeed Reference (Speed Bug) to 150 knots. Connect the N1 transducer simulator
and set for a left and right N1 of approximately 70% N1. Set the FMS Thrust Mode to the
Take-Off (TO) mode. The following parameters should be as indicated on the PC monitor:
NOTE: Radio Altitude may be erroneous when the aft equipment bay door is open. If
necessary, secure door in near-closed position.
NOTE: The ATS computer N1 signal amplitude requirements are higher than the EICAS
(DCU) system. Set the N1 Simulator output for approximately 2 VAC RMS.
ALT 5000 ± 50 FT RADIO ALT 0 ± 5 FT

REF SPD 150 ± 1 KT N1 REF Same as ED ± 0.2%
CAS 150 ± 2 KTS L N1 Same as ED ± 0.2%
VMO 300 ± 1 KT R N1 Same as ED ± 0.2%
N1 MODE TO FLAP POS 0 DEG
(23) Remove N1 transducer simulator and connect the N2 transducer simulator. Set the N2
transducer for a left and right N2 of approximately 90% N2. Set the pressure altitude to
25000 feet and the airspeed to 300 knots. Momentarily press the AFCS Airspeed Reference
(Speed Bug) knob to toggle the PFD to Mach Mode, then adjust the Speed Bug readout to
the indicated Mach displayed on the PFDs. The following parameters should be as indicated
on the PC monitor:
ALT 25000 ± 50 FT MMO 0.78 ± 0.002 M

REF SPD 300 ± 3 KTS IAS OFF
22-30-00 Page 507
Dec 3/03
CAS 300 ± 3 KTS L N2 Same as ED ± 0.2%

VMO 328 ± 2 KTS R N2 Same as ED ± 0.2%
REF MACH Same as PFD ± 0.002 M
MACH Same as PFD ± 0.002 M
(24) Set the airspeed to 340 knots (overspeed). Select flaps to 20 degrees. Remove the N2
transducer simulator. The following parameters should be indicated on the PC monitor:
PITCH Pitch ATT of airplane ± 0.5 DEG

L ACCEL Sin (pitch) ± 0.010 g
FLAP POS 20 DEG
OVERSPD ON
(25) Set the flaps to 30 degrees. Vent the Pitot Static Test Set to set the altitude to field elevation
and the airspeed to 0 knots. Re-enter the OAT in the FMS Performance Thrust Limit page.
Note the NORM AOA indication on the PC monitor. Rotate the AUX AOA clockwise and note
that the NORM AOA indication on the PC monitor increases and the following parameters
should be as indicated on the PC monitor.
FLAP POS 30 DEG NORM AOA (increasing)
(26) Set the flaps to 45 degrees. The following parameter should be as indicated on the PC
monitor.
FLAP POS 45 DEG
(27) Retract flaps to 0 degrees. Disengage DCU Audio Warning DISABLEs.
(28) Pull circuit breaker CBP1 G-7, AUTO THROTTLE. The ATS Mode Status Displays (MSDs)
shall indicate a steady amber FAIL message.
(29) Momentarily press the ATS DISC switch on the left-hand thrust lever. The MSDs FAIL
message shall extinguish.
(30) Momentarily press the ATS switch on the ATS control panel. The MSDs shall indicate a
steady amber FAIL message.
(31) Reset CBP1 G-7, AUTO THROTTLE, circuit breaker. The MSDs FAIL message shall be
replaced with the scrolling SELFTEST message, and then go blank.
22-30-00 Page 508
Dec 3/03
G. Self-Test
(1) Place the thrust levers approximately in the middle of travel, and the IND LTS toggle switch
on the miscellaneous lights overhead panel to the BRT position. Hold the LAMP TEST
toggle switch on the miscellaneous test panel in position 1. The SELFTEST message shall
scroll across the top and bottom of the MSDs. The green ATS annunciators on the ATS
control panel shall also be illuminated. The state of the following parameters should be as
indicated below on the PC monitor:
NOTE: Holding the LAMP TEST switch more than 30 seconds will result in termination of
the test and an MSD FAIL message.
ENGAGE ON FDR ENG ON
(2) Release the LAMP TEST switch, then immediately press and hold the ATS switch. The
thrust levers shall move aft, the MSDs message shall indicate SERVOTST and the ATS
annunciators on the ATS control panel shall be illuminated.
(3) Release the ATS switch. The MSDs message and the ATS annunciators shall extinguish.
(4) Repeat 3.C.(1) with the LAMP TEST switch in position 2. Release the LAMP TEST switch
after checking the MSDs messages and ATS annunciators.
(5) Repeat paragraph 3.C.(1) with the IND LTS switch on the miscellaneous lights overhead
panel to the DIM position. The MSDs SELFTEST message that scrolls across the display
shall be dimly illuminated. The green ATS annunciators on the ATS control panel shall also
be dimly illuminated. Release the LAMP TEST switch after checking the MSDs messages
and ATS annunciators.
H. Operational Tests
(1) Manually place the thrust levers approximately in the middle of travel. Enter OAT in the FMS
Performance Thrust Page. The FMS will select Take-Off (TO) Thrust Limit. Set the Pitot
Static Test Set airspeed for 150 knots. Set the AUX AOA vane to a NORM AOA of
approximately 0.30 on the PC monitor. Simulate an Airplane In-Air (weight-off-wheels) to the
ATS computer by pulling circuit breaker CBP1 E-13, WOW RELAY. Set the AFCS Airspeed
Reference (Speed Bug) to 150 knots. Place the AFCS in the Altitude Hold mode.
Momentarily press the ATS push-button switch. The MSDs message shall indicate SPEED
in green and the green ATS annunciators shall be illuminated.
(2) Turn the Speed Bug knob on the FCP until the readout on the PFD indicates 160 knots.
Observe that the thrust levers advance to the forward stop.
(3) Turn the Speed Bug knob until the readout on the PFD indicates 140 knots. The thrust levers
shall retard to the aft stop.
(4) Set the Altitude Preselector higher than present aircraft altitude. Place the FCC in a FLC
climb mode. Observe that the MSDs indicate an N1 TO message and the thrust levers
advance to the forward stop.
22-30-00 Page 509
Dec 3/03
(5) Momentarily press the ATS DISC switch on the right-hand thrust lever. The MSDs shall
indicate a flashing amber DISENG’D message, the ATS control panel annunciators shall
extinguish, and the ATS shall cease driving the thrust levers.
(6) Momentarily press the ATS DISC switch on the left-hand thrust lever. The MSDs message
shall extinguish.
(7) Set the AFCS Airspeed Reference (Speed Bug) to 150 knots. Manually place the thrust
levers approximately in the middle of travel. Momentarily press the ATS switch on the ATS
control panel. The MSDs shall indicate a green SPEED message and the green ATS
annunciators shall be illuminated.
(8) Pull circuit breaker CBP1 Q-4, L IAPS AFCS 1 MDL to simulate an LA-IOC-1 and LA-GP-5
bus fault. Observe that after 10 seconds, the ATS shall disengage, the ATS control panel
annunciators shall extinguish, and the MSDs shall display a flashing amber FAIL message.
shall extinguish. Reset circuit breaker CBP1 Q-4, L IAPS AFCS 1 MDL.
green SPEED message and the green ATS annunciators shall be illuminated.
(11) Pull circuit breakers CBP1 P-6, ADC STBY, and CBP4 C-6, ADC 1. Observe that after 10
seconds, the ATS shall disengage, the ATS control panel annunciators extinguish, and the
MSDs shall display a flashing amber FAIL message.
shall extinguish. Reset circuit breaker CBP1 P-6, ADC STBY, and CBP4 C-6, ADC 1.
(13) Set Pitot Static Test Set airspeed to 0 knots. Re-enter OAT in the FMS Performance Thrust
Limit page. Set airspeed back to 150 knots.
(15) Press the AFCS Flight Control Panel XFR switch to activate the copilot’s flight guidance
command. Observe that the ATS shall disengage, the ATS control panel annunciators
extinguish, and the MSDs shall display a flashing amber DISENG’D message.
shall extinguish. Press the AFCS Flight Control Panel XFR switch to activate the pilot’s flight
guidance command.
(17) Momentarily press the ATS switch on the ATS control panel. The MSDs shall display a green
SPEED message and the green ATS annunciators shall be illuminated.
(18) Reset circuit breaker CBP1 E-13, WOW RELAY, to place ATS in weight-on-wheels (on
ground) condition. Observe that the ATS shall disengage, the green ATS control panel
annunciators shall extinguish, and the MSDs shall blank.
(19) Pull circuit breaker CBP1 E-13, WOW RELAY, to place ATS in weight-off-wheels (in flight)
condition.
22-30-00 Page 510
Dec 3/03
(21) Place IRU 1 in OFF mode. Observe that 10 seconds after IRU 1 completes shutdown, the
ATS shall disengage, the green ATS control panel annunciators shall extinguish, and the
MSDs shall display a flashing amber FAIL message.
shall extinguish.
(23) Vent Pitot-Static test set.
(24) Check that the backlighting of the ATS control panel can be adjusted using the Center
Instrument Panel INTEG LIGHTING control.
(25) Remove all test equipment and restore all switches, controls, and circuit breakers to their
normal position.
I. Engines Running
(1) Position aircraft at a location where engines can be started and thrust reversers operated.
(2) Start both engines. Advance thrust levers to 40% N1. Hold the LAMP TEST switch in
position 1 to initiate ATS Self-Test. Release the LAMP TEST switch; then immediately press
and hold the ATS switch on the ATS control panel. The thrust levers will retard to the IDLE
stop and the engines will be at idle thrust.
(3) Engage reverse thrust on the left engine. With approximately 30% N1, press the L EMER
STOW switch. Verify that the thrust reverser stows. The Thrust Reverser Lever may or may
not return to the stow position. Check that when the Thrust Reverser Lever is placed in the
stow position, it latches in the stowed position and may not be unlocked.
(4) Return the L EMER STOW switch to the normal position.
(5) Repeat steps 6.I.(3) and 6.I.(4) for the right engine.
5. TEST COMPLETION
A. Restore all switches, controls, and circuit breakers to their normal position.
22-30-00 Page 511
Dec 3/03
22-30-00 Page 512
Dec 3/03

AUTO THROTTLE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
Verify that the thrust reverser diodes have not opened or shorted.
NOTE: The following procedure requires qualified operators using approved aircraft operational
procedures.
NOTE: Perform the following procedures per the Supplemental Time Limits and Maintenance
Checks Manual, and whenever the thrust reverser diodes are replaced.
(1) Equipment
• Wiring Diagram TM452230-08

• Brake-release block tool
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Apply power to aircraft.
B. Align the left IRU.
C. Ensure that EICAS is operational.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Thrust reverser diode failure check
(1) Pull circuit breaker CBP1 E-13, WOW RELAY.
(2) Enter OAT on the FMS Performance Thrust Limit page.
(3) Open LH and RH PDU Access Doors (432AC and 442AC) on the engine cowlings.
(4) Engage ATS by pressing push-button switch on ATS Control Panel.
(a) ATS will engage in SPEED mode.
(b) Thrust Levers will advance toward maximum thrust
22-30-00 Page 601
Dec 3/03
A1.0
(5) Pull LH PDU main brake-release knob and install the brake-release block tool.
(a) Ensure that the ATS disengages.
(b) Ensure that L TR UNLOCKED message is displayed on Primary EICAS display.
(6) Remove the brake-release block tool and ensure that the main brake-release knob retracts
fully.
(7) Engage ATS by pressing push-button switch on ATS Control Panel.
(a) ATS will engage in SPEED mode.
(b) Thrust Levers will advance toward maximum thrust.
(8) Pull RH PDU main brake-release knob and install the brake-release block tool.
(a) Ensure that the ATS disengages.
(b) Ensure that R TR UNLOCKED message is displayed on Primary EICAS display.
(9) Remove the brake-release block tool and ensure that the main brake-release knob retracts
fully.
(10) Close LH and RH PDU Access Doors (432AC and 442AC) on the engine cowlings.
NOTE: Failure of the ATS to disengage, or annunciation of off-side TR UNLOCKED message displayed
on EICAS are indications of a failed diode. If these indications exist, replace the applicable
diodes (CR6KA, LH TR UNLOCKED diode at FS288 and CR7KA, RH TR UNLOCKED diode at
FS303).
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Remove power from aircraft if no longer required.
22-30-00 Page 602
Dec 3/03
Page 1 of 14 .
R-2830
REPAIR PROCEDURE
ENHANCED AUTOPOWER®
DUAL SERVOMOTOR GEARBOX
AND CLUTCH PACK ASSEMBLY
FOR
BOMBARDIER CHALLENGER CL-604
Page 2
R-2830
REVISION NOTICE
PAGES & PARAGRAPHS MADE CHECKED APPROVED
SYM
ADDED, REVISED OR DELETED BY BY BY
Orig. Total pages: 14 L.Ostergren B.Carr J.Gordon
12/1102 12/11/02 12/13/02
Page 3 Sym .
R-2830
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Para. Title Page

None Title Page...................................................................................................................... 1
None Revision Page............................................................................................................... 2
None Table of Contents ......................................................................................................... 3
1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 4

2.0 Removal/Replacement Procedures.............................................................................. 4
2.1 Motor Assembly (1135-114) ......................................................................................... 5

2.2 Servo Drive Subassembly (1135-102) ......................................................................... 6
2.3 Clutch Pack Assembly (1135-123) ............................................................................... 7
2.4 Bell Crank Assembly (1135-103-1 & -2) ....................................................................... 8
2.5 Actuator Rod (1135-105-1 & -2) ................................................................................... 9
2.6 Replacement of Bell Crank Bolts................................................................................ 10
3.0 Pivot Pin (1135-232) Removal.................................................................................... 12
4.0 Unusual Tools............................................................................................................. 12
4.1 Metric Allen Head Wrench.......................................................................................... 12

4.2 Retaining Ring Tool .................................................................................................... 12
TABLE OF FIGURES
Figure 1 − Right Bell Crank ............................................................................................................ 11

Figure 2 − Top View ....................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 3 − Side view....................................................................................................................... 14
Page 4 Sym .
R-2830
1.0 INTRODUCTION
User repairs are limited to removal and replacement of major assemblies. Removed
assemblies should be returned to SFIC for repair, overhaul or replacement, as applicable.
Flight operations may or may not be possible, with the Enhanced AutoPower® not activated,
with an assembly removed. The conditions for manual flight are described below:
Assembly Removed Conditions for Manual Flight
Motor Assembly Manual flight possible without special provision
Servo Drive Assembly Manual flight possible with SK103435 in place*
Clutch Assembly Manual flight not possible
Bell Crank Assembly Manual flight not possible
* When the Servo Drive Assembly is removed, it can be replaced with SK103435, using the
same hardware as was used for the Drive Assembly.
2.0 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

Access to the Enhanced AutoPower assembly (1135-2) is in the equipment bay, below the
pedestal. The unit is suspended from the same structure that supports the pedestal, and is
visible by a mechanic, on his back, head forward in the equipment bay. All references to “right”
and “left” will be normal right and left (i.e. left is on the pilot side), except when qualified by
“mechanic’s right” and “mechanic’s left”, which is the opposite. Fwd and Aft are unchanged.
The unit is contained in the Support Structure (1135-120), which is a riveted sheet metal
assembly.
Two unusual tools may be required, see section 4.0. It would be advisable to be sure that all of
these called for are available at the site. Considering the awkward entry to and egress from
the equipment bay, it is also advisable that there be a helper nearby. Other than that, a good
light is necessary, a headrest is optional and containers for small items are useful.
Under warm ambient conditions the electronics in the equipment bay, if turned on, can make
the area uncomfortable. An external source of ventilation is desirable under these conditions.
In all following procedures (paragraphs 2.1 thru 2.5) part numbers refer to numbers noted on
figures 2 and 3 at the end of this document.
Page 5 Sym .
R-2830
2.1 Motor Assembly (1135-114)
2.1.1 Tools
#0 Phillips screw driver
5/32-inch Allen head wrench
2.1.2 Removal
Looking up at the Enhanced AutoPower assembly (1135-2) one servo drive (1135-102) will
be seen, extending about six inches on the mechanic’s left and another on the mechanic’s
right. It is approximately four inches in diameter, and includes a motor, a brake and a speed
reducer. The motor is at the end of this subassembly, so that either one (left or right) can be
removed without disturbing any of the other elements of the subassembly.
There will be a can (1135-117) over the motor assembly (1135-114), which must be removed
first. Do not disconnect the round electrical connector that is mated with a connector on the
outside of the can. Remove eight flat head screws, which are located around the lower edge
of the can, and remove the can to expose the motor. Let the can hang on the cable still
attached by means of the round connector. Retain the screws.
The motor is electrically disconnected by removing the flat connector, which is plugged
directly into a receptacle on the motor body. Note the orientation of the connector so that it
can be plugged correctly in the replacement motor.
Remove the four cap screws holding the motor flange to the drive subassembly. Retain the
screws and note the position of the motor so that the replacement can be mounted in the
same orientation that the removed motor had been in. Carefully remove the motor noting that
there is a plastic cross-formed piece, which will either stay with the remainder of the drive
subassembly or come out with the motor. This piece engages the fork at the end of the motor
shaft and an identical fork on the shaft remaining in the drive. Retain this piece and push it
firmly on the shaft remaining in the drive.
2.1.3 Replacement
To replace the motor, carefully insert the new motor’s shaft end fork into the drive, engaging
the plastic cross-formed part, which is in place on the shaft end fork within the remainder of
the drive subassembly. Push the motor firmly on the drive and rotate it to the same position
the removed motor had been in, and replace the four cap screws.
Insert the flat connector in the same orientation as it was in the removed motor. Replace the
can, if there is a can, with its flat side “up” and the connector pointing “down”. Replace the flat
head screws to retain the can.
2.1.4 Rigging
The above procedure has no effect on rigging. RERIGGING IS NOT REQUIRED.
Page 6 Sym .
R-2830
2.2 Servo Drive Subassembly (1135-102)
2.2.1 Tools
7/64 inch Allen head wrench
#0 Phillips screwdriver
3/16 inch hex wrench
3 mm Allen head wrench (see paragraph 4.1)
2.2.2 Removal
The location of the two servo drive subassemblies (1135-102) is described in paragraph
2.1.2. To remove an entire subassembly it is best to disconnect both round connectors first
and then detach the connector, which is mounted on a bracket attached to the support
structure of the Enhanced AutoPower assembly. The connector mounted on the can will stay
with it, and should not be disturbed.
Before removing a servo drive, the shaft connection to the servo drive must be removed. This
connection is made up of six metric screws through the flange of the shaft (1135-254 on the
right side, or 1135-255 on the left side), into the body of a speed reducer, which is part of the
servo drive (1135-102). These screws can be found on the other side of the sheet metal
support structure (1135-120) on which the servo drive is mounted. Looking at the inside of
that structure, the screws will be seen, through the stainless steel shaft flange, between the
clutch assembly (1135-123) and the sheet metal structure (1135-120).
Remove the six metric screws and save the screws and the lock washers that are used with
them. When the screws are removed, the shaft is supported by a short stub shaft, which
extends between a hole in the output of the servo drive and a hole bored in the center of the
flange of the shaft. Therefore, before removing the servo drive subassembly, the end of the
shaft must be supported by wiring it up to the structure above it.
The servo drive subassembly may now be removed by first removing the six #6 Allen head
screws around the flange of the base of the unit.
2.2.3 Replacement
The replacement unit may be installed by reversing the above process. Note that the
replacement unit will have a stub shaft, which will center the flange of the shaft on the output
and facilitate emplacement of the six metric Allen head screw/lock washer combinations
previously removed.
2.2.4 Rigging
The above procedure has no effect on rigging. RERIGGING IS NOT REQUIRED.
Page 7 Sym .
R-2830
2.3 Clutch Pack Assembly (1135-123)
2.3.1 Tools
Diagonal cutters
Needle nose pliers
3 mm Allen head wrench (see paragraph 4.1)
Retaining ring tool (see paragraph 4.2)
2.3.2 Removal
Remove four pivot pins (1135-232, see section 3.0) located at the two clutch cranks. Two of
these pins connect to (gold colored) links (1135-110); allow the links to hang free. The other
two pins connect to the (painted) actuator rods (1135-105-1 & -2), which go up to the thrust
levers; allow the actuator rods to hang free. See section 3.0 for removal of the pins.
Remove the six metric screws attaching the (1135-254 on the right, and 1135-255 on the left)
shaft flanges to the servo drive subassemblies on both sides, left and right – see paragraph
2.2.2. The shaft will not fall since it is supported by the stub shaft of the servo drive outputs.
Wire one end of the shaft to the support structure on one side of the shaft, to temporarily
support it while the servo drive subassembly (1135-102) on that side is removed. See section
2.2.2.
When the servo drive subassembly is removed from one side of the assembly, the shaft
together with the two clutches (the clutch pack assembly 1135-123) may be shifted over,
through the hole left by removal of the servo drive subassembly until it is free from the stub
shaft of the remaining servo drive subassembly. Maneuver the shaft until it can be removed
downward with the clutches mounted on it. Care should be taken to keep the two halves of
the shaft (which is split approximately at the middle; note that the two halves of the shaft may
be rotated independently) from separating. If they do separate, there are some small parts
that may be lost.
If the stub shaft of the servo drive subassembly that is still in place comes out of it, reinstall it.
2.3.3 Replacement
Replace a new unit by reversing the procedure above for removal, i.e. maneuver the new unit
in place, engaging the stub shaft; continue to support the assembly 1135-100 while installing
the bearing housing with bearing; tighten all screws, replace pivot pins with their retaining
rings and cotter pins; then safety wire the screws on the bearing housing.
Replace all retaining rings (MS16624-5018) and cotter pins (MS9245-01), which had been
removed, with new retaining rings and cotter pins.
2.3.4 Rigging
The above process will probably have a negligible effect on rigging. However, the rigging
must be checked after clutch pack replacement, and adjusted as required. Note that a
minimum of “cushion” should be employed at full power and at flight idle. Excessive cushion
will store a load in the clutches, resulting in a heavy force requirement to move the throttles
out of those positions.
Page 8 Sym .
R-2830
2.4 Bell Crank Assembly (1135-103-1 & -2)
2.4.1 Engine Cable

Before removing the bell crank, the engine (push-pull) cable must be disconnected from the
bell crank, on the side to be replaced. This connection is the same one ordinarily used on
CL-604 with or without Enhanced AutoPower. After replacement of the bell crank, this
connection will, of course, be replaced. Breaking and replacing the connection at this point,
external to the Enhanced AutoPower assembly, will require rerigging. See paragraph 2.4.5.
2.4.2 Tools
Needle nose pliers
2.4.3 Removal
There are two bell cranks (1135-103-1 and 1135-103-2), a left and a right. The right bell
crank will be on the left, and vice versa, to the mechanic lying below the Enhanced
AutoPower assembly. The left and right cannot be interchanged. However, it is helpful that
the outside end of the bell crank shaft is stamped –1 or –2 : the left side is indicated by −1,
which is on the mechanic’s right; the right side is indicated by −2 and goes on the opposite
side.
Remove the pivot pin (1135-232) connecting the inner arm of the bell crank to the link. Allow
the (gold colored) link (1135-110) to hang free, see section 3.0. Disconnect the outer arm of
the bell crank assembly from the push-pull engine cable.
Remove the four #6 Allen head screws, which attach the bell crank assembly to the support
structure of the Enhanced AutoPower assembly. The entire bell crank assembly, including
the outer and inner arm, and the connecting shaft can now be removed from the support
structure.
2.4.4 Replacement
Replace a new unit by reversing the procedure above, for removal. Make sure that the outer
arm is outside of the structure and the inner arm goes into the structure. The end of the bell
crank shaft is stamped with either –1 or –2, at the outer arm.
2.4.5 Rigging
must be checked after bell crank replacement, and adjusted as required. Note that a
minimum of “cushion” should be employed at full power and at flight idle. Excessive cushion
will store a load in the clutches, resulting in a heavy force requirement to move the throttles
out of those positions.
Page 9 Sym .
R-2830
2.5 Actuator Rod (1135-105-1 & -2)
2.5.1 Thrust Lever

The actuator rod to be replaced must be disconnected from the thrust lever, located in the
pedestal. This connection is the same one ordinarily used on CL-604 with or without
Enhanced AutoPower. It requires removal of access panels of the pedestal in the cockpit.
Breaking and replacing the connection at this point, external to the Enhanced AutoPower
assembly, will require rerigging. See paragraph 2.5.5.
2.5.2 Tools
Needle nose piers
2.5.3 Removal
After disconnecting the actuator rod from the thrust lever, on the side to be replaced, the pivot
pin (1135-232, see paragraph 3.0) connecting the actuator rod to its clutch crank, must be
removed. See section 3.0. The rod is now free to be manipulated out, and removed.
NOTE: The extricated rod has a part number, which includes a dash number: 1135-105-1
(left) and 1135-105-2 (right). These are not interchangeable. (Left, –1, is on the pilot
side.)
2.5.4 Replacement
Replace the rods with the “cutouts” facing outboard.
Replacement involves the use of a .250-inch diameter rig pin. One of these is supplied with
each unit delivered by Safe Flight (1135-228). Any straight .250-inch diameter rod can be
used, if it is at least 9 inches long. The rig pin, when inserted through the support structure
holes and (slotted) inner bell crank arm holes, defines the flight idle position. The length of
the actuator rod may need to be adjusted, by use of the threaded connection to the upper
clevis, to put the thrust lever in its flight idle position, with the rig pin in place. This is the initial
stage of the rerigging required. See paragraph 2.5.5.
Thus, when replacing the actuator rod, by reversing the steps of paragraph 2.5.3, the position
of the thrust lever is established at flight idle, with the Enhanced AutoPower assembly
configured in its flight idle position. Replace an 1135-105-1 with a –1 and replace an 1135-
105-2 with a –2.
2.5.5 Rigging
Recheck rigging and make required adjustments. Note that a minimum of “cushion” should be
employed at full power and at flight idle. Excessive cushion will store a load in the clutches,
resulting in a heavy force requirement to move the throttles out of those positions.
Page 10 Sym .
R-2830
2.6 Replacement of Bell Crank Bolts

Before replacing the bolts it is advisable to read paragraph 2.4.3, Removal of Bell Crank
Assembly. Consult this paragraph and Figures 1, 2 and 3 to locate the bell cranks (1135-103-
1 and 1135-103-2).
NOTE: For this replacement procedure there is no need to disconnect either the cable from
the outer arm or the link (1135-110) from the inner arm.
2.6.1 Tools
Diagonal cutters
Needle nose pliers
3/8-inch hex wrench
Torque wrench or driver with 40 inch-lb capability, equipped with a 3/8-inch hex socket.
2.6.2 Removal
Each bell crank has two arms: an outer arm and an inner arm. Each arm is connected to the
bell crankshaft with a bolt and nut. This bolt is secured with safety wire.
Remove the safety wire and remove the bolts to be replaced from each arm, one at a time,
without disturbing the position of the arm on the shaft. There are a total of four bolts, one on
each of the left and right outer arms, and one on each of the left and right inner arms.
Remove and replace each one to be replaced before going on to the next bolt.
2.6.3 Replacement
Replace bolt with a hex head shoulder bolt (P/N 59355), torqued to 40 inch-lb. Thread a
Nylock nut (P/N MS 21044-CO8) on the exposed thread of the bolt which comes through the
arm. Then holding the head of the bolt with a 3/8-inch wrench, torque the nut to 40 inch-lb.
(See the following figure 1.)
Repeat this procedure for each bolt exchange, and safety wire each bolt.
2.6.4 Rigging
must be checked after breaking a connection in the throttle control, and adjusted as required.
Note that a minimum of “cushion” should be employed at full power and at flight idle.
Excessive cushion will store a load in the clutches, resulting in a heavy force requirement to
move the throttles out of those positions.
Page 11 Sym .
R-2830
Figure 1
Right Bell Crank (1135-103-2)
Left is opposite hand (1135-103-1)
Page 12 Sym .
R-2830
3.0 PIVOT PIN (1135-232) REMOVAL

The removal and replacement tasks of paragraphs 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5 require the removal and
replacement of pivot pins, which are used to connect the moving parts of the Enhanced
AutoPower assembly. Removal of the pins from the internal link to bell crank joint can be
done in either direction (i.e. left or right), but the pins at both joints on each clutch assembly
can be removed in only one direction. They must be removed away from the clutch (i.e.
toward the center of the Enhanced AutoPower assembly), because there is not enough
clearance to extricate the pivot pins on the clutch side.
The pivot pins are symmetrical, having exactly the same retaining means at both ends. Thus,
when removing the retaining provisions, prior to removing a pivot pin, those on the end of the
pin closest to the clutch should be removed. Those on the end of the pin away from the clutch
should be left intact, since the pin will be extracted on that side.
The retaining provisions are:
a) A cotter pin (MS9245-01), which can be removed and inserted using a needle nosed
pliers.
b) A retaining ring (MS16624-5018), which requires a retaining ring tool. See
section 4.0.
Note that neither the cotter pin nor the retaining ring should be reused. New ones are to be
installed after each removal.
4.0 UNUSUAL TOOLS
4.1 Metric Allen Head Wrench

Although a standard commercial 3-mm Allen head wrench is used to disconnect the shaft
from the servo drive, two modifications are desirable.
The first modification is necessary to provide working clearance. The short end of the wrench
should be ground down to approximately ½ inch overall.
For convenience, the long end of the wrench should be extended to approximately 5 inches.
This can be accomplished by pressing the end of the wrench into a length of rod with a close
fitting hole drilled in its end, or by brazing an extension to the wrench.
4.2 Retaining Ring Tool

The retaining ring tool must fit the smallest MS retaining ring size. If the available tool size
does not accommodate the small retaining rings, it may require modification. Grinding and
filing the tips can bring the tool down to the proper size.
THIS DRAWING IS FURNISHED STRICTLY ON A CON-
FIDENTIAL BASIS AND IS NOT FOR CIRCULATION,
DISTRIBUTION OR PUBLICATION. THIS DRAWING AND ITS
CONTENTS, (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL
PROPRIETARY DATA), ARE OUR EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY
AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED, USED, OR DISCLOSED
TO OTHERS, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, FOR ANY PURPOSE
WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SAFE
FLIGHT INSTRUMENT CORPORATION. WE EXPRESSLY
RESERVE ALL RIGHTS, INCLUDING ALL RIGHTS OF
PATENT AND COPYRIGHT PROTECTION.
‘SAFE FLIGHT INSTRUMENT CORPORATION’
R-2830
Page 13 Sym
.
THIS DRAWING IS FURNISHED STRICTLY ON A CONFIDENTIAL
BASIS AND IS NOT FOR CIRCULATION, DISTRIBUTION OR
PUBLICATION. THIS DRAWING AND ITS CONTENTS, (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL PROPRIETARY DATA), ARE OUR
EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED,
USED, OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
SAFE FLIGHT INSTRUMENT CORPORATION. WE EXPRESSLY
RESERVE ALL RIGHTS, INCLUDING ALL RIGHTS OF PATENT AND
COPYRIGHT PROTECTION.
R-2830
Page 14 Sym
.
CHAPTER 23 - COMMUNI-
CATIONS
CHAPTER 23 - COMMUNICATIONS
23 - Effective Pages 1 Nov 10/2006 23-31-00 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
23 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006 23-31-00 501 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 23-31-50 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
23-15-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 23-31-50 501 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006
23-15-00 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 23-32-00 1 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
23-15-00 501 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 23-32-00 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
23-16-00 1 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 405 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 406 Nov 10/2006
23-16-00 401 Nov 10/2006 23-32-00 501 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 23-33-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
23-16-00 501 Nov 10/2006 3 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 4 Nov 10/2006
23-23-00 1 Nov 10/2006 23-33-00 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
23-23-00 401 Nov 10/2006 23-33-00 501 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 23-34-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
23-23-00 501 Nov 10/2006 3 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 4 Nov 10/2006
23-31-00 1 Nov 10/2006 23-34-00 501 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006

23-50-12 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
23-50-12 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
23-50-12 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
23-90-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
23-90-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006
23-90-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 23 - COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 23-15-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 2
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 23-16-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
OFFICE EQUIPMENT 23-23-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501

CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS 23-31-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
CABIN CALL SYSTEM 23-31-50

Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 23-32-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 23-33-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501

PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM 23-34-00

Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
JUMPSEAT AUDIO MODIFICATION 23-50-12

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23-90-00

Description 1
Location 2
Operation 3
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501


SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
A Rockwell/Collins SATCOM 6100 Satellite Communication (SATCOM) system is installed in the aircraft
to provide extended-range communication. It is a satellite-based system that will provide global
coverage over approximately 75% of the earth’s surface. The system consists of an SRT-2100-3
Satellite Receiver-Transmitter (SRT), an antenna driver, an LNA/diplexer, and an EMS Technologies
AMT-50 High Gain Antenna. This system utilizes the Aero-H series of International Maritime Satellite-3
(INMARSAT-III) satellites with spot beam coverage that link the aircraft to the Ground Earth Station
(GES). The system interfaces with the primary and secondary IRS buses for present position information
to steer the antenna. Flight data is obtained from and displayed on the Flight Management System
(FMS) Control Display Units (CDU). It also interfaces with the aircraft Airborne Flight Information System
(AFIS) for data communication. The system operates from 115VAC/400Hz, single phase, supplied by
the 115VAC/400Hz Bus 2, and 28VDC from 28VDC Bus 2.
There are two SATCOM systems installed on this aircraft, an ICG ICS-200 using Iridium satellites
(23-16-00) and the Rockwell/Collins SATCOM 6100 using INMARSAT satellites. The two systems are
tied together with the Aerocom 1000 telecommunications unit (23-16-00) for voice communications to
the cabin and cockpit. The Rockwell/Collins 6100 system has an upgraded SRT for interface to the High
Speed Transmitters (HST) (23-23-00). The HSTs connect to the Local Area Network (LAN) server and
are equipped with cabin data ports for high speed internet via the INMARSAT satellite system.
The SRT-2100-3 is the primary electronic component of the system. It combines the functions of a
high-power amplifier, satellite data unit, beam steering unit, and radio frequency unit into one
line-replaceable unit. The SRT is rack-mounted with a cooling fan in the rack. There is an RS-232
maintenance test plug for troubleshooting purposes. The SRT is interfaced to CDU 1 and CDU 2, and
can be interfaced to the AFIS DCU.
The AMT-50 antenna is interfaced to the SRT through an antenna driver and a LNA/diplexer.
2. LOCATION
Table 1 lists the system components and locations.
Component Location
SRT-2100-3 Aft equipment bay, FS682, LBL18, WL80
AMT-50 antenna Top of vertical stabilizer
LNA/diplexer Aft of antenna
Antenna driver Aft of LNA/diplexer
HST circuit breaker CBP2 D-10 and D-11
SATCOM ANT circuit breaker CBP2 F-13
SATCOM SRT circuit breaker CBP2 B-10
SATCOM COMPONENTS
TABLE 1
Nov 10/2006
3. OPERATION
The INMARSAT organization provides a fleet of geosynchronous communication satellites and
ground-based earth stations. The Rockwell/Collins SATCOM 6100 is designed to communicate with
these satellites and ground stations. The aircraft system communicates with the satellites in the L-band
radio spectrum. The signal is then down-linked to a ground station utilizing the C-band spectrum. The
ground station connects the radio-linked aircraft system to a terrestrial telephone network to place and
receive voice calls, faxes, and modem communications. Each aircraft is assigned a unique identifier to
enable selective calling.
ANTENNA, ANTENNA DRIVER

LNA/DIPLEXER
FS FS
333.0 621.0
REF REF
SRT
EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS
Nov 10/2006
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the antenna, LNA/diplexer, and/or antenna driver (Figure 401):
WARNING: DO NOT APPROACH FINCAP UNTIL THE SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS

(SATCOM) SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED AND ELECTRICAL POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED.
(1) Open and lock out associated circuit breaker(s) listed in Table 1.
(2) Remove fincap as detailed in 1.A.(3) through 1.A.(10).
(3) Remove upper visor assemblies #326AL and #326AR (Ref. CL-604 Maintenance Manual,
task 55-30-40-000-803).
(4) Remove lower access panels #326EL and #326ER.
(5) Steer antenna(s) to zero elevation and to face either 90° left or right. If the antenna cannot
be steered to this position, then the limited access around the rib (after removing the
horizontal stabilizer fairings) will have to be used prior to removing the fincap.
(6) Remove all fasteners securing fincap.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE FASTENERS AT THE TOP OF THE AFT CORNER OF THE
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER DRIVE UNIT INSPECTION PANEL, AS THIS SECURES
THE EQUIPMENT SHELF. THESE FASTENERS, WHICH ARE IDENTIFIED BY
PLACARDS, MAY BE REMOVED IF THE EQUIPMENT SHELF IS SUPPORTED BY
OTHER MEANS.
NOTE: Elevators may need to be rotated to access some fasteners securing the fincap.
NOTE: Do not remove fasteners securing lighting ground straps.
(7) Remove hidden bolts located at the forward underside of fincap.
(8) Remove fincap.
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE IN LIFTING THE FINCAP TO ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE

OCCURS TO THE FINCAP OR THE ANTENNA.
(9) Disconnect electrical leads from unit.
(10) Remove securing hardware.
(11) If unit requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
• Return unit to manufacturer or authorized repair facility.
Nov 10/2006
B. To remove the Satellite Receiver/Transmitter (SRT) (Figure 402):
(2) Gain access to SRT in aft equipment bay.
(3) Loosen hold-down clamp securing SRT to rack.
(4) Slide SRT forward out of rack.
(5) If SRT requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the antenna, LNA/diplexer, and/or antenna driver (Figure 401):
(1) Place unit in position.
(2) Attach wiring connectors.
(3) Secure unit with attaching hardware.
(4) Steer the antenna(s) to zero elevation and to face either 90° left or right.
(5) Carefully position fincap and install fasteners securing it to aircraft structure.
(6) Install upper visor assemblies #326AL and #326AR (Ref. CL-604 Maintenance Manual,
task 55-30-40-000-803).
(7) Install lower access panels #326EL and #326ER.
(8) Restore power to SATCOM system and perform any necessary tests per
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
B. To install the SRT (Figure 402):
(1) Slide SRT carefully into rack to ensure proper electrical connection.
(2) Tighten captive thumbscrews securing unit to rack.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
LNA/DIPLEXER
ANTENNA DRIVER
VERTICAL STABILIZER FINCAP

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
CAPTIVE THUMBSCREWS
SRT
AFT EQUIPMENT BAY SATCOM SHELF

(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the Satellite
Communication (SATCOM) system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
Energize all aircraft electrical buses.
3. TEST
A. Test the SATCOM in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure,
document number D-GT23905006, revision (-), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove power from aircraft if it is no longer required.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
An International Communications Group (ICG) ICS-200 Iridium Satellite Communications (SATCOM)
system is installed on the aircraft.
The ICG ICS-200 is a telecommunications system which uses the Iridium satellite system for worldwide
coverage. The Iridium Transceiver is a basic transceiver/private airborne branch exchange (PABX) unit.
There is a RS-232 serial port on the front of the transceiver for a computer connection to perform the
initial system configuration. The RF filter is connected between the transceiver and antenna and is
mounted adjacent to the transceiver. The low profile antenna is mounted on top of the fuselage and
provides continuous coverage from 1616.0MHz to 1626.5MHz. The system in this aircraft is provided
with two cordless cabin handsets, a hardwired cockpit handset, and three PC data ports.
The ICG ICS-200 transceiver and the Rockwell/Collins SATCOM 6100 Satellite Receiver-Transmitter
(23-15-00) are interfaced to the handsets via an Aerocom 1000 Cabin Telecommunications Unit (CTU).
The CTU also provides the interface for the RJ-45 PC jacks (23-23-00) to the telecommunications
system. The CTU provides communications automation, medium integration, and transceiver
management for the two communication systems.
2. LOCATION

Aerocom 1000 CTU Forward avionics bay, FS310R
Antenna Upper fuselage, FS338
Base unit, handset Behind dado panel at FS430L and FS430R
Call alerter FS280L cockpit closeout panel
Handset, Cordless (2) Sideledge storage boxes at LH seat 2 and RH seat 2
Handset, Sigma 7 FS280L cockpit closeout panel
PC data port, RJ-45 (3) RH Seat 2, LH seat 2, and LH seat 4 dado panel outlets
RF filter Forward avionics bay, approximately FS315R
Transceiver Forward avionics bay, approximately FS310R
AEROCOM circuit breaker CBP1 G-4
IRIDIUM SATCOM circuit breaker CBP1 G-5
AIRBORNE TELEPHONE SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
3. OPERATION
This system is powered by 28VDC MAIN BUS 1 whenever the main bus disconnect switch is in the
active position (24-70-00).
Nov 10/2006
A. Air-to-Ground Calling
The ICS-200 is capable of supporting two main dialing formats: the North American standard or
the European standard. The ICS-200 will automatically add, strip, or change digits to
accommodate the Iridium network. The caller dials a single format and does not need to change
dialing formats required by disparate communications transceivers.
(1) Calls to North America: dial 1 + area code + local number.
(2) International: dial 011 + country code + city code + number.
B. Ground-to-Air Calling
(1) Dial 011 + 881 + nine digit transceiver telephone number.
C. Iridium Aircraft-to-Iridium Aircraft Calling
(1) Dial 011 + 881 + nine digit transceiver telephone number.
When a call is placed either in the ground-to-air or air-to-air direction, the CTU will ring the default
telephone. To answer the call, simply pick up the handset.
During initial configuration at installation, an extension is assigned as the default phone. The default is
always Ext. 11 unless changed during configuration. The extension circuits are assigned two digit
numbers to identify the stations. The numbering is as follows:
• Ext. 11 - 2-wire port #1
• Ext. 14 - 2-Wire port #4
To call from one onboard extension to another, simply pick up the phone and dial the two-digit extension
you wish. You will hear the ring signal on the selected extension or receive a busy signal if it is engaged.
D. Data Calls
The Iridium ICS-200 system provides a connection for a data modem. The modem software
should be configured to dial with DTMF tones.
(1) To place a data call using a PC data port:
(a) Connect modem or PC’s RJ-45 cord to the RJ-45 PC jack (23-23-00).
(b) Instruct PC to dial desired phone number.
E. See the manufacturer’s user guide for further operating instructions.
Nov 10/2006
AEROCOM 1000 CTU
BASE UNITS
TRANSCEIVER
COCKPIT HANDSET
ANTENNA FILTER CORDLESS HANDSETS
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a cabin base unit (Figure 401):
(2) Slide single seats inboard to access dado panel.
(3) Remove dado panel (25-27-10).
(4) Remove fasteners securing base unit to mounting bracket.
(5) Remove base unit.
B. To remove the cockpit handset and cord reel (Figure 401):
(2) Lift handset from cradle.
(3) Remove fasteners securing handset cradle to mounting bracket.
(4) Remove fasteners securing cord reel to bulkhead.
(5) Pull handset cradle, cord reel, and handset together as a unit straight out from the mounting
bracket. The connector directly underneath handset cradle will disconnect when cradle is
lifted from mounting bracket
(6) Remove handset cradle, cord reel, and handset.
C. To remove the antenna (Figure 401):
(2) Carefully remove sealing compound per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual chapter 51.
(3) Remove fasteners securing antenna.
(4) Carefully loosen antenna from nutplate.
(5) Pull antenna away from nutplate enough to access coaxial connector.
(6) Disconnect coaxial connector and remove antenna.
(7) Install protective covers on coaxial connector.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a cabin base unit (Figure 401):
(1) Position base unit on mounting bracket and secure with fasteners.
B. To install the cockpit handset and cord reel (Figure 401):
(1) Position cord reel in storage box well bottom and secure with fasteners.
(2) Position handset cradle so that electrical connector mates with its jack.
(3) Secure handset cradle to mounting bracket with fasteners.
(4) Place handset on cradle.
C. To install the antenna (Figure 401):
(1) Clean aircraft surface and antenna base per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual
chapter 51.
NOTE: Make sure that the surfaces are free of corrosion, paint, grease, or preservation fluids.
(2) Remove protective cover from coaxial connector.
(3) Connect coaxial cable per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual chapter 51.
(4) Position antenna on aircraft surface.
(5) Perform wet installation of all but one fastener per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual
chapter 51.
(6) Do electrical bond check per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual chapter 51.
NOTE: Resistance between antenna base and ground should not exceed 0.003 ohms.
(7) Perform a wet installation of the remaining fastener per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance
Manual chapter 51.
(8) Apply sealant around antenna base per Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual chapter 51.
(9) Restore power and perform check for proper operation of system.
Nov 10/2006
AEROCOM 1000 CTU
BASE UNITS
TRANSCEIVER
COCKPIT HANDSET
ANTENNA FILTER CORDLESS HANDSETS
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
IRIDIUM COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the airborne
telephone system.
(1) Equipment
• Digital voltmeter
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the airborne telephone system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Plan, document number D-GT23905005, the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
OFFICE EQUIPMENT
OFFICE EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
An Aerorouter 700 Local Area Network (LAN) server, two High Speed Transmitters (HST), RJ-45 PC
jacks, and RJ-45 LAN jacks allow multiple computers to connect to a high-speed satellite data
connection and send data to one another. The RJ-45 PC jacks interface with the Iridium Satellite
Communications (SATCOM) system (23-16-00). The RJ-45 LAN jacks are interfaced with the LAN
server, HSTs, and the INMARSAT SATCOM (23-15-00).
2. LOCATION

Aerorouter 700 RH aft baggage compartment in front of the water tank
HST (2) Left-hand aft equipment bay
RJ-45 LAN jack (3) Right-hand Seat 2, and Left-hand Seats 2
and 4 outlet panels
RJ-45 PC jack (3) Right-hand Seat 2, and Left-hand Seats 2
and 4 outlet panels
AEROCOM circuit breaker CBP-1 G-4
HST circuit breaker (2) CBP-2 D10 and D-11
OFFICE EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
3. OPERATION
Connect a personal computer to any of the RJ-45 LAN ports throughout the cabin to use the LAN and/or
connect to the INMARSAT SATCOM system for a high-speed data connection. The network will allow all
computers connected to transfer data. Connect a personal computer to any of the RJ-45 PC ports
throughout the cabin to connect to the Iridium SATCOM system. The PC ports have a lower data
connection speed than the LAN ports.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
OFFICE EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the Aerorouter 700 Local Area Network (LAN) server (Figure 401):
(2) Gain access to the Aerorouter server through the right-hand baggage compartment closeout
panel.
(3) Reach behind through the closeout panel opening to loosen captive thumbscrew securing
server to mounting tray.
(4) Disconnect electrical connections from server.
(5) Put protective covers on electrical connections.
(6) Remove server.
(7) If server requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
B. To remove a High Speed Transceiver (HST) (Figure 402):
(2) Gain access to HST in aft equipment bay.
(3) Loosen captive thumbscrews securing HST to rack.
(4) Disconnect wiring from HST.
(5) Slide HST forward out of rack.
(6) If HST requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the Aerorouter 700 LAN server (Figure 401):
(1) Reach behind through right-hand baggage compartment closeout panel opening to position
Aerorouter 700 server on its mounting tray.
(2) Remove protective covers on electrical connections.
(3) Connect electrical connections.
Nov 10/2006
(4) Tighten captive thumbscrew to secure router to mounting tray.
(5) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801).
B. To install an HST (Figure 402):
(1) Slide HST carefully into rack to ensure proper electrical connection.
(2) Tighten captive thumbscrews securing HST to rack.
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
AEROROUTER 700 LAN

SERVER
CAPTIVE THUMBSCREWS
SERVER MOUNTING TRAY
RH BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT CLOSEOUT PANEL

(VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD)

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
CAPTIVE THUMBSCREWS
HST
AFT EQUIPMENT BAY SATCOM SHELF

(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
OFFICE EQUIPMENT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the Aerorouter 700
cabin Local Area Network (LAN) system with the HST-2100 High Speed Transceiver (HST).
(1) Equipment
• Laptop PCs with IEEE 802.3 capabilities
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
B. Verify that all equipment necessary for the test (all cockpit avionics and electrical equipment,
circuit breaker panels, and remote mounted nose, tail and equipment bay equipment) is installed
in the aircraft before proceeding. Energize all aircraft electrical buses.
3. TEST
A. Test the Aerorouter 700 cabin LAN system with HST in accordance with Bombardier Completion
Center Ground Test Procedure, document number D-GT23905008, the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The production-installed cabin paging/public address system has been modified by the addition of a
preamp and two utility speakers. These components interface to the cabin audio entertainment system
and the cabin management system Entertainment Control Module (ECM) and stereo amplifier. Cabin
paging/public address permits the crew to make passenger announcements and sounds chimes when a
cabin or lavatory call button is pressed or upon changes in the status of the NO SMOKING and FASTEN
SEAT BELTS ordinance signs. Table 1 lists the cabin paging components and locations.

Preamp (A1RZ) Forward avionics compartment at FS279R, RBL15.70 (below
production audio amplifier)
Speakers LS1RZ and LS8RZ Entry headliner and lavatory RH side panel
PA MHE CONT circuit breaker CBP1 P-7
AUDIO AMP circuit breaker CBPG-34
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Setting the microphone-select knob to PA on a cockpit audio panel and keying the microphone
generates a Push-To-Talk (PTT) signal which is sent to the ECM. PTT is used to initiate the chime tone.
Speaking into the microphone sends an audio signal from the audio panel to the production amplifier,
then to the preamp, and then to the ECM. The ECM sends the audio signal to the stereo amplifier, to the
switch panel headphone jacks, and to the speakers in the lavatory and entry area. The amplifier sends
the audio signal to the entertainment speakers in the main cabin. When cabin paging or public address is
activated, all entertainment audio in the cabin is muted.
The entertainment speakers and stereo amplifier are discussed in detail in 23-32-00. The switch panel
headphone jacks and ECM are discussed in detail in 23-90-00.
The preamp draws 28VDC from the production 28VDC source.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the entry area headliner speaker (Figure 401):
(2) Remove headliner (25-15-01).
(3) Disconnect wiring to speaker.
(4) Remove fasteners securing speaker to aircraft structure.
(5) Remove speaker.
B. To remove the lavatory side panel-mounted speaker (Figure 401):
(2) Remove applicable side panel (25-49-05).
(3) Disconnect wiring to speaker.
(4) Remove fasteners securing speaker to inserts in side panel and remove speaker.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the entry area headliner speaker (Figure 401):
(1) Position speaker and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to speaker.
(3) Install headliner (25-15-01).
B. To install the lavatory side panel-mounted speaker (Figure 401):
(1) Position speaker on side panel and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to speaker.
(3) Install side panel (25-49-05).
Nov 10/2006
LAV SIDE PANEL LAV SPEAKER
B
SPEAKER ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD) A
NUTPLATE
WASHER
SCREW SPEAKER
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
CABIN PAGING/PUBLIC ADDRESS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying operation of the cabin paging/public
address system.
(1) Equipment
• Laptop computer with Honeywell/Baker adjustment software and RS-232
interface cable
• Video cassettes, DVDs, CDs, headphones, and any other items required to
properly operate the entertainment system
(2) Facilities
• External power source capable of supplying 115VAC/400Hz
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the cabin paging/public address system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center
Ground Test Procedure, document number D-GT23315000, revision (A), or the latest approved
revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN CALL SYSTEM
CABIN CALL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The cabin call system allows the passengers to notify the cockpit crew and the cabin attendant when in
need of assistance. Aural and visual notification is provided by a chime and lighted annunciators. The
system consists of call switches in the cabin and lavatory, and a call reset annunciator/switch in the
cockpit (31-60-10). The cabin call system is controlled by the cabin management system (23-90-00).
Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

CALL switches (2) Call switch panel in the lavatory vanity; VIP switch panel at LH seat 2
CALL RESET-CABIN/LAV Auxiliary annunciator panel in cockpit center pedestal
annunciator/switch
CABIN CALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
When the lavatory CALL switch is pressed, a ground is sent to the cabin management system Cabin
Control Module 2 (CCM 2). CCM 2 supplies the discrete ground to illuminate the CALL switch in the
lavatory and also communicates with Cabin Control Module 1 (CCM 1) via the cabin management data
bus. CCM 1 supplies a discrete ground to the auxiliary annunciator panel in the cockpit, illuminating the
LAV annunciator. The signal is also received by the MHE Entertainment Control Module (ECM), which
initiates a chime tone for the cockpit and galley speakers. Pressing the CALL button again resets the
lavatory call switch indication and the cockpit CALL RESET-LAV annunciator.
When the cabin CALL switch is pressed, a signal is sent to CCM 1 via the cabin management data bus.
CCM 1 receives the data bus signal and provides a discrete ground to the auxiliary annunciator panel
illuminating the CALL RESET-CABIN annunciator. The signal is also received by the MHE ECM via the
data bus, which initiates a chime tone for the cockpit and galley speakers. Pressing a cabin CALL switch
again resets the call switch indication and extinguishes the cockpit CALL RESET-CABIN annunciator.
Pressing the CALL RESET-CABIN/LAV annunciator/switch on the auxiliary annunciator panel in the
cockpit sends a momentary call reset discrete ground to CCM 1, which then transmits a call reset signal
via the cabin management data bus. CCM 1 removes the discrete grounds, which extinguishes the
cockpit CALL RESET-CABIN and LAV annunciators. CCM 2 receives this data bus signal and resets the
lavatory call mode, and removes the ground discrete, resetting the lavatory CALL switch indication. The
cabin switch panels receive the data bus signal and reset the cabin CALL switch indication.
Nov 10/2006
CALL
CALL SWITCH PANEL
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
CABIN CALL SMOKE

DET
COCKPIT CABIN
CABIN LAV
TEMP RESET TEST
ENTRY
LIGHTS
ON
OFF
Nov 10/2006
CABIN CALL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying the proper operation of the cabin call
system.
(1) Equipment
• Laptop computer with Honeywell/Baker adjustment software and RS-232
interface cable
• Video cassettes, DVDs, CDs, headphones, and any other items required to
properly operate the entertainment system
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the cabin call system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number D-GT23315000, revision (A), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An audio entertainment system has been installed in the aircraft to provide stereo quality audio. Table 1
lists components and their locations. Audio selections are available through cabin speakers or through
headphone jacks located on the passenger switch panels. The audio system receives passenger input
from switch panels, remote controls, and controls located on the audio source units. The Airshow
passenger briefing (23-34-00), and cabin management system (23-90-00) also interface with the cabin
audio entertainment system.
The available audio sources are:

• 12-disc CD player
• Digital Video Disc (DVD) player
• Video Cassette Player (VCP)
The DVD player functions as an audio or video source.

12-disc CD player Divan aft end cabinet
DVD player Divan aft end cabinet
ECM (MHE) Outboard of divan aft end cabinet at FS555R
Entertainment cooling fan Divan aft end cabinet (insert assembly behind CD)
High/mid speakers (6) Main cabin PSU
Stereo amplifier Dado panel between FS499R and FS513R
Subwoofers (2) Outboard of dado panels at FS455L and FS361R
Video Cassette Player Divan aft end cabinet
CABIN ENT circuit breaker CBPG-15
CABIN MGMT 1 circuit breaker CBPG-16
ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL circuit breaker CBPG-20
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The Entertainment Control Module (ECM) serves as a central switching and amplifying device for the
audio and video entertainment systems. The stereo amplifier amplifies the audio signal for the main
cabin entertainment speakers. Audio and video signals are fed into the ECM, which then routes them to
the selected destinations. The ECM converts data bus signals to discrete outputs to control the
entertainment system. The ECM sends the audio signal it receives from the audio sources to the stereo
amplifier, which then distributes the signal to the entertainment speakers and subwoofers.
Nov 10/2006
The cabin management system provides control of the ECM and other audio components. See 23-90-00
for more detailed information on the cabin management system, ECM, data bus, remote control, and
switch panels.
A. Headphone Control
The Passenger Switch Panels, located adjacent to the seats, control headphone audio source
selection, AUDIO SELECT, and headphone volume control, VOLUME and VOLUME .
TABLE READ AUDIO

LIGHT LIGHT SELECT VOLUME VOLUME
MODE
PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH PANELS
AUDIO READ
MODE VOLUME VOLUME SELECT LIGHT
DIVAN AND ENTERTAINMENT CABINET SWITCH PANEL
B. Speaker Control
Cabin audio is controlled at the Entertainment and VIP Switch Panels. SPEAKER ON/OFF
controls the cabin speakers. AUDIO SELECT controls source selection. Volume is controlled by
VOLUME and VOLUME , or CONTROL ADJUST -/+.
C. Source Equipment Control
The audio components may be operated manually or with the remote control. Refer to the
manufacturers’ operation manuals to access all the available features.
FWD AFT
AUDIO
MODE SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
AIRSHOW FWD AFT

SPEAKER MODE MONITOR MONITOR
VOLUME VOLUME ON/OFF SELECT ON/OFF ON/OFF
ENTERTAINMENT SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
CH
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL WITH HOME MENU DISPLAYED
Nov 10/2006
SWITCH PANEL ENTERTAINMENT SWITCH PANEL
MULTI-DISC CD PLAYER
VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
115VAC/60HZ UTILITY OUTLET
DIVAN AFT END CABINET
SUBWOOFER MID-RANGE SPEAKERS

(6 PLACES)
FS FS FS
350.25 560.31 586.92
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT COMPONENTS
Nov 10/2006
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a mid-range speaker (Figure 401):
(2) Remove PSU cover in speaker area (25-26-20).
(3) Remove fasteners securing speaker.
(4) Disconnect wiring from speaker.
(5) Remove speaker.
B. To remove a subwoofer (Figure 401):
(2) Slide seats inboard to access dado panel as required.
(4) Remove fasteners securing subwoofer.
(5) Disconnect wiring from subwoofer.
(6) Remove subwoofer.
C. To remove the entertainment source equipment (Figure 402):
NOTE: The source equipment is secured to the entertainment equipment insert assembly. The
insert assembly must be removed from the divan aft end cabinet in order to access source
equipment attach points.
(2) Remove front panel from around entertainment equipment by pulling inboard (secured with
ball catches).
(3) Remove fasteners securing insert assembly to divan aft end cabinet.
(4) Pull insert assembly inboard enough to reach wiring.
(5) Disconnect wiring from entertainment equipment inside insert assembly.
(6) Remove insert assembly.
Nov 10/2006
(7) Remove fasteners securing entertainment component to insert assembly.
(8) Remove entertainment component.
D. To remove the entertainment control module (Figure 402):
(2) Remove contents (printer/fax machine, if installed) and drawer from forward section of divan
aft end cabinet.
(3) Remove fasteners securing outboard removable panel to end cabinet.
(4) Pull panel inboard.
(5) Disconnect wiring from unit.
(6) Remove fasteners securing unit to removable panel.
(7) Remove unit.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a mid-range speaker (Figure 401):
(1) Position speaker and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to speakers.
(3) Install PSU cover (25-26-20).
B. To install a subwoofer (Figure 401):
(1) Position subwoofer and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to subwoofer.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801)
Nov 10/2006
C. To install the entertainment source equipment (Figure 402):
(1) Position entertainment component onto insert assembly and secure with fasteners.
(2) Position insert assembly inboard of divan aft end cabinet and restore electrical connections
to entertainment components.
(3) Slide insert assembly into place and secure with fasteners to divan aft end cabinet.
(4) Install front panel.
D. To install the entertainment control module (Figure 402):
(1) Position unit and secure with fasteners to divan aft end cabinet removable panel.
(2) Position removable panel and restore electrical connections to unit.
(5) Secure removable panel with fasteners to the divan aft end cabinet.
(6) Install drawer and contents (printer/fax machine, if installed) into aft section of divan aft end
cabinet.
Nov 10/2006
A MID-RANGE SPEAKERS
(6 PLACES)
FS FS FS
350.25 560.31 586.92
SUBWOOFER
CABIN AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
COOLING FAN (BEHIND CD PLAYER)

SWITCH PANEL

MULTI-DISC CD PLAYER
VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
115VAC/60HZ OUTLET
REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL

(ENTERTAINMENT CONTROLLER MHE BEHIND)
CABIN AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM- ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the audio
entertainment system.
(1) Equipment
• Applicable vendor installation and system operating manuals
• Headsets available for each seat position as required
• Prerecorded audio media (e.g., DVDs, CDs, and video cassette tapes)
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the audio entertainment system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-251, revision (F), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Table 1 lists the video entertainment system components and their locations. Video selections are
available on two LCD monitors in the forward and aft cabin bulkheads. The video system receives
passenger input from switch panels, the remote control, and controls located on the video source units.
The passenger information (23-34-00), cabin management (23-90-00), and cabin audio entertainment
(23-32-00) systems interface with the cabin video entertainment equipment.
The available video sources are:

• Digital Video Disc (DVD) player
• Video Cassette Player (VCP)
• Passenger information system (23-34-00)
DVD players can function as either an audio only source or a video source.

18" LCD monitors (2) LH forward bulkhead, RH aft bulkhead
DVD players Entertainment cabinet
Monitor adjustment controls (2) Stowed behind dado panel, LH forward and RH aft
Video cassette player Entertainment cabinet
MONITORS FWD circuit breaker CBPG-18
MONITORS AFT circuit breaker CBPG-19
ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL circuit breaker CBPG-20
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The cabin management system Entertainment Control Module (ECM) serves as a central switching and
amplifying device for the audio and video entertainment systems. Audio and video signals are fed into
the ECM, which routes them to the selected destinations. The ECM sends the video signals it receives to
the LCD monitors. The aft bulkhead monitor is a slim line LCD that features an in-line digital video
interface unit (remote box) that receives and processes the ECM signals and then supplies the feed to
the monitor.
The cabin management system provides control of the ECM and other video components. See 23-90-00
for more detailed information on the cabin management system, ECM, data bus, remote control, and
switch panels.
Nov 10/2006
A. Cabin Video Control
Cabin video is controlled at the Entertainment Switch Panel and VIP Switch Panel, the video
source units, or the remote control. To operate the IR remote control, point the control toward
either of the bulkhead monitors to allow the IR sensor, mounted adjacent to the monitors, to
receive the signal. Pressing FWD MONITOR ON/OFF or AFT MONITOR ON/OFF on either switch
panel operates the related monitor. A second press will turn the monitor off. FWD VIDEO SELECT
and AFT VIDEO SELECT steps through video sources.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operation manuals to access all the available features and for detailed
operation.
FWD AFT
AUDIO
MODE SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
AIRSHOW FWD AFT

CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
CH
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL WITH HOME MENU DISPLAYED
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: See 23-32-00 for removal of the entertainment source equipment.
A. To remove the forward monitor:
(2) Remove door jamb from bulkhead.
(3) Remove fasteners securing monitor.
(4) Slide monitor inboard enough to reach wiring.
(5) Disconnect wiring from monitor.
(6) Remove monitor.
B. To remove the aft monitor:
(2) Remove left-hand bulkhead forward partition (25-23-55).
(3) Disconnect wiring from monitor.
(4) Remove fasteners securing monitor to bulkhead.
(5) Remove monitor.
C. To remove the aft monitor remote box:
(2) Remove lavatory curio cabinet/mirror cabinet as required to access unit (25-49-00).
(3) Remove fasteners securing unit.
(4) Disconnect wiring.
(5) Remove unit.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
NOTE: See 23-32-00 for installation of the entertainment source equipment.
A. To install the forward monitor:
(1) Restore electrical connections to monitor.
(2) Slide monitor into position and secure with fasteners.
(3) Install door jamb.
B. To install the aft monitor:
(1) Position monitor on bulkhead and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to monitor.
C. To install aft monitor remote box:
(1) Restore electrical connections to unit.
(2) Position unit outboard of sink and secure with fasteners.
(3) Install lavatory curio cabinet/mirror cabinet as required (25-49-00).
Nov 10/2006
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the video
entertainment system.
(1) Equipment
• Prerecorded video media (e.g. DVDs and video cassette tapes)
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the video entertainment system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-251 revision (F), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM
PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The Airshow 400 passenger information system displays a moving map with a symbol representing the
aircraft to show the relative position of the aircraft during flight. It can also display other map and flight
data on the video monitors. The main system component is a Digital Interface Unit (DIU) that is loaded
with custom software and provides the interface to aircraft systems for real-time flight information
displays. AIRSHOW MODE SELECT switches are installed at two cabin area locations to supply
passenger control of the Airshow display mode. An RS-232 mouse port connector installed near the VIP
seat enables interactive control of the DIU video output in conjunction with certain optional display
modes. In the current configuration, the mouse port is used for initial system set-up and maintenance
only.
Audio briefing is incorporated into the Airshow 400 system and is controlled by the Flight Deck Controller
(FDC) in the cockpit. The FDC also provides the crew with a means of switching the basic Airshow
display modes, and controls for manually entering display information such as Time-To-Destination
(TTD). Except during audio briefing, the Airshow does not have a proprietary audio channel.
The Cabin Management System (CMS) controls the distribution of all Airshow system audio and video
output. Table 1 lists the Airshow components and their locations.

AIRSHOW MODE SELECT switches (2) Entertainment and VIP switch panels
Digital interface unit Main avionics compartment at FS295L
Flight deck controller Cockpit center pedestal
RS-232 mouse port connector Outboard dado panel at RH seat 2 (VIP seat)
AIRSHOW circuit breaker CBP2 J-4
AIRSHOW 400 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
This system is powered by 28VDC CABIN BUS 2 whenever the cabin bus disconnect switch is selected
to the active position (24-70-00).
When power is applied to the Airshow 400, the system goes through an initial power-on self-test which
lasts approximately 15 seconds. During this initial loading sequence, text information can be seen
scrolling quickly on the video monitor. Once this sequence is successfully completed, the operational
software will load, and the Airshow 400 copyright page will display. The RS-232 mouse port connector is
provided for initial set-up and maintenance use only.
Nov 10/2006
The operational software checks the system resources and initializes the system databases, navigation
and air data interfaces, and the preset lines of information to be displayed. This software boot-up
sequence takes 1-2 minutes to complete. During this time, only the Airshow 400 copyright page is
displayed. The current software revision and four-digit part number will display on the copyright page
near the end of the boot-up process. When complete, the Airshow 400 transitions to its normal operating
mode.
Data for the Airshow 400 system is obtained from the Flight Management System (FMS). If the FMS
connected to the Airshow 400 is not initialized, the flight and time data displayed on the Airshow 400 may
be invalid. If the Airshow 400 cannot obtain data from the FMS, it will show the information pages without
any data in the flight or time fields.
When activated via the FDC, the automated briefing audio signal goes to the Entertainment Control
Module (ECM), which sends the signal to the entertainment speakers via the stereo amplifier, the cabin
paging/public address speakers, and the switch panel headphone jacks. When the automated briefing is
activated, all entertainment audio in the cabin is muted. PA audio (23-31-00) has priority over briefing
audio.
To select the Airshow video display, press FWD or AFT VIDEO SELECT on the VIP Switch Panel or
Entertainment Switch Panel until Airshow video is seen on the associated monitor and AIRSHOW is
annunciated in the panel display (23-33-00). Airshow video may also be selected via the handheld
infrared remote control. Press VIDEO SELECT on the touchscreen to display the Video Menu, then
press AIRSHOW below the associated monitor on/off switch/icon to select a cabin monitor for display.
For proper operation, point the IR remote control towards either of the bulkhead mounted monitors to
allow the IR sensors, mounted adjacent to the monitors, to receive the IR signal.
Options can include:
AIRSHOW - Displays standard Airshow menu AUTO mode. Network mode can be reentered by
pressing the mouse button. Press AIRSHOW MODE SELECT on the VIP or entertainment switch
panels, or press Mode on the VIDEO touchscreen menu of the IR remote control, to cycle through
access to the following basic Airshow modes and displays:
MAP - Displays a high-resolution map of the current aircraft location
INFO - Displays real-time flight information. This information can be chosen by the user from
a menu of options which can include:
• Current ground speed
• Time to destination
• Altitude
• Outside air temperature
• Distance to destination
RLI - Displays an aircraft symbol on a blue field showing the two cities currently nearest the
aircraft and including vectors, distance information, and location relative to the aircraft
AUTO - This mode cycles through RLI, INFO, and MAP modes. The MAP series in AUTO
mode starts with a low-resolution map of the current aircraft location and zooms through
progressively higher-resolution maps until it reaches the standard MAP mode display. It then
cycles back to RLI, and the sequence begins again.
Nov 10/2006
SCROLL SELECT
FLIGHT DECK CONTROLLER
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the Airshow
passenger information system.
(1) Equipment
• Prerecorded video/audio media (e.g. Video cassette tapes, DVDs, and CDs)
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the Airshow passenger information system in accordance with Bombardier Completion
Center Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-208, revision (C), or the latest
approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT AUDIO MODIFICATION
JUMPSEAT AUDIO MODIFICATION - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An audio panel and mic/phone jack panel have been installed to provide communication capability to the
jumpseat occupant. The existing Audio Electronic Control Unit (AECU) has been removed and replaced
with a control unit that provides an interface to the added jumpseat audio control panel and mic/phone
jack panel. The jumpseat audio panel provides the jumpseat occupant the capability to transmit and
receive via the aircraft communication systems. The observer Flight Data Recorder (FDR) PTT is
paralleled with the copilot FDR PTT. A Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) audio mixer sums the jumpseat
audio with the existing cockpit audio to the CVR. The existing volume control R1RM has been removed
from the bulkhead behind the copilot’s seat. Volume control and audio selection for each radio is
provided on the jumpseat audio control panel. The observer mic/phone jack panel provides the
connections for the observer boom mic, headphones, hand mic, and oxygen mask (35-10-05) mic. The
existing headphone and mic jack on the bulkhead behind the copilot’s seat are retained and connected
to work with the jumpseat audio panel.
The AECU receives 28VDC Bus 2 power through circuit breaker CB2-H8, AUDIO OBS. The CVR Audio
Mixer receives 28VDC Essential Bus power through circuit breaker CB4-D1, CVR.

Audio control panel, observer (A101RM) Galley jumpseat tray mechanism
Audio electronic control unit (A1RH) Forward avionics compartment at FS274R (production
location)
CVR audio mixer (A100RM) Copilot’s side console at FS248R
Mic/Phone jack panel, observer Forward wardrobe cabinet, forward wall FS285L
AUDIO OBS circuit breaker CBP2 H-8
CVR circuit breaker CBP4 D-1 (production CB)
JUMPSEAT AUDIO SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The AECU and CVR audio mixer are active whenever the associated circuit breakers are closed and
powered. Turn the audio level control down and plug the jumpseat headset and mic plugs into the
mic/phone jack panel or jumpseat headphone and mic jacks on the cockpit bulkhead. The observer
oxygen mask (35-10-05) mic plugs into the mic/phone jack panel. Select the desired radio to receive and
transmit audio, and adjust the volume control to an acceptable level. Refer to the documentation for the
existing cockpit audio control panels for additional information on the proper use and adjustment of the
observer audio control panel.
Nov 10/2006
OBSERVER MIC AND

HEADPHONE JACKS B A
OBSERVER AUDIO 1 2 1 2
HDPH BOOM
MIC 1 2 1 2
HAND
1 2 1 2
MIC
OBSERVER MIC/PHONE
JACK PANEL
B
OBSERVER
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT AUDIO MODIFICATION - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the CVR audio mixer:
(2) Remove fasteners securing the copilot’s side console closeout panel.
(3) Slide the closeout panel inboard enough to access the audio mixer.
(4) Disconnect wiring to audio mixer.
(5) Remove fasteners securing audio mixer.
(6) Remove the audio mixer.
B. To remove the audio control panel:
(2) Deploy the jumpseat.
(3) Rotate Dzus fasteners to the open position.
(4) Pull control panel out enough to access the electrical connection.
(5) Disconnect the control panel electrical connection.
(6) Remove the control panel.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the CVR audio mixer:
(1) Position the audio mixer on the copilot’s side console closeout panel.
(2) Install fasteners securing audio mixer.
(3) Connect wiring to audio mixer.
(4) Position the copilot’s side console closeout panel.
(5) Install fasteners securing the copilot’s side console closeout panel.
(6) Close circuit breaker(s) listed in Table 1.
(7) Restore power and check for proper operation.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install the audio control panel:
(1) Connect the control panel electrical connection.
(2) Position the control panel in the mounting box.
(3) Rotate Dzus fasteners to the closed position.
(4) Close circuit breaker(s) listed in Table 1.
(5) Restore power and check for proper operation.
(6) Stow the jumpseat.
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT AUDIO MODIFICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the observer audio
system.
NOTE: The following test procedure requires qualified operators using approved aircraft operational
procedures.
(1) Equipment
• As specified in Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Plan, document

number D-GT23515002
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the observer audio panel in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Plan, document number D-GT23515002 revision (-), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
A Honeywell/Baker Cabin Management System (CMS) has been installed in the aircraft to manage
several cabin systems and components. These systems and components include cabin lights, galley
lights, lavatory lights, cabin audio and video entertainment systems, cabin temperature, galley
equipment, and water system. The cabin management system uses a two-wire, bidirectional data bus for
communication between components. Each device on the data bus that receives inputs has a unique
address. This allows command signals to be routed appropriately. Some switch panels, such as the
lavatory vanity switch panel, are not connected to the bus, and use discrete signal lines to connect to the
device being controlled. Some devices connected to the data bus, such as entertainment source
equipment, are discussed in the applicable chapter and section.
This Honeywell/Baker MH series CMS consists of two Cabin Control Modules (CCM), one MHE
Entertainment Control Module (ECM), an infrared (IR) receiver (MHR), two remote IR sensors, a
Program Interface (MHP), an Entertainment Control Unit (ECU) switch panel, a Galley Control Unit
(GCU) switch panel, nine Passenger Control Unit (PCU) switch panels, a Master Control Unit (MCU)
switch panel, and two data bus termination resistors.
The CCMs are Honeywell/Baker MHC series cabin control modules and are used to control cabin
temperature, cabin lights, water system heaters, water purge process, and water quantity level test.
CCMs convert data bus signals to discrete outputs for control of cabin functions.
The ECM is a Honeywell/Baker MHE series entertainment control module which switches and distributes
the cabin audio and video entertainment system signals, and provides chime, passenger page, and
public address to the entire passenger cabin. The MHE provides complete crossover switching of both
cabin audio and video entertainment. The ECM receives RS-485 data bus signals and interprets them to
route audio and video signals, generate chime tones, and provide paging functions.
Two Honeywell/Baker programmable handheld IR remote controls allow passengers and the cabin
attendant to remotely control audio and video components. The Honeywell/Baker remote IR sensors
receive IR commands from the IR remote control and forward them to the MHR IR receiver. The MHR
forwards the commands via the bidirectional data bus to the entertainment source equipment.
The Honeywell/Baker MHP program interface attaches to the MH system RS-485 bidirectional data bus
and interfaces between a laptop computer (used for programming changes) and the MH system. The
MHP stores operational software for system control. The MHP also prevents the MH system from
resetting to start-up default parameters because of power interruptions of 1 second or less. There is a
maintenance plug extension stowed near the MHP.
The ECU is a Honeywell/Baker MHS series switch panel. This unit communicates with the other units on
the RS-485 bidirectional bus and allows cabin control of the forward and aft monitors’ on/off control,
cabin speaker on/off control, cabin speaker volume control, cabin speaker audio selection, forward and
aft monitor video selection, and Airshow mode selection. An alphanumeric display indicates the selected
audio and/or video source.
The GCU is a Honeywell/Baker MHS series switch panel. This unit communicates with the other units on
the RS-485 bidirectional bus and allows control of cabin lights, galley lights, lavatory lights, water
heaters, water purge, and galley equipment. It also displays potable water quantity.
Nov 10/2006
The PCUs are Honeywell/Baker MHS series switch panels. These units communicate with the other
units on the RS-485 bidirectional bus and allow the passengers to control headphone audio selection,
headphone volume, reading lights, and table lights. A headset jack provides access to stereo audio. An
alphanumeric display indicates the selected audio source.
The LCU is a Honeywell/Baker MHS series switch panel. This unit communicates with the other units on
the RS-485 bidirectional bus and allows control of the baggage compartment light, aft wardrobe light,
lavatory dome light, lavatory indirect lights, and lavatory floor lights.
The MCU is a Honeywell/Baker MHS series switch panel. This unit communicates with the other units on
the RS-485 bidirectional bus and allows the occupant of the VIP seat to control the cabin temperature,
cabin lights, cabin audio and video entertainment, and to initiate a cabin call. An alphanumeric display
indicates the selected audio and/or video source, the status of the temperature adjustment, and other
system features.
Two resistors terminate the ends of the MH system RS-485 bidirectional data bus.
2. LOCATION

CCM 1 (MHC) Lower galley equipment tray
CCM 2 (MHC) On lower water tank closeout access door in baggage
compartment
ECM (MHE) Outboard of entertainment cabinet at FS555R
ECU switch panel Divan aft end cabinet top surface
GCU switch panel Upper galley, aft section
IR receiver (MHR) Outboard of dado panel at FS371L
MCU switch panel LH Seat 2 sideledge
PCU switch panels (9) Throughout cabin
Program Interface (MHP) Lower galley equipment tray
Remote IR sensors (2) In bulkheads near monitors
Termination resistors (2) Lower galley equipment tray and outboard of dado panel at
LH seat 1
ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL circuit CBPG-20
breaker
AUDIO VIDEO AMP circuit breaker CBPG-34
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
Nov 10/2006
3. OPERATION
The Honeywell/Baker MH cabin management system utilizes a bidirectional data bus and discrete
outputs to control switching functions. In addition, the entertainment remote control interfaces with this
system through the remote IR sensors.
Actuation of a push-button control switch sends a data word to the bidirectional data bus. Each data
word is addressed to a particular device. The addressed device decodes the data word, activates the
appropriate control or function, and sends a feedback response to the control switch to change the
switch backlighting (if applicable). For discrete outputs, the push-button control switch sends a signal
directly to the device being controlled.
Consult the manufacturer’s documentation for complete programming and operating instructions.
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
FWD AFT
AUDIO
MODE SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
VIDEO
SELECT
AIRSHOW FWD AFT

Nov 10/2006
LAV
DOME
LIGHT
LAV
MIRROR
LIGHTS
LAV
FLOOR
LIGHTS
BAGGAGE
LIGHTS
LCU SWITCH PANEL
GALLEY GALLEY GALLEY CABIN

WORK EFFECT FLOOR UPWASH
LIGHTS LIGHTS LIGHTS LIGHTS
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR DNWASH
ON/OFF LIGHTS LIGHTS LIGHTS
HOT GALLEY LAV

WATER WATER WATER WATER
DISP HEATER HEATER PURGE
W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
AUDIO READ TABLE

MODE VOLUME VOLUME SELECT LIGHT LIGHT
PASSENGER SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a passenger switch panel:
(2) Open and lock out circuit breaker(s) associated with each switch’s respective electrical
system.
(3) Gently lift out on edges of switch panel.
(4) Disconnect wiring from switch panel.
(5) Remove switch panel.
B. To remove the entertainment control module (Figure 401):
(2) Remove contents (printer/fax machine, if installed) and drawer from aft section of divan aft
end cabinet.
(3) Remove fasteners securing outboard removable panel to end cabinet.
(4) Pull panel inboard.
(6) Remove fasteners securing unit to removable panel.
(7) Remove unit.
C. To remove a component from the lower galley equipment tray (Figure 402):
CAUTION: BECAUSE OF THE NUMEROUS AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS INTERFACED TO THE

CCM, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT AIRCRAFT POWER BE SHUT OFF DURING
REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION. ENSURE THAT PLUGS ARE CAPPED AND DO
NOT CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL GROUND.
(2) Remove applicable drawers and contents from lower galley.
(4) Remove fasteners securing unit.
(5) Remove unit.
Nov 10/2006
D. To remove a component outboard of a dado panel:
(2) Remove appropriate dado panel (25-27-10).
(3) Disconnect wiring from component.
(4) Remove fasteners securing component.
(5) Remove component.
E. To remove the forward IR sensor:
(2) Remove forward bulkhead left-hand aft partition (25-23-37).
(3) Slide aft partition inboard and aft to access IR sensor connections.
(4) Disconnect wiring from IR sensor.
(5) Remove fasteners securing IR sensor to bulkhead.
(6) Remove IR sensor and mounting bracket.
F. To remove the aft IR sensor:
(2) Remove monitor (23-33-00).
(3) Disconnect wiring from IR sensor.
(4) Remove fasteners securing IR sensor bracket.
(5) Remove IR sensor and mounting bracket.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a passenger switch panel:
(1) Restore electrical connections to switch panel.
(2) Position switch panel in opening and press into place.
(4) Perform applicable test per each switch’s respective section.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install the entertainment control module (Figure 401):
(1) Position unit and secure with fasteners to divan aft end cabinet removable panel.
(2) Position removable panel and restore electrical connections to unit.
(3) Secure removable panel with fasteners to the divan aft end cabinet.
(4) Install drawer and contents (printer/fax machine, if installed) into aft section of divan aft end
cabinet.
C. To install a component into the lower galley equipment tray (Figure 402):
(1) Position unit onto tray and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to unit.
(3) Install drawers.
D. To install a component outboard of a dado panel:
(1) Position unit and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to component.
E. To install the forward IR sensor:
(1) Position IR sensor with bracket on aft partition and secure with fasteners.
(2) Place aft partition near installation position to access IR sensor electrical connections.
Nov 10/2006
(3) Restore electrical connections to IR sensor.
(4) Install monitor (23-33-00).
F. To install the aft IR sensor:
(1) Position IR sensor mounting bracket.
(2) Install fasteners securing mounting bracket to bulkhead.
(3) Install monitor cover.
(4) Restore electrical connections to IR sensor.
Nov 10/2006
REMOVABLE
PANEL
(DIVAN AFT END CABINET)
ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
UPPER EQUIPMENT TRAY

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
O N/OFF LIGHTS LIGHTS LIGHTS
HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ
LOWER EQUIPMENT TRAYS
GALLEY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TRAYS

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the cabin
management system.
(1) Equipment
• Prerecorded video/audio media (e.g. DVDs, CDs, and video cassette tapes)
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the cabin management system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRI-
CAL POWER
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
24-03-20 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
3/4 Nov 10/2006
5/6 Nov 10/2006
7 Nov 10/2006
8 Nov 10/2006
24-25-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
24-25-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
24-25-00 601 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006
24-70-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
24-70-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
24-70-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS 24-03-20

60HZ POWER SYSTEM 24-25-00

Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
Inspection/Check
Operational Test of the Ground Fault Interrupters 601
LOAD SHEDDING 24-70-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501


CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The aircraft has five production circuit breaker panels. A sixth circuit breaker panel has been added in
the galley. They are as follows:
• Circuit Breaker Panel 1 (CBP1) - on the forward side of the bulkhead at FS280L
• Circuit Breaker Panel 2 (CBP2) - on the forward side of the bulkhead at FS280R
• Circuit Breaker Panel 3 (CBP3) - on the forward side of the bulkhead at FS280L
• Circuit Breaker Panel 4 (CBP4) - on the forward side of the bulkhead at FS280R
• Circuit Breaker Panel 5 (CBP5) - in the aft equipment compartment at FS650
• Galley Circuit Breaker Panel (CBPG) - in the upper galley at FS290R
Production circuit breaker panels CBP1, CBP2, CBP3, CBP4, and CBP5 have been modified by the
addition of circuit breakers for systems installed during the completion cycle. The galley circuit breaker
panel is powered whenever aircraft power is available and when the cabin bus disconnect switch is in the
active position (24-70-00).
28VDC - CABIN BUS 1

LIGHTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 5 2.5 5 5 2 1 1.5 1 2
GALLEY GALLEY ENTRY CABIN BAGGAGE CONF LAV GALLEY HTR SYSTEM
LAV WORK AREA FLOOR READ MIRROR CONTROL CONT
ACCENT
WATER
28VDC - CABIN BUS 2
LIGHTS ENTERTAINMENT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
3 3 2.5 7.5 4 3 3 5 5 2
LH READ RH READ LAV TOILET ENT MGMT 1 MGMT 2 FWD AFT CONTROL
TABLE TABLE
CABIN MONITORS
115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 1 115VAC 60Hz

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7.5 5 15 15
OVEN GALLEY UTILITY MICROWAVE

WATER OUTLETS
HTR
115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 2

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 5 15 10 10 5
LOWER LAV AUDIO HOT COFFEE ENTRY ENTRY

CABIN WATER AMP WATER MAKER HEATER HTR
LTS HTR DISP CONT
GALLEY CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (CBPG)
Nov 10/2006
115VAC ESS BUS 115VAC ESS BUS
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
115VAC ESS BUS
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
115VAC ESS BUS

FDR
PWR TCAS
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
26VAC ESS BUS 115VAC ESS BUS
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 3 (CBP3)
DC ESS BUS
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
DC ESS BUS
FMS
DATA
LOAD
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
DC ESS BUS
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
DC ESS BUS
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Nov 10/2006
POWER MUST BE OFF BEFORE OPENING PANEL CBP-1
115VAC BUS 1
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
115VAC BUS 1
28VDC CABIN BUS 1
CABIN BUS 1
GPWS 1 FEED 2
B 25 25
J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4
115VAC BUS 1 28VDC BUS 1
UPR WEATHER RADAR
CABIN
LTS R/T CONT1 CONT2
C 4
K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
115VAC BUS 1 115VAC UTILITY BUS 1 28VDC BATTERY BUS 1
CABIN
LIGHT 60Hz BUS 1
LOGO CONV FEED
D 5 20 20
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
28VDC UTILITY BUS 1 DC BUS 1 CONTROL 28VDC BUS 1 28VDC BATTERY BUS
ACCESS CABIN
DOOR WOW LTS
IND RELAY CONT ELT
E 1 1 1 1
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
28VDC BUS 1 28VDC BATTERY BUS
CREW PASS
FORCE WARN
SYST SIGNS
F 1.5
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LIGHTS
PA
IRIDIUM AUTO PULSE CHRT PLT OVHD MHE
AEROCOM SATCOM THROTTLE CONT HLDR MAP LT CONT
G 3 5 3 1 1.5 3
P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GPS FDR
1 AFIS CONT
H 7.5
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Revision A 24-03-20 Page 3/4
Nov 10/2006
POWER MUST BE OFF BEFORE OPENING PANEL CBP-2
115VAC BUS 2
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
28VDC CABIN BUS 2 115VAC BUS 2
CABIN BUS 2 SATCOM

1 FEED 2 AIRSHOW SRT
J 25 25 3 7.5
B
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
28VDC BUS 2 115VAC BUS 2
BAG
LAV
SMOKE
K 1
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
28VDC BUS 2 115VAC BUS 2 26VAC 115VAC CABIN 115VAC UTILITY BUS 2
BUS 2 BUS 2
WTR HTRS HST CABIN
BUS 2
TANK LINE 1 2 FEED
L 3 7.5 5 5 20
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DC ESS & BATTERY BUS CONTROL 28VDC UTILITY BUS 2 DC BUS 2 CONTROL 28VDC BUS 2
M 1.5
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
28VDC BATTERY BUS 28VDC BUS 2
CPLT OVHD SATCOM

MAP LT ANT
N 1.5 5
F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CABIN
AUX PWR AUTO CABIN BEACON
ANNUN SHED LAN LIGHTS
P 2 1/2 5 5
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
RAD
AUDIO GPS ALT
LDS OBS 2 2
Q 1
H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Nov 10/2006
-A- -B-
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
28VDC APU BATTERY DIRECT BUS

28VDC MAIN BATTERY DIRECT BUS
5 FUEL/DEFUEL 5
6 6
7 7
WATER
SYSTEM 2
8 8
9 9
LIGHTS
BOARD 4
10 10
SERVICE 7.5
11 11
12 12
13 13
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL JB5 (CBP5)
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
60HZ POWER SYSTEM
60HZ POWER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A power converter has been installed to provide 115VAC/60Hz power for conventionally powered
equipment on board the aircraft. This converter supplies power to the 115VAC/60Hz bus on the galley
circuit breaker panel. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

60Hz converter Lower nose compartment at FS220R, access via panel 132AR
Fuse F1XF, 30 Amp inline Lower nose compartment at FS220R, access via panel 132AR
Relay K1XF Lower nose compartment at FS220R, access via panel 132AR
60Hz CONV circuit breaker CBP1 D-11
UTILITY OUTLETS circuit breaker CBPG-28
60HZ POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The 60Hz converter is energized by the 115VAC UTILITY BUS 1 bus from the engines, the APU, or an
external power source. To use 115VAC/60Hz power, press the CABIN BUS/OFF switch (24-70-00),
located on the cockpit center pedestal. Pressing the switch annunciates CABIN BUS, which energizes
relay K1XF, and activates the 60Hz converter. Circuit breaker CBP1 D-11 provides circuit protection for
the 60Hz converter. Fuse F1XF provides line protection between the 60Hz converter and the galley
circuit breaker panel. Circuit breaker CBPG-28 provides circuit protection for the 60Hz utility outlets.
All 60Hz outlets are provided Ground Fault Interruption (GFI) protection by the galley utility GFI outlet.
This outlet has a TEST button and a RESET button. The TEST button will, when pressed, apply a
ground fault to the circuit, which should activate the protection feature. All the outlets will de-energize,
and the RESET button will protrude from the outlet housing. To reactivate the outlets, press the RESET
button. It should latch in.
CAUTION: THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF POWER AVAILABLE TO THE 60HZ SYSTEM IS LIMITED TO
3.5KVA. DO NOT OVERLOAD THE SYSTEM.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
60HZ POWER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the 60Hz power
system.
procedures.
(1) Equipment
• Digital voltmeter, Simpson 260 VOM or equivalent

• 115VAC/60Hz outlet tester (optional)
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Apply external power to the aircraft. Cabin/galley utility power is required for this test.
B. Verify that applicable circuit breakers are closed.
3. TEST
A. Test the 60Hz power system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number D-GT24255000, revision (B), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove external power from aircraft if no longer required.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
60HZ POWER SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTERS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 24-25-60-601
B. Job Set-up
CAUTION: THIS TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRES QUALIFIED OPERATORS USING

APPROVED AIRCRAFT OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES.
(1) Obey all the electrical/electronic safety precautions (AMM Task 24-00-00-910-801).
(2) Make sure the UTILITY OUTLETS circuit breaker on the Galley Circuit Breaker Panel
(GCBP) is closed.
(3) Connect electrical power to the aircraft (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801).
(4) In the cockpit, turn on the CABIN BUS/OFF switch.
C. Procedure
(1) Press the TEST button on each Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) that follows:
DESCRIPTION LOCATION
GFI Outlet, Dual Upper Galley
(a) Make sure the RESET button on each GFI trips.
(b) Press the RESET button on each GFI.
D. Job Completion
(1) Remove the electrical power from the aircraft (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-802).
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LOAD SHEDDING
LOAD SHEDDING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A system to disconnect electrical power from the cabin electrical equipment has been installed. The
system consists of a CABIN BUS/OFF Annunciator/Switch, AC contactors, DC contactors, a relay, and
circuit breakers. The annunciator/switch is mechanically guarded to prevent inadvertent operation. The
system will remove electrical power from the following buses on the listed circuit breaker panels:
• 115VAC 400 Hz - CABIN BUS 1 on the Galley Circuit Breaker Panel (CBPG)
• 115VAC 400 Hz - CABIN BUS 2 on the CBPG
• 115VAC 60Hz on the CBPG
• 115VAC CABIN BUS 2 on Circuit Breaker Panel 2 (CBP2)
• 28VDC - CABIN BUS 1 on the CBPG
• 28VDC - CABIN BUS 2 on the CBPG
• 28VDC CABIN BUS 1 on Circuit Breaker Panel 1 (CBP1)
• 28VDC CABIN BUS 2 on CBP2
The CABIN BUS/OFF Annunciator/Switch works in conjunction with two production AC utility bus
contactors (1K4XD and 2K4XD), and two production DC PWR SENS circuit breakers. It also provides
on/off control of the 115VAC/60Hz converter. Table 1 lists the load shedding components and their
locations.

AC contactors 1K6TB and 2K6TB Bulkhead FS280L and FS280R, respectively
CABIN BUS/OFF Annunciator/Switch Cockpit center pedestal
DC contactors 1K1TB and 2K1TB Bulkhead FS280L and FS280R, respectively
Relay 1K3TB Adjacent to proximity sensor electronic unit
Relays 1K8TB and 2K8TB Lower galley equipment tray
CABIN BUS 1 FEED circuit breaker CBP1 D-14
PWR SENS circuit breaker CBP1 E-6
CABIN BUS 1 FEED 1 circuit breaker CBP1 J-3
CABIN BUS 2 FEED circuit breaker CBP2 D-14
PWR SENS circuit breaker CBP2 E-6
CABIN PWR AUTO SHED circuit breaker CBP2 G-5
LOAD SHEDDING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The CABIN BUS/OFF Annunciator/Switch allows the crew to disconnect the cabin buses from their
respective electrical sources. The upper section of this switch annunciates CABIN BUS as long as the
auxiliary annunciator system is powered. In the active position, a ground is established through the
switch to the four contactor relay coils. This energizes the contactors, allowing power to flow through the
Nov 10/2006
cabin bus contactors to circuit breakers on CBPG and specific circuit breakers on CBP1 and CBP2.
Pressing the switch to illuminate OFF opens the ground, de-energizing all four cabin bus contactors, thus
removing power from the circuit breakers.
In the OFF position, the ground circuit is opened to the 60Hz converter off/on control relay coil. This
de-energizes the relay, closing the remote-off circuit that shuts off the 115VAC/60Hz power converter
(24-25-00).
Relays 1K8TB and 2K8TB monitor the utility bus. In the event of utility bus power loss to either of these
relays, the cabin upwash lights (33-21-02) will be turned on automatically.
If an altitude greater than 14,000 feet is reached, the Cabin Pressure Acquisition Module sends an
OVER PRESSURE signal to relay 1K3TB, energizing the relay. Relay 1K3TB then sends a signal to the
CABIN BUS/OFF annunciator/switch, turning the switch OFF, de-energizing all four cabin bus
contactors, and removing power from the circuit breakers. Relay 1K3TB receives its power from circuit
breaker CBP2 G-5, CABIN PWR AUTO SHED.
If the 28VDC utility buses are de-energized, the DC and AC cabin bus contactors will de-energize. This
annunciates the OFF section of the switch, regardless of switch position. The utility buses will
de-energize during the following conditions:
• Manual de-energizing
• ADG deployment
• Flap deployment
• Bus tie switching
CABIN
BUS
OFF
CABIN BUS/OFF ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
LOAD SHEDDING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a contactor (Figure 401):
CAUTION: AIRCRAFT BUS POWER FEEDERS ARE WIRED DIRECTLY TO THE CONTACTORS.
ENSURE THAT AIRCRAFT POWER IS OFF AND DISPLAY A SIGN IN THE AIRCRAFT
STATING THAT AIRCRAFT POWER IS TO REMAIN OFF UNTIL CABIN BUS POWER
CONTACTOR WORK IS COMPLETED.
(1) Ensure that aircraft power is off.
(2) Open and lock out circuit breakers listed in Table 1.
(3) Remove appropriate FS280 bulkhead closeout panel below each cockpit circuit breaker
panel.
(4) Remove wiring from contactor.
(5) Remove fasteners securing contactor to bulkhead.
(6) Remove contactor.
B. To remove the galley circuit breaker panel (Figure 402):
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT AIRCRAFT POWER IS OFF AND DISPLAY A SIGN IN THE
AIRCRAFT STATING THAT AIRCRAFT POWER IS TO REMAIN OFF UNTIL
GALLEY CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL WORK IS COMPLETED.
(2) Open and lock out circuit breakers listed in Table 1.
(3) Remove fasteners securing trim piece to galley and remove trim piece.
(4) Remove fasteners securing circuit breaker panel cover plate and remove cover plate.
(5) Remove fasteners securing circuit breaker panel to galley.
(6) Gently pull circuit breaker panel forward to gain access to wires.
(7) Identify and tag wires connected to circuit breaker panel.
(8) Remove fasteners securing wire terminals to circuit breakers.
(9) Remove circuit breaker panel electrical connections.
(10) Remove circuit breaker panel.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a contactor (Figure 401):
(1) Position contactor and secure in place with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to contactor.
(3) Install closeout panel and secure with fasteners.
B. To install the galley circuit breaker panel (Figure 402):
(1) Remove tags and restore electrical connections to circuit breaker panel.
(2) Remove tags and restore wire terminals to circuit breakers.
(3) Position circuit breaker panel and secure in place with fasteners.
(4) Position circuit breaker panel cover plate and secure in place with fasteners.
(5) Position trim piece and secure in place with fasteners.
Nov 10/2006
CONTACTOR
(4 PLACES)
CONTACTORS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL COVER PLATE
TRIM PIECE
GALLEY CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
LOAD SHEDDING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the load shedding
system.
(1) Equipment
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Verify that all equipment necessary for the test is installed in the aircraft before proceeding.
B. Verify that all circuit breakers are closed on all circuit breaker panels except those necessary for
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the load shedding system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number D-GT24035000, revision (B), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT/
FURNISHINGS
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS

2 Nov 10/2006 602 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 25-20-10 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-20-10 501 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
5 Nov 10/2006 25-21-00 501 Nov 10/2006
6 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
7 Nov 10/2006
8 Nov 10/2006 25-21-00 601 Nov 10/2006
602 Nov 10/2006
25-11-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-21-10 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-11-00 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 25-21-10 301 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 302 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
25-21-10 401 Nov 10/2006
25-15-01 1 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-21-20 1 Nov 10/2006
25-15-01 401 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 25-21-20 301 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 302 Nov 10/2006
25-15-05 1 Nov 10/2006 25-21-20 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
25-15-05 401 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
25-21-30 1 Nov 10/2006
25-18-01 1 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-21-30 301 Nov 10/2006
25-18-01 401 Nov 10/2006 302 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
25-21-30 401 Nov 10/2006
25-18-01 501 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006

25-21-30 601 Nov 10/2006 25-24-30 1 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
25-23-37 1 Nov 10/2006 25-24-30 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
25-23-37 401 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 25-26-10 1 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006 25-26-10 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
25-23-55 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-26-20 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-23-55 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 25-26-20 401 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006
25-26-30 1 Nov 10/2006
25-23-73 1 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-26-30 401 Nov 10/2006
25-23-73 401 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 25-27-10 1 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006 25-27-10 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
25-24-10 1 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
25-24-10 401 Nov 10/2006 25-27-30 1 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 25-27-30 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
25-24-20 1 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
25-24-20 401 Nov 10/2006 25-27-35 1 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 25-27-35 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006

25-29-00 1 Nov 10/2006 25-49-00 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
25-29-00 401 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 405 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006
25-30-10 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-49-00 601 Nov 10/2006
602 Nov 10/2006
25-30-10 501 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 25-49-03 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-35-01 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-49-03 401 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
25-49-05 1 Nov 10/2006
25-35-01 401 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006 25-49-05 401 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
405 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
406 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
25-35-01 601 Nov 10/2006 25-55-00 1 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
25-35-05 1 Nov 10/2006 25-55-03 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 25-55-03 401 Nov 10/2006
5 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
6 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
25-35-05 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 25-60-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
25-40-10 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 25-60-00 301 Nov 10/2006
302 Nov 10/2006
25-40-10 501 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006 25-60-00 601 Nov 10/2006
602 Nov 10/2006
25-49-00 1 Nov 10/2006 603 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 604 Nov 10/2006
25-61-01 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006

25-61-01 201 Nov 10/2006

202 Nov 10/2006
25-61-01 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
25-61-01 601 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006
25-62-00 1 Dec 14/01

2 Dec 14/01
3 Dec 14/01
4 Dec 14/01
25-62-00 401 Dec 14/01

402 Dec 14/01
25-62-00 501 Dec 14/01

502 Dec 14/01
25-62-00 601 Feb 12/05

602 Feb 12/05
25-63-04 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
25-63-04 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
25-63-04 601 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006
25-75-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
25-80-10 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
25-80-10 201 Nov 10/2006

202 Nov 10/2006

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COCKPIT MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS 25-11-00

Removal 401
Installation 401
ENTRY AREA HEADLINER 25-15-01

Removal 401
Installation 401
ENTRY AREA CURTAINS 25-15-05

Removal 401
Installation 401
JUMPSEAT 25-18-01
Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Jumpseat Inertia Reels 501
Operational Test of the Jumpseat Tracking and
Locking Mechanisms 502
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Jumpseat Restraints 601
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL OUTLETS 25-20-10

Adjustment/Test
General 501

SEATING 25-21-00
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Passenger Seat Inertia Reels 501
Operational Test of the Passenger Seat Tracking and
Locking Mechanisms 502
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Passenger Seat Restraints 601
PASSENGER SINGLE SEATS 25-21-10

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 301
Removal 401
Installation 401
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS 25-21-20

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 301
Removal 401
Installation 401

DIVANS 25-21-30
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 301
Removal 401
Installation 401
Inspection/Check
Introduction 601
Job Set-up 601
Procedure 601
Job Completion 602
FORWARD CABIN BULKHEADS 25-23-37

Removal 401
Installation 402
MID CABIN BULKHEADS 25-23-55

Removal 401
Installation 402
AFT CABIN BULKHEADS 25-23-73

Removal 401
Installation 402
WARDROBES 25-24-10
Removal 401
Installation 401

STORAGE CABINETS 25-24-20

Removal 401
Installation 401
DIVAN END CABINETS 25-24-30

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
CABIN SIDE PANELS 25-26-10

Removal 401
Installation 401
CABIN PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT 25-26-20

Removal 401
Installation 401
CABIN HEADLINER 25-26-30

Removal 401
Installation 401
SIDELEDGE/DADO PANELS 25-27-10

Removal 401
Installation 402
PULLOUT TABLES 25-27-30

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401

ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT TABLES 25-27-35

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
FLOOR COVERING 25-29-00

Removal 401
Installation 401
GALLEY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS 25-30-10

Adjustment/Test
General 501
GALLEY 25-35-01
Removal 401
Installation 402
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Galley Waste Container 601
GALLEY EQUIPMENT 25-35-05

Removal 401
Installation 401
LAVATORY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS 25-40-10

Adjustment/Test
General 501

AFT LAVATORY 25-49-00

Removal 401
Installation 403
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Lavatory Waste Container 601
AFT LAVATORY HEADLINER 25-49-03

Removal 401
Installation 401
AFT LAVATORY SIDE PANELS 25-49-05

Removal 401
Installation 402
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT 25-55-00

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT HEADLINER 25-55-03

Removal 401
Installation 402
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 25-60-00

Servicing
Restore the Life Vest 301
Restore the Smoke Hood 302
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Life Vest 601
General Visual Inspection of the Smoke Hood 602
General Visual Inspection of the First Aid/Medical Kit
(Do Not Open if Sealed) 603
General Visual Inspection of the Emergency Exit Life Line 604

LIFE RAFTS 25-61-01

Maintenance Practices
Introduction 201
Job Set-up 201
Procedure 201
Job Completion 201
Servicing
Restore the Life Raft 301
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Life Raft 601
406MHz ELT 25-62-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 502
Inspection/Check
Introduction 601
Job Set-up 601
Procedure 601
Job Completion 602
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT 25-63-04

Operation 1
Servicing
Restore the PBE 301
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the PBE 601
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT 25-75-00


THERMAL/ACOUSTIC INSULATION 25-80-10

Removal/Installation 201
Inspection/Check 201
Repairs 201

COCKPIT MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS
COCKPIT MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The following miscellaneous equipment has been installed in the cockpit.
A. Headliner
A preformed, three-piece headliner is installed in the cockpit. The headliner is secured to existing
attach points, some of which are shared with the sunvisor track.
B. Sunvisors
A sunvisor is mounted above each windshield. The sunvisors utilize a track for optimal positioning.
The sunvisor track attach points are also used to secure the cockpit headliner.
C. Carpet
Carpet is installed in the cockpit for aesthetic purposes and noise reduction. The carpet
incorporates a fire-retardant, anti-static backing and is installed over an underlayment. The carpet
is pre-shrunk and is surged where required to prevent unraveling. Kickplates are installed under
the rudder pedals for wear protection. The carpet is secured with hook-and-loop strips for easy
removal.
D. Jeppesen Underfloor Storage Assembly
A Jeppesen underfloor storage assembly secured with cam-lock fasteners has been installed for
additional storage. It is accessible while in flight as well as on the ground. The storage assembly is
located at floor level, forward of FS280. The Jeppesen storage assembly is easily removed to
provide access to the main avionics compartment.
E. Crew Seats
The production-installed crew seats have been reupholstered, and all exposed metal surfaces
have been painted.
F. Cockpit Curtain
A curtain has been installed to block cabin light from the cockpit during night operations. It is
suspended from a flush-mounted track in the entry headliner and stowed in an alcove in the
forward left-hand wardrobe. The fasteners for the track are visible from below the track and allow
easy removal of the curtain and track.
G. Miscellaneous Components
Various miscellaneous components have been installed in the cockpit. Some of these optional
components include:
• Certificate holders
• Headset clips
• Storage pockets
• Circuit breaker panel legend strips
• Various emergency equipment (25-60-00)
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
COCKPIT MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the cockpit headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Remove sunvisor track (1.C.).
(2) Remove fasteners securing headliner to remaining attaching mounts.
(3) Tip headliner down to clear overhead console.
(4) Continue to pull headliner together at aft ends.
(5) Disconnect drain tubes from fittings at FS274.
(6) Fold headliner in half without creasing.
(7) Pull aft and out.
B. To remove a sunvisor (Figure 402):
(1) Rotate knob to loosen sunvisor clamp.
(2) Remove sunvisor from rail assembly.
C. To remove the sunvisor track (Figure 402):
(1) Remove sunvisors.
(2) Remove fasteners securing track.
(3) Remove track.
D. To remove the cockpit curtain:
(1) Remove fasteners securing overhead track.
(2) Remove track.
(3) Slide curtain from end of track.
(4) Remove curtain.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the cockpit headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Connect drain tubes to fittings at FS274.
(2) Align mounting holes in headliner with mounting brackets.
Nov 10/2006
(3) Secure fasteners through headliner into mounting brackets.
(4) Install sunvisor track (2.C.).
B. To install a sunvisor (Figure 402):
(1) Position sunvisor.
(2) Rotate knob to tighten sunvisor clamp into place.
C. To install the sunvisor track (Figure 402):
(1) Position track.
(2) Install fasteners securing track.
(3) Install sunvisors.
D. To install the cockpit curtain:
(1) Slide curtain into track.
(2) Position track and secure with fasteners.
HEADLINER ATTACH POINTS
SUNVISOR TRACK AND SUNVISOR TRACK

HEADLINER ATTACH POINTS AND HEADLINER
ATTACH POINTS
SPEAKERS
JUMPSEAT
DRAIN TUBE OXYGEN MASK DRAIN TUBE
COCKPIT HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
HEADLINER
KNOB
CLAMP
SCREW
RAIL ASSEMBLY
SUNVISOR
SUNVISORS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA HEADLINER
ENTRY AREA HEADLINER - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A one-piece headliner is installed in the entry area. The right side of the headliner is fastened to brackets
which slide over the galley. The aft edge of the headliner is secured to the cabin headliner with a hinge
pin. The left and forward sides of the headliner are secured with fasteners shared with the acoustic and
cockpit curtain tracks.
The entry headliner includes:

• Two dome lights
• An emergency exit sign
• A cabin paging/public address speaker
• A reading light and an air gasper for the jumpseat
• A cockpit curtain track
• An acoustic curtain track
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the entry area headliner (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Open and lock out applicable lighting circuit breakers (33-10-00, 33-45-00, and 33-51-00).
(2) Remove forward left-hand wardrobe switch panels (23-90-00).
(3) Remove FS350/FS354.75 closeout cap.
(4) Remove hinge pin securing entry headliner to main cabin headliner.
(5) Remove curtain tracks (25-11-00 and 25-15-05).
(6) Remove fasteners securing headliner to isolators (located above acoustic curtain track).
(7) Rotate headliner left side down, while sliding left.
(8) Disconnect electrical and air connections.
(9) Remove headliner.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the entry area headliner (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Position headliner and restore electrical and air connections.
(2) Slide right-hand brackets onto galley header.
(3) Install fasteners securing headliner to isolators / brackets.
(4) Install curtain tracks and curtains (25-11-00 and 25-15-05).
(5) Install hinge pin securing entry headliner to main cabin headliner.
(6) Install FS350/FS354.75 closeout cap.
(7) Install forward left-hand wardrobe switch panels (23-90-00).
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY
B
HEADLINER
HINGE
PIN
HEADLINER
ISOLATOR
(TYPICAL)
BRACKET
PANEL
CURTAIN TRACK
HEADLINER
GALLEY
A
B

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
FORWARD
WARDROBE
CLOSEOUT
ISOLATOR
(TYPICAL)
HEADLINER
HINGE
PIN
HEADER
CURTAIN TRACK

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA CURTAINS
ENTRY AREA CURTAINS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Acoustic Curtain
An acoustic curtain for noise reduction and temperature insulation has been provided to close off
the main entry/airstair during flight. The curtain is suspended from a flush-mounted track recessed
in the entry headliner and stowed on the forward side of the main entry in an alcove in the
wardrobe.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY AREA CURTAINS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a curtain (Figure 401):
(1) Remove fasteners securing overhead track.
(2) Remove track.
(3) Slide curtain from end of track.
(4) Remove curtain.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a curtain (Figure 401):
(1) Slide curtain into track.
(2) Position track and secure with fasteners.
HEADLINER
FASTENERS
CURTAIN
CURTAIN
TRACK
ENTRY AREA CURTAIN - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (TYPICAL)

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT
JUMPSEAT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A forward-facing, stowable jumpseat is approved for occupancy during takeoff and landing, and can be
used as a cockpit observer’s seat. A restraint system for the jumpseat includes a shoulder harness with
inertia reel. The jumpseat is stowed in a galley drawer and can be removed for maintenance purposes.
The seat cushions are fireblocked, and the seat back and seat cushion are secured with hook-and-loop
strips. The jumpseat has track-and-swivel capability. An observer audio control panel has been installed
on the jumpseat frame, outboard of the jumpseat.
2. OPERATION
A. To deploy the jumpseat:
(1) Pull cantilever handle until lock releases, then pull jumpseat inboard until it locks in place.
(2) Pull up on back until it locks in place.
(3) To recline, pull handle located on left front of seat pan and lean or pull back on seat back.
Release lever to lock in place.
(4) To track forward or aft, pull handle located on right front of seat pan and track seat forward or
aft. Release handle to lock in place.
(5) To swivel, fold seat back down, then swivel seat to face forward or aft. Lift seat back to lock
in place.
NOTE: Seat will only swivel when back is folded.
B. To stow the jumpseat:
(1) Set jumpseat to face forward, and tracking set to full aft position.
(2) Set seat back full upright position.
(3) Lift latch on seat back and fold seat back to stowed position.
(4) Pull cantilever handle to release lock, and then push seat toward galley until it locks in place.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the jumpseat (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out observer audio circuit breaker, CBP2 H-8.
(2) Pull handle to release jumpseat mechanism.
(3) Slide seat assembly toward center of aircraft until mount is fully extended.
(4) Disconnect electrical connections to observer audio control panel.
(5) Provide temporary support for jumpseat assembly.
CAUTION: MAKE CAREFUL NOTE OF THE LOCATIONS OF THE DIFFERENT LENGTH

BOLTS AND SHIMS AS THEY ARE REMOVED.
(6) Remove ten bolts (five each side, Figure 401) that secure mounting mechanism to galley.
(7) Lift jumpseat assembly off temporary support and remove from aircraft.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the jumpseat (Figure 401):
(1) Place jumpseat on temporary support in aisle.
(2) Extend jumpseat slide mechanism unit into galley.
(3) Install mounting bolts and shims in their respective places.
(4) Remove temporary support and inspect jumpseat for proper operation.
(5) Restore electrical connections to observer audio control panel.
(6) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of the observer
audio control panel.
(7) Perform check of jumpseat per INSPECTION/CHECK.
(8) Slide jumpseat into galley and turn handle to lock jumpseat in stowed position.
Nov 10/2006
MOUNTING BOLTS
(TYPICAL)
JUMPSEAT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE JUMPSEAT INERTIA REELS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-18-60-602
B. Test Set-up
(1) Deploy the jumpseat according to placarded instructions.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform an operational test of the jumpseat inertia reels as follows:
(a) Pull lightly on the shoulder straps.
(b) Confirm that the shoulder straps extend easily.
(c) Release the shoulder straps.
(d) Confirm that the shoulder straps retract automatically.
(e) Pull quickly on the shoulder straps.
(f) Confirm that the shoulder straps do not extend.
D. Test Completion
(1) Stow the jumpseat according to placarded instructions.
Nov 10/2006
2. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE JUMPSEAT TRACKING AND LOCKING MECHANISMS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-18-60-603
B. Procedure
(1) Perform an operational test of the jumpseat as follows:
(a) Deploy the seat assembly and confirm the following:
• Seat moves freely along its tracks

• Seat locks in position
• Seat unfolds and locks properly in the deployed position (takeoff and
landing)
(b) Operate the seat tracking and recline features (if applicable) to confirm the correct
operation of the following features (and that the seat assembly does not rub on the
adjacent furnishings):
• Seat height, adjustment, and locking

• Seat tracking (fore and aft) and locking
• Seat back recline
• Armrest adjustment
(c) Stow the seat assembly and confirm the following:
• Seat moves freely on its tracks to stow

• The latch locks the seat in the stowed position
C. Test Completion
Nov 10/2006
JUMPSEAT - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE JUMPSEAT RESTRAINTS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-18-60-601
B. Job Set-up
(1) Deploy the jumpseat according to placarded instructions.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of the jumpseat safety restraints as follows:
(a) Examine the full length of each restraint strap for deterioration, safety of installation,
and damage.
(b) Confirm there is no wear on the outer edges of the restraint straps.
(c) No defects are permitted.
D. Job Completion
(1) Stow the jumpseat according to placarded instructions.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Outlets for 115VAC/60Hz are located in the cabin as follows:
• One single outlet in dado panel at left-hand seat 2
• One single outlet in dado panel at left-hand seat 4
• One single outlet in dado panel at right-hand seat 2
• One single outlet in toe-kick of divan aft end cabinet
• One single outlet inside divan aft end cabinet for printer/fax machine (supplied as loose
equipment)
In order for the outlets to operate, the cabin bus disconnect switch (24-70-00) must be active and the
60Hz converter (24-25-00) must be energized, and the cabin bus (24-70-00) must be engaged. Circuit
breaker CBPG-28, UTILITY OUTLETS, provides protection for the outlets. The galley GFI outlet
provides ground fault protection for all the aircraft utility outlets.
WARNING A GROUND FAULT MAY REPRESENT A HAZARDOUS CONDITION. ENSURE THAT

THE CONDITION IS NOT HAZARDOUS BEFORE RESETTING THE GFI DEVICE.
NOTE: Ground Fault Interrupters (GFI) may also be called Residual Current Disrupters (RCD), Ground
Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI), Ground Fault Disrupters (GFD), Earth Leakage Circuit
Breakers (ELCB), or Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB).
A ground fault will open the circuit and trip the RESET button on the GFI outlet housing. To reset the fault
detection circuitry after a ground fault, press the RESET button.
The TEST button will, when pressed, apply a ground fault to the circuit, which should activate the
protection feature. The RESET button should trip, and each outlet will de-energize. To reactivate the
outlets, press the RESET button.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. GENERAL
A. Refer to 24-25-00, 60HZ POWER SYSTEM, ADJUSTMENT/TEST, for test procedures.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
SEATING
SEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE PASSENGER SEAT INERTIA REELS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-21-60-602
(2) Reference
SMM sections:
• 25-21-10
• 25-21-20
• 25-21-30
B. Procedure
(1) Perform an operational test of each passenger seat inertia reels as follows:
(a) Pull lightly on the shoulder straps.
(b) Confirm that the shoulder straps extend easily.
(c) Release the shoulder straps.
(d) Confirm that the shoulder straps retract automatically.
(e) Pull quickly on the shoulder straps.
(f) Confirm that the shoulder straps do not extend.
C. Test Completion
Nov 10/2006
2. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE PASSENGER SEAT TRACKING AND LOCKING MECHANISMS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-21-60-603
(2) Reference
SMM sections:
• 25-21-10
• 25-21-20
B. Procedure
(1) Test the fixed base passenger seats as follows:
(a) Configure the seat in the takeoff and landing position. Confirm full seat travel and that
the seat locks in position. Make sure the swivel locks facing forward or aft (as
applicable).
C. Test Completion
Nov 10/2006
SEATING - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE PASSENGER SEAT RESTRAINTS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-21-60-601
(2) Reference
SMM sections:
• 25-21-10
• 25-21-20
• 25-21-30
B. Job Set-up
(1) Remove the seat cushions (secured with hook-and-loop fasteners), as required.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform the general visual inspection of the restraints as follows:
(a) Examine the full length of each restraint strap for deterioration, security of installation,
and damage.
(b) Confirm that there is no wear on the outer edges of the restraint straps.
D. Job Completion
(1) Replace the seat cushions, as required.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER SINGLE SEATS
PASSENGER SINGLE SEATS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
Four passenger single seats are installed in the aircraft. Each seat is fastened to seat tracks using four
stud-and-nut assemblies. All single seats are equipped with lap belts. They can track 9" forward and aft,
and 5" laterally on their bases; swivel 360°, and recline 90° (the recline and tracking functions are limited
on right-hand Seat 2 to prevent blocking the emergency exit). Seat cushions are installed with
hook-and-loop strips and can be removed to provide access to the seat-belt attachment points.
Each seat has a flexwing headrest. A life vest stowed in each seat base is accessed by pulling a strap
located on the seat base shroud, which is attached with hook-and-loop strips.
2. LOCATION
See Cabin Passenger Seating for seat locations.
3. OPERATION
The seats are equipped with levers on the armrests that control seat movement. The lever on the face of
the outboard armrest controls reclining. The lever on the face of the inboard armrest controls forward
and aft tracking, and swiveling.
FLEXWING
HEADREST
RECLINE LEVER
(OUTBOARD ARMREST)
TRACK AND SWIVEL LEVER
(INBOARD ARMREST)
LIFE VEST
STORAGE
PASSENGER SINGLE SEAT
Nov 10/2006
1 2 3 4 5
FWD
1 2 3 4
LH SEAT 2 (VIP SEAT)
CABIN PASSENGER SEATING
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER SINGLE SEATS - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for replacing the passenger seat belts.
(1) Equipment
• Standard tool kit
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Position seat back in its full recline position.
B. Remove seat cushion to access belt attachment points.
3. PROCEDURE
A. At each belt attachment point, remove cotter pin from seat-belt hook assembly.
B. Disengage hook from attachment.
C. Clip new seat-belt hook assembly to attachment point.
NOTE: Seat-belt hook installs on reclining passenger seat with clip facing down.
D. Secure hook assembly with cotter pin and check seat belt for proper operation.
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Install seat cushion and return seat to upright position.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER SINGLE SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL AND/OR INSTALLATION OF PASSENGER SEATING, ENSURE
THAT ALL CABIN EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS ARE PROPERLY PROTECTED. USE
CARE NOT TO DAMAGE OR SOIL UPHOLSTERY COVERINGS.
NOTE: Removal or installation procedures for forward- and aft-facing seats are identical. For a detailed
description, refer to the seat manufacturer’s documentation.
A. To remove a passenger seat (Figure 401):
(1) Remove power from emergency escape path lighting system, if applicable.
(2) Ensure that seat back is in full upright position and seat is centered on pedestal.
(3) Remove hook-and-loop-attached closeout on seat base.
(4) Remove emergency equipment from seat base.
(5) Disconnect any electrical connections.
(6) Remove locknuts.
(7) Mark locations of studs.
(8) Lift seat out and remove.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a passenger seat (Figure 401):
(2) Ensure that studs are in correct position by aligning with marks.
(3) Return seat to location.
(4) Secure attaching fasteners.
(5) Restore any electrical connections.
(6) Return emergency equipment removed during maintenance procedures to seat assembly.
(7) Install hook-and-loop-attached closeout on seat base.
(8) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of the emergency
escape path lighting system.
(9) Refer to component maintenance manual for details on inspection, adjustment, and testing.
(10) When maintenance procedures have been completed, return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
A A
DOUBLE LUG
SEAT
NUT
SHEAR
WASHER
RETAINER
SPACER
SEAT TRACK
PASSENGER SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
Two double passenger seats have been installed in the aircraft. The seats are equipped with lap belts.
They can track 9" forward and aft, and 2.5” to 4.5" laterally on their bases, and recline 90°. Each double
seat is fastened to seat tracks using four stud-and-nut assemblies. Seat cushions are installed with
hook-and-loop strips and can be removed to provide access to the seat belt attachment points.
Aft-facing double seats have retractable breadboard headrests. A life vest stowed in each seat base is
accessed by pulling a strap located on the seat base shroud, which is attached with hook-and-loop
strips.
2. LOCATION
See Cabin Passenger Seating for seat locations.
3. OPERATION
The double seats are equipped with levers and buttons on the armrests that control seat movement. The
lever on the forward face of the armrest controls tracking. The button on the inside face of the armrest
controls the reclining. A switch panel is located under the flip-up lid of the inboard seat inboard arm rest.
RETRACTABLE BREADBOARD
HEADRESTS (AFT-FACING SEATS)
RECLINE CONTROL RECLINE CONTROL
TRACKING TRACKING
CONTROL CONTROL
LIFE VEST STORAGE
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEAT
Nov 10/2006
1 2 3 4 5
FWD
1 2 3 4
DOUBLE SEATS
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for replacing the passenger seat belts.
(1) Equipment
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Push and hold seat-recline button and push against seat-back to recline. Release button to lock
seat-back in position.
B. Remove seat cushion to access belt attachment points.
3. PROCEDURE
A. At each belt attachment point, remove cotter pin from seat-belt hook assembly.
B. Disengage hook from attachment.
C. Clip new seat-belt hook assembly to attachment point.
NOTE: Seat-belt hook installs on reclining passenger seat with clip facing down.
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Install seat cushion and return seat to upright position.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL AND/OR INSTALLATION OF PASSENGER SEATING, ENSURE
THAT ALL CABIN EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS ARE PROPERLY PROTECTED.
USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE OR SOIL UPHOLSTERY COVERINGS.
NOTE: Removal or installation procedures for forward and aft-facing seats are identical. For a detailed
description, refer to the chair manufacturer’s documentation.
A. To remove a passenger double seat (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable cabin management system circuit breakers (23-90-00).
(2) Remove power from emergency escape path lighting system.
(4) Remove hook-and-loop-attached closeouts on seat base.
(5) Remove emergency equipment from seat base.
(6) Disconnect electrical wiring.
(7) Remove locknuts and washers.
(8) Mark locations of studs.
(9) Lift seat out and remove.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a passenger double seat (Figure 401):
(2) Ensure that studs are in correct position by aligning with marks.
(3) Return seat to location.
(4) Install locknuts and washers.
(5) Restore electrical wiring.
(6) Return emergency equipment removed during maintenance procedures to seat assembly.
(7) Install hook-and-loop-attached closeouts on seat base.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of installed
components, including:.
• Cabin Management System, 23-90-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Emergency escape path lighting system
(9) Refer to component maintenance manual for details on inspection, adjustment, and testing.
(10) When maintenance procedures have been completed, return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
A A
STUD
SEAT LOCKNUT
STUD WASHER
RETAINER
SPACER (IF INSTALLED)
SEAT TRACK
PASSENGER DOUBLE SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
DIVANS
DIVANS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A three-seat full-berthing divan, belted for three, is located in the main cabin (see Cabin Passenger
Seating). The divan is attached to the divan aft end cabinet with fasteners accessed from inside the
divan, and to the production seat tracks with double lug studs. The divan also incorporates:
• Storage provisions for emergency equipment (25-60-00)
• Seat belts and shoulder harnesses for three occupants, and one sleeper belt
• Plug-in armrests
• Hinged panel doors for emergency equipment storage
• Fireblocked seat cushions
DIVAN
1 2 3 4 5
FWD
1 2 3 4
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
DIVANS - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for replacing the divan seat belts.
NOTE: Includes replacement of entire seat-belt assembly
(1) Equipment
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Removals as needed to access component
(1) Remove plug-in armrests.
(2) Pull to release hook-and-loop fasteners on divan seat cushions.
3. PROCEDURE
A. At each seat shackle, remove cotter pin from seat-belt hook assembly.
B. Disengage hook from shackle.
C. Clip new seat-belt hook assembly to seat shackle.
NOTE: Seat-belt hook installs with clip facing up.
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Press to install seat cushions with hook-and-loop fasteners.
B. Install plug-in armrests.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
DIVANS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: PRIOR TO REMOVAL AND/OR INSTALLATION OF DIVAN, ENSURE THAT ALL CABIN
EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS ARE PROPERLY PROTECTED.
A. To remove the divan (Figure 401):
(2) Remove plug-in armrests.
(3) Remove cushions (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(4) Remove life vests, life rafts, and any other contents from divan storage area.
(5) Remove divan bottom closeouts.
(6) Disconnect electrical connections.
(7) Remove fasteners securing divan to aft end cabinet (25-24-30).
(8) At each divan seat stud, remove attaching hardware.
(9) Mark location of studs.
(10) Lift divan and remove from aircraft.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the divan (Figure 401):
NOTE: Divan aft end cabinet must be installed prior to installing divan (25-24-30).
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT DOUBLE LUG SEAT TRACK STUDS ARE INSTALLED AT ALL
LOCATIONS.
(1) Place divan frame onto seat studs.
(2) Verify that studs are aligned with marks.
(3) Secure attaching fasteners.
(4) Install fasteners securing divan to aft end cabinet (25-24-30).
(5) Restore electrical connections.
(6) Install closeouts in bottom of divan.
(7) Install life vests and other contents into divan storage area.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Install seat cushions.
(9) Install plug-in armrests.
(10) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of emergency
escape path lighting.
Nov 10/2006
A DOUBLE LUG SEAT

STUDS (TYPICAL)
DIVAN FRAME
LOCK
DIVAN
NUT LOCK
FRAME
NUT
WASHER WASHER
DIVAN
FRAME
FOOT
FOOT SPACER
SPACER
DOUBLE LUG SEAT DOUBLE LUG SEAT
TRACK FITTING TRACK FITTINGS
SEAT
TRACK
SEAT
TRACK
A B
DIVANS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
DIVANS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for examining the divan structure and seat belts.
(1) Equipment
• Flashlight
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Perform removals as needed to access components for inspection.
(1) Open cabinets under divan.
(2) Remove life rafts and other contents.
(3) Remove any items that would impede visual inspection of divan structure.
(4) Remove divan cushions as needed to inspect seat-belt attachment points.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Perform a general visual inspection of the divan structure.
(1) If surfaces of components are painted, look at paint for signs of damage.
(2) Examine condition of all related fasteners for signs of corrosion or failure.
(3) Make sure condition and tightness of all components in structure are satisfactory.
B. Perform a general visual inspection of the divan seat belts.
(1) If surfaces of components are plated, look at plating for signs of damage.
(2) Examine condition of all related fasteners for signs of corrosion or failure.
(3) Verify all seat belt components operate with no evidence of wear, stiffness, or other signs of
damage or deterioration.
(4) Make sure belt webbing material is not cut or frayed.
(5) Check for presence of appropriate Technical Standard Order (TSO) label.
Nov 10/2006
C. Perform an operational test of the divan seat belts.
(1) Verify that seat-belt latches connect and release properly.
(2) Verify that belt adjustment holds its position and releases properly.
D. Perform a general visual inspection of the storage doors under the divan.
(1) Verify that each door is in correct alignment when closed.
(2) Open each door and verify that hinge and latch are securely fastened.
(3) Close each door and verify that it latches completely.
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
FORWARD CABIN BULKHEADS
FORWARD CABIN BULKHEADS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Bulkhead FS350
Bulkhead FS350 is located directly aft of the entry door and galley. The left-hand bulkhead is a two-piece
assembly composed of a forward and aft partition, and houses a video monitor for entertainment and
information services. The right-hand bulkhead is a two-piece assembly composed of a forward and aft
partition, and houses a pocket door. The pocket door assembly is constructed with a drop-down footer.
The bottom of the left-hand bulkhead forward partition is secured at the floor to a channel bracket with
fasteners which are accessed from the aft side of the bulkhead. The bottom of the aft partition is secured
at the floor to a channel bracket with fasteners which are accessed from the aft side of the bulkhead, and
with clips at the remaining areas. The top of the left-hand bulkhead aft partition is secured with a
spring-loaded pin assembly that is accessed by removing the door jamb.
The right-hand bulkhead aft partition is easily removable to allow access to the pocket door mechanism.
The aft partition is secured to an angle bracket at floor level and with clips at the remaining areas. The
forward partition is secured to the galley with fasteners accessible from inside the galley.
To gain access to the door lock spring for inspection, remove right-hand bulkhead aft partition
(REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FORWARD CABIN BULKHEADS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the pocket door lock spring:
(1) Remove right-hand bulkhead aft partition (1.B.).
(2) Slide door to closed position.
(3) Remove door lock spring.
B. To remove the right-hand bulkhead aft partition (Figure 401):
(1) Remove passenger seat as necessary to prevent damage (25-21-10).
(2) Remove dado panel aft of partition (25-27-10).
(3) If installed, remove fasteners securing aft partition to sideledge angle bracket.
(4) Remove fasteners securing aft partition to floor-level angle bracket.
(5) Slide aft partition inboard enough for clip brackets to release (approximately 3-4 inches).
(6) Remove aft partition.
C. To remove the right-hand bulkhead forward partition (Figure 402):
(1) Remove right-hand bulkhead aft partition (1.B.).
(2) Remove fasteners securing sliding door to slide assembly, as necessary.
(3) Remove sliding door, as necessary.
(4) Remove drawers and contents from aft portion of galley.
(5) Remove fasteners securing forward partition to galley.
(6) Remove forward partition.
D. To remove the left-hand bulkhead aft partition (Figure 401):
(1) Remove passenger seat as necessary to prevent damage (25-21-10).
(2) Remove fire extinguisher.
(3) Remove dado panel aft of partition (25-27-10).
(4) Remove door jamb.
(5) If installed, remove fasteners securing aft partition to sideledge angle bracket.
Nov 10/2006
(6) Remove fasteners securing aft partition to floor channel bracket.
(7) Depress spring-loaded pin assembly and slide partition inboard.
(8) Move aft partition inboard to release from clip brackets.
(9) Disconnect any remaining electrical or air connections.
(10) Remove aft partition.
E. To remove the left-hand bulkhead forward partition (Figure 402):
(1) Remove left-hand bulkhead aft partition (1.D.).
(2) Remove the FS350/FS354 closeout cap (secured with fasteners at floor level and with
hook-and-loop strips).
(3) Unsnap entry door frame closeout between bulkhead and entry door opening.
(4) Remove fasteners securing forward partition to floor channel bracket.
(5) Push up entry headliner to clear top of forward partition.
(6) Remove forward partition.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the pocket door lock spring:
(1) Slide door to closed position.
(2) Install door lock spring.
(3) Install right-hand bulkhead aft partition.
B. To install the right-hand bulkhead aft partition (Figure 401):
NOTE: Forward partition must be installed first.
(1) Slide aft partition into place until it is secured to clip brackets.
(2) Install fasteners securing aft partition to floor-level angle bracket.
(3) Install fasteners securing aft partition to sideledge angle bracket, if applicable.
(5) Install passenger seat (25-21-10), if removed.
Nov 10/2006
C. To install the right-hand bulkhead forward partition (Figure 402):
(1) Position forward partition and secure with fasteners to galley.
(2) Install sliding door and check for proper operation, if removed.
(3) Install drawers and contents into galley.
(4) Install aft partition (2.B.).
D. To install the left-hand bulkhead aft partition (Figure 401):
NOTE: Forward partition must be installed first.
(1) Position aft partition and restore electrical and air connections.
(2) While depressing spring-loaded pin assembly, shift bulkhead into place.
(3) Release spring-loaded pin into intercostal.
(4) Install fasteners securing partition to floor channel bracket.
(5) Install fasteners securing partition to sideledge angle bracket, if applicable.
(6) Install door jamb.
(8) Install fire extinguisher.
(9) Install passenger seat (25-21-10), if removed.
E. To install the left-hand bulkhead forward partition (Figure 402):
(1) Install fasteners securing partition to floor channel bracket.
(2) Install entry door frame closeout.
(3) Install aft partition (2.D.).
Nov 10/2006
RH BULKHEAD
FORWARD
PARTITION
LH BULKHEAD
FORWARD RH BULKHEAD
PARTITION AFT PARTITION
SPRING-LOADED PIN
ASSEMBLY
LH BULKHEAD
AFT PARTITION
CLIP BRACKETS
(TYPICAL)
RH AFT PARTITION
ATTACH POINTS
LH AFT PARTITION
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
LH FORWARD PARTITION
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
BULKHEAD FS350 - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
LH BULKHEAD
AFT PARTITION SPRING-LOADED
PIN ASSEMBLY
RH BULKHEAD
FORWARD LH BULKHEAD
PARTITION FORWARD
PARTITION
RH BULKHEAD
AFT PARTITION
DOOR JAMB
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
GALLEY ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL)

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
MID CABIN BULKHEADS
MID CABIN BULKHEADS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Bulkhead FS560
Bulkhead FS560 is located directly forward of the lavatory. The right-hand bulkhead houses a
video monitor for entertainment and information services. A door header has been installed
between the left-hand and right-hand bulkheads. The door header is secured to the left-hand and
right-hand bulkheads with slide pins.
The bottom of the left-hand bulkhead is secured to angle brackets. The angle brackets are
secured to the aircraft floor and seat tracks with fasteners that are accessed from the forward side
of the bulkhead. The top of the left-hand bulkhead is secured by pin-bracket assemblies with
fasteners that are accessed from the aft side of the bulkhead. The remaining section of the
left-hand bulkhead is secured to the lavatory vanity and curio cabinets with fasteners that are
accessed from inside the cabinets, and to the aft left-hand storage cabinet with fasteners that are
accessed from inside the cabinet.
The bottom of the right-hand bulkhead is secured to angle brackets. The angle brackets are
secured to the aircraft floor and seat tracks with fasteners that are accessed from the forward side
of the bulkhead. The top of the right-hand bulkhead is secured by pin-bracket assemblies with
fasteners that are accessed from the aft side of the bulkhead. The remaining section of the
right-hand bulkhead is secured to the lavatory toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly with
fasteners that are accessed from inside the toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly, and to the
divan aft end cabinet with fasteners that are accessed from inside the cabinet.
B. Bulkhead FS560 Hinged Door
Bulkhead FS560 has a door, hinged on the left-hand bulkhead. Pivot hinges and the 180° door
latch allow the door to swing aft into the lavatory or forward into the passenger cabin. The door
handle and door lock are designed to relieve pressure loads in the event of sudden cabin
decompression. A position latch is installed in the lavatory to hold the door open.
The decompression design feature includes a breakaway door jamb secured with plastic
fasteners, breakaway striker plates at the latches, and a double-acting hinge.
WARNING: DO NOT REPLACE ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS OR FASTENERS UNLESS

IDENTICAL PARTS ARE USED.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
MID CABIN BULKHEADS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the left-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Remove contents from vanity cabinet as necessary to access fasteners securing bulkhead
to vanity cabinet.
(2) Remove door (1.C.).
(3) Remove door header:
(a) Remove inboard fasteners on slide pins.
(b) Loosen outboard fasteners and move slide pins inboard.
(c) Remove door header.
(4) Remove aft left-hand storage cabinet (25-24-20).
(5) Remove mirror cabinet (25-49-00).
(6) If installed, remove fasteners securing bulkhead to sideledge angle bracket.
(7) Remove fasteners securing bulkhead to vanity cabinet and curio cabinet assembly
(25-49-00).
(8) Remove fasteners securing pin-bracket assemblies to bulkhead.
(9) Remove fasteners securing floor angle brackets to floor and seat tracks.
(10) Slide bulkhead inboard and disconnect any electrical or air connections.
(11) Remove bulkhead from aircraft.
B. To remove the right-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Remove contents from toilet shroud storage cabinet.
(2) Remove toilet shroud cover assembly (25-49-00).
(5) Remove monitor (23-33-00), if necessary.
Nov 10/2006
(6) Remove divan aft end cabinet (25-24-30).
(7) If installed, remove fasteners securing bulkhead to sideledge angle bracket.
(8) Remove fasteners securing bulkhead to toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly.
(9) Remove fasteners securing pin-bracket assemblies to bulkhead.
(10) Remove fasteners securing floor angle brackets to floor and seat tracks.
(11) Slide bulkhead inboard and remove from aircraft.
C. To remove the mid cabin bulkhead door:
NOTE: For proper fit and operation of the door, mark the bushings, hinge block assemblies, and
veneer filler pieces with their location as they are removed.
(1) Open the door fully, but do not engage the door stop.
(2) Loosen the screws on each hinge block assembly.
(3) Remove the fasteners and the veneer filler pieces (starting with the bottom, then the middle,
and then the top).
(4) Slide the door forward to disengage the bushings and hinge blocks.
(5) Remove the door.
(6) Remove the bushings and hinge blocks from the hinge pins.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the left-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Slide bulkhead into position and connect electrical and air connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing floor angle brackets to floor and seat tracks.
(3) Install fasteners securing pin-bracket assemblies to bulkhead.
(4) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to vanity cabinet and curio cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(5) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to sideledge angle bracket, if applicable.
(6) Install mirror cabinet (25-49-00).
(7) Install aft left-hand storage cabinet (25-24-20).
(8) Put door header in position and secure with slide pins.
(9) Install door (2.C.).
(10) Install contents and drawer into vanity cabinet.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install the right-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Slide bulkhead into position.
(2) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to sideledge angle bracket, if applicable.
(3) Install fasteners securing pin-bracket assemblies to bulkhead.
(4) Install fasteners securing floor angle brackets to floor and seat tracks.
(5) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(6) Install divan aft end cabinet (25-24-30).
(7) Install monitor (23-33-00), if removed.
C. To install the mid cabin bulkhead door:
NOTE: For proper fit and operation of the door, install the bushings, hinge block assemblies, and
veneer filler pieces as marked during removal.
(1) Install the bushings and hinge blocks to the hinge pins.
(2) Put the door in position and slide door to engage the bushings and hinge blocks.
(3) Install the fasteners and the veneer filler pieces (starting with the top, then the middle, and
then the bottom).
(4) Check the door for proper operation and fit.
Nov 10/2006
PIN-BRACKET
ASSEMBLIES DOOR HINGES
RH BULKHEAD
HEADER
PIN-BRACKET
ASSEMBLIES
LH BULKHEAD
DIVAN AFT END

CABINET ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL)
FLOOR ANGLE
BRACKETS
(TYPICAL)
AFT LH STORAGE
FLOOR ANGLE CABINET ATTACH
BRACKETS POINTS (TYPICAL)
(TYPICAL)

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
PIN-BRACKET
DOOR HINGES ASSEMBLIES
HEADER
RH BULKHEAD
PIN-BRACKET
ASSEMBLIES
LH BULKHEAD
TOILET SHROUD AND

STORAGE CABINET
ATTACH POINTS (TYPICAL)
VANITY AND CURIO

CABINET ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL)

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT CABIN BULKHEADS
AFT CABIN BULKHEADS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Bulkhead FS587
Bulkhead FS587 is located forward of the baggage area. A door header has been installed
between the left-hand and right-hand bulkheads. The door header is secured to the left-hand and
right-hand bulkheads with slide pins.
The left-hand bulkhead is secured to the vanity and curio cabinets with fasteners that are
accessed from inside the cabinets. The top of the left-hand bulkhead is secured by a channel. The
bottom of the left-hand bulkhead is secured to a floor-level angle bracket. The angle bracket is
secured to the aircraft floor and seat track with fasteners that are accessed from the aft side of the
bulkhead.
The right-hand bulkhead is secured to the lavatory toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly with
fasteners that are accessed from inside the toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly. The top of the
right-hand bulkhead is secured by a channel. The bottom of the right-hand bulkhead is secured to
a floor-level angle bracket. The angle bracket is secured to the aircraft floor and seat track with
fasteners that are accessed from the aft side of the bulkhead.
A P-seal is mounted on the aft side of the baggage door header and bulkhead to prevent smoke
from the baggage compartment passing through the door into the lavatory.
B. Bulkhead FS587 Hinged Door
Bulkhead FS587 has a door, hinged on the right-hand bulkhead, that swings into the lavatory. The
door handle and door lock are designed to relieve pressure loads in the event of sudden cabin
decompression. A position latch is installed to hold the door open.
The decompression design feature includes a breakaway door jamb secured with plastic
fasteners, breakaway striker plates at the latches, and pivot hinges.
WARNING: DO NOT REPLACE ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS OR FASTENERS UNLESS

IDENTICAL PARTS ARE USED.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT CABIN BULKHEADS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: Baggage and/or lavatory headliner may need to be removed before removing the bulkheads.
A. To remove the left-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Shut off aircraft power.
(4) Remove contents from vanity and curio cabinets as required to access fasteners securing
bulkhead to cabinets.
(5) Remove mirror cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(6) Remove fasteners securing bulkhead to vanity and curio cabinets.
(7) Remove fasteners securing angle bracket to floor and seat tracks.
(8) Remove fasteners securing bulkhead to vanity and curio cabinets.
(9) Slide bulkhead inboard, disconnect switch panel (23-90-00), and remove bulkhead from
aircraft.
B. To remove the right-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(3) Remove baggage compartment shelf.
(4) Disconnect electrical connections and remove electrical components mounted to water tank
compartment closeout access panels.
(5) Remove water tank compartment closeout.
Nov 10/2006
(6) Remove contents from lavatory storage cabinet.
(7) Remove toilet shroud cover.
(8) Remove fasteners securing floor angle bracket to floor and seat tracks.
(9) Remove fasteners securing bulkhead to toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly.
(10) Slide bulkhead inboard and remove from aircraft.
C. To remove the baggage compartment bulkhead door:
NOTE: For proper fit and operation of the door, mark the bushings, hinge block assemblies, and
veneer filler pieces with their location as they are removed.
(1) Open the door fully, but do not engage the door stop.
(2) Loosen the screws on each hinge block assembly.
(3) Remove the fasteners and the veneer filler pieces (starting with the bottom, then the middle,
and then the top).
(4) Slide the door forward to disengage the bushings and hinge blocks.
(5) Remove the door.
(6) Remove the bushings and hinge blocks from the hinge pins.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the left-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(2) Connect switch panel (23-90-00).
(3) Install fasteners securing floor angle bracket to floor and seat tracks.
(4) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to vanity and curio cabinets.
(5) Install mirror cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(6) Install contents into cabinets.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install the right-hand bulkhead (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(2) Install fasteners securing bulkhead to toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(3) Install fasteners securing floor angle bracket to floor and seat tracks.
(4) Install baggage compartment water tank compartment closeout.
(5) Install electrical components mounted to water tank closeout access panels and restore
electrical connections.
(6) Install baggage compartment shelf.
(9) Install contents to storage cabinet.
C. To install the baggage compartment bulkhead door:
NOTE: For proper fit and operation of the door, install the bushings, hinge block assemblies, and
veneer filler pieces as marked during removal.
(1) Install the bushings and hinge blocks to the hinge pins.
(2) Put the door in position and slide door to engage the bushings and hinge blocks.
(3) Install the fasteners and the veneer filler pieces (starting with the top, then the middle, and
then the bottom).
(4) Check the door for proper operation and fit.
Nov 10/2006
CHANNEL
HEADER
DOOR HINGES
RH BULKHEAD
CHANNEL
VANITY CABINET
AND CURIO
CABINET ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL)
TOILET SHROUD/
STORAGE CABINET
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
LH BULKHEAD

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
HEADER CHANNEL
DOOR
HINGES
P-SEAL
RH BULKHEAD
CHANNEL
LH BULKHEAD
FLOOR ATTACH
ANGLE BRACKET
FLOOR ATTACH
ANGLE BRACKET

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
WARDROBES
WARDROBES - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Forward Wardrobe
The forward wardrobe is located on the left side of the aircraft just forward of the main cabin door at
FS280 to FS310. The wardrobe assembly is secured to the aircraft floor with fasteners and angle
brackets at the base of the forward and aft partitions. A spring-loaded pin-bracket assembly secures the
top of the wardrobe cabinet. Access to the spring-loaded pin-bracket assembly is through the acoustic
curtain storage compartment.
The back of the wardrobe has a large two-piece access panel that is secured with cam-lock fasteners for
easy access to the junction box and other miscellaneous electrical components. This large access panel
also contains a smaller access panel secured with hook-and-loop strips. The smaller access panel has
sight holes for viewing the area outboard of the wardrobe. Access panels located at the top of the main
compartment allow access to component wiring.
An observer audio panel and an oxygen mask are located in the forward section of the wardrobe. A
return air duct is located at the aft outboard section of the wardrobe cabinet floor. The air duct is
accessed through an easily removable closeout panel.
The wardrobe cabinet also provides storage for various emergency equipment (25-60-00) and other
miscellaneous items.
Nov 10/2006
SWITCH PANELS
EMERGENCY
EQUIPMENT
MISC STORAGE PLACARD
JUMPSEAT LIGHT
SWITCH
OXYGEN MASK
AUDIO PANEL
MASK
MIC
FLASHLIGHT CREW PBE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PORTABLE OXYGEN EMERGENCY MEDICAL KIT

BOTTLE AND MASK
FIRST AID KIT
FORWARD WARDROBE
Nov 10/2006
WARDROBES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION, INSTALL PROTECTIVE COVERS ON ALL OXYGEN
LINES IMMEDIATELY AFTER DISCONNECTING. DO NOT REMOVE PROTECTIVE
COVERS UNTIL IMMEDIATELY BEFORE CONNECTING. OBSERVE INSTALLATION AND
TORQUING PROCEDURES FOR OXYGEN FITTINGS AND LINES IN CHAPTER 20 OF
THE CANADAIR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR INSTALLATIONS AND
REMOVALS IN THIS SECTION.
A. To remove the forward wardrobe cabinet (Figure 401):
(2) Shut off oxygen supply to oxygen mask.
(3) Remove contents from wardrobe cabinet.
(4) Remove access panel at top of wardrobe main compartment (behind curtain door).
(5) If applicable, remove carpet lining at top of wardrobe upper compartment.
(6) Remove wardrobe cabinet switch panels (23-90-00).
(7) Remove entry headliner (25-15-01).
(8) Disconnect electrical connections to audio panel.
(9) Disconnect oxygen line.
(10) Remove access panel in back of wardrobe cabinet.
(11) Disconnect electrical connections to jumpseat light bright/dim controller (33-10-00).
(12) Remove fasteners securing angle brackets to floor.
(13) Depress spring-loaded pin assembly and slide wardrobe cabinet inboard.
(14) Disconnect any remaining electrical connections.
(15) Remove wardrobe cabinet.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the forward wardrobe cabinet (Figure 401):
(1) Position wardrobe cabinet inboard enough to restore any necessary electrical connections.
(2) Restore any electrical connections.
Nov 10/2006
(3) While depressing spring-loaded pin assembly, slide wardrobe cabinet into correct location
until pin assembly inserts into intercostal.
(4) Install fasteners securing angle brackets to floor.
(5) Restore electrical connections to jumpseat light bright/dim controller (33-10-00).
(6) Restore any remaining electrical connections.
(7) Restore oxygen connection.
(8) Install access panel.
(9) Install entry headliner (25-15-01).
(10) Install wardrobe cabinet switch panels (23-90-00).
(11) Install contents.
components, including:

• Crew Oxygen System, 35-10-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Observer audio panel
• Wardrobe lights
(13) Verify proper operation of wardrobe doors.
Nov 10/2006
PIN-BRACKET
ASSEMBLY
FLOOR ATTACH
ANGLE BRACKETS
FORWARD WARDROBE (TYPICAL) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
STORAGE CABINETS
STORAGE CABINETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Aft Storage Cabinet
A storage cabinet is located in the aft section of the cabin on the left side. It provides miscellaneous
storage, and storage for two fire extinguishers. The aft storage cabinet is secured to the forward side of
left-hand bulkhead FS560 (25-23-55), to the sideledge with a plate, to the floor, and to the seat track with
a fastener and seat track insert. A closeout panel in the bottom of the aft cabinet is easily removed to
provide access to the securing hardware.
1 2 3 4 5
FWD
1 2 3 4
AFT STORAGE
CABINET
AFT STORAGE CABINET LOCATION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
STORAGE CABINETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the aft left-hand storage cabinet (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Remove contents from storage cabinet.
(2) Remove drawers.
(3) Remove closeout panel.
(4) Remove fasteners securing storage cabinet to bulkhead.
(5) Remove fasteners securing storage cabinet to seat track and floor.
(6) Remove fasteners securing sideledge attach plate to storage cabinet.
(7) Remove storage cabinet.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the aft left-hand storage cabinet (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Position cabinet and install fasteners securing cabinet to bulkhead.
(2) Install fasteners securing cabinet to seat track and floor.
(3) Install fasteners securing sideledge attach plate to storage cabinet.
(4) Install closeout panel.
(6) Install contents into storage cabinet.
(7) Verify proper operation of cabinet drawers.
Nov 10/2006
SIDELEDGE
ATTACH PLATE
BULKHEAD
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
CLOSEOUT
PANEL
SEAT TRACK
ATTACH POINT A
FLOOR ATTACH
POINTS B
AFT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
BOLT
SPACER WASHER
BUSHING
INSERT
CABINET BUSHING
SEAT TRACK
FITTING
SEAT TRACK
BOLT
SPACER WASHER
BUSHING
INSERT
CABINET
BUSHING
FLOOR
AFT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
DIVAN END CABINETS
DIVAN END CABINETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Divan Aft End Cabinet
An end cabinet is located aft of the divan. The end cabinet is secured to the forward side of right-hand
bulkhead FS560 (25-23-55), to the sideledge with brackets, to the divan frame, and to the floor seat
tracks with fasteners and seat track inserts.
The aft end cabinet contains:

• Switch panels
• A door-actuated equipment lighting strip
• Provisions for a printer/fax machine (23-23-00)
• Storage provisions for therapeutic oxygen masks and lines (supplied as loose equipment)
• Two electrical outlets (one utility and one for the printer/fax machine)
• A cooling fan
• Various entertainment components (23-32-00, 23-33-00, and 23-90-00)
2. OPERATION
To open a door, pull upwards on the handle to release the latch. Open far enough to access the
secondary latch, then press the secondary latch to allow the door to open fully. Opening the aft door of
the end cabinet turns on an equipment light.
Nov 10/2006
CD PLAYER
SWITCH PANELS
VIDEO
CASSETTE
PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
PRINTER/FAX
MACHINE
PROVISIONS
Nov 10/2006
DIVAN END CABINETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: Open and lock out applicable circuit breakers as needed before removing cabinet: (23-32-00,
23-33-00, 23-90-00, 24-25-00, and 33-21-08).
A. To remove the divan aft end cabinet (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(2) Remove divan (25-21-30), if necessary.
(3) Remove dado panel outboard of divan (25-27-10), if necessary.
(4) Remove contents from end cabinet.
(5) Remove entertainment equipment from end cabinet (23-32-00 and 23-33-00).
(6) Remove closeouts at bottom of end cabinet.
(7) Disconnect all electrical connections.
(8) Remove fasteners securing end cabinet to seat tracks.
(9) Remove outboard access panel.
(10) Remove fasteners securing end cabinet to sideledge (through access panel).
(11) Remove fasteners securing end cabinet to bulkhead.
(12) Remove end cabinet.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the divan aft end cabinet (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Position end cabinet.
(2) Route wiring through back of end cabinet.
(3) Install fasteners securing end cabinet to bulkhead.
(4) Install fasteners securing end cabinet to sideledge.
(5) Install outboard access panel.
(6) Install fasteners securing end cabinet to seat tracks.
(7) Install electrical connections at bottom of cabinet.
(8) Install closeouts.
Nov 10/2006
(9) Install entertainment equipment (23-32-00 and 23-33-00).
(10) Install contents into end cabinet.
(11) Install dado panel (25-27-10), if removed.
(12) Install divan (25-21-30), if removed.
(13) Verify proper operation of installed components, including:

• 60Hz Power System, 24-25-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Audio Entertainment System, 23-32-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Video Entertainment System, 23-33-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Entertainment equipment lighting
(14) Verify proper operation of end cabinet doors and printer/fax machine drawer.
Nov 10/2006
BULKHEAD
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
SIDELEDGE ATTACH
OUTBOARD
BRACKETS (TYPICAL)
ACCESS PANEL
SEAT TRACK
A ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
DIVAN FRAME
B ATTACH POINTS
DIVAN END CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
BOLT
SPACER WASHER
BUSHING
INSERT
CABINET
BUSHING
WASHER SEAT TRACK

FITTING
SEAT TRACK
CABINET
WASHER
DIVAN
FRAME
RING
BUSHING SPACER
WASHER
BOLT
DIVAN END CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
CABIN SIDE PANELS
CABIN SIDE PANELS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Each side of the aircraft contains a two-piece side panel. Each outer side panel extends from the top of
the sideledge to the headliner. Each inner side panel extends from the top of the sideledge to just below
the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).
The bottom portion of each side panel is secured by channels mounted to the sideledges. The inner side
panels are secured to the outer side panels by dual-lock tape, hook-and-loop strips, and Z-clips. The
outer side panels are secured to the airframe by fasteners hidden behind the PSU.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN SIDE PANELS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: Remove seats (25-21-10) before performing these steps. Remove left-hand bulkhead FS350
(25-23-37) before performing these steps if side panels will be removed from aircraft.
A. To remove an inner side panel (Figure 401):
(1) If applicable, remove emergency escape door.
(2) Remove ordinance signs (33-24-00).
(3) Pull top of inner side panel inboard to release dual-lock tape strips.
(4) Lift inner side panel up, then inboard, to clear Z-clips and to release hook-and-loop strips.
(5) Remove inner side panel.
B. To remove an outer side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Remove inner side panel (1.A.).
(2) Remove PSU (25-26-20).
(3) Remove fasteners securing outer side panel to brackets.
(4) Lift outer side panel up and out of sideledge.
(5) Remove outer side panel.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install an inner side panel (Figure 401):
NOTE: The outer side panel must be installed first.
(1) Lower inner side panel into place, making sure to catch Z-clips.
(2) Press inner side panel at dual-lock tape and hook-and-loop locations to ensure tightness.
(3) Install ordinance signs (33-24-00).
(4) If applicable, install emergency escape door.
(5) Install seats (25-21-10), if removed.
(6) Install left-hand bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37), if removed.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install an outer side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Lower outer side panel into place.
(2) Install fasteners securing outer side panel to brackets.
(3) Install PSU (25-26-20).
(4) Install inner side panel (2.A.).
OUTER SIDE
PANEL ATTACH
POINTS
PSU OUTER SIDE

PANEL
DUAL-LOCK
TAPE
Z-CLIPS
INNER SIDE
PANEL
HOOK-AND-LOOP
CABIN SIDE PANELS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
CABIN PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT
CABIN PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The Passenger Service Units (PSU) extend along the left and right sides of the cabin, between the side
panels and the headliner panel. The PSU contains:
• A handrail along the upper edge
• Dual oxygen masks (35-20-00) at each seating position
• Entertainment speakers (23-32-00)
• Reading and table lights (33-22-20)
• Indirect fluorescent lighting and power supplies (33-21-02)
• Individual air gaspers (21-22-00)
Each PSU is secured to the headliner and outer side panel with fasteners located inside the PSU. The
PSU covers are secured with ball catches to allow easy access to the PSU components.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a PSU cover:
(1) Open and lock out applicable circuit breaker(s), (33-22-20).
(2) Pull down at bottom/outboard edge of cover to release from ball catches.
(3) Pull down at top/inboard edge of cover to release from remaining ball catches.
(4) Disconnect wiring to reading and/or table lights.
(5) Disconnect air gasper connections.
(6) Remove PSU cover.
B. To remove a PSU (Figure 401):
CAUTION: PSU REMOVAL IS TO BE DONE WITH THREE PERSONS.
NOTE: Removing components from the PSU will make it lighter and easier to remove.
(2) Remove PSU covers (1.A.).
(3) Remove PSU indirect fluorescent lights (20-12-00).
(4) Shut off oxygen supply to masks.
(5) Remove bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37), if necessary.
(6) Disconnect electrical, air gasper, and oxygen connections.
(7) Remove all exposed fasteners securing PSU to aircraft structure.
(8) Disconnect air gasper (feeder) duct.
(9) Remove PSU.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a PSU cover:
(1) Restore air gasper connection.
(2) Restore electrical connections to reading and/or table lights.
(3) Position PSU cover and press up at inboard and outboard edges to secure ball catches.
Nov 10/2006
• Emergency Lights, 33-51-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Passenger Compartment Air Distribution, 21-22-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Reading and table lights
B. To install a PSU (Figure 401):
(1) Connect air gasper (feeder) duct.
(2) Position PSU and install fasteners.
(3) Restore electrical, air gasper, and oxygen connections.
(4) Leak-check necessary oxygen connections.
(5) Install indirect fluorescent lights (20-12-00).
(6) Install bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37), if removed.
• Audio Entertainment System, 23-32-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Indirect Lights, 33-21-02, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Passenger Oxygen System, 35-20-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
(8) Install PSU covers (2.A.).
Nov 10/2006
PSU ATTACH
POINTS
PSU COVERS
PSU INDIRECT
LIGHT (TYPICAL)
AIR GASPER
(FEEDER)
CABIN PSU - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN HEADLINER
CABIN HEADLINER - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A one-piece headliner panel is installed in the main cabin from the forward bulkhead to bulkhead FS560.
The headliner contains return air ducts and indirect fluorescent lighting.
The cabin headliner is secured with a hinge to the entry headliner, and with fasteners to brackets hidden
behind the Passenger Service Units (PSU).
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CABIN HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable lighting circuit breaker(s) (33-21-02).
(3) Remove left-hand bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37), as necessary.
(4) Remove left-hand and right-hand PSU (25-26-20).
(5) Remove left-hand inner and outer side panels, all left-hand windows, and shades.
(6) Remove headliner indirect fluorescent lights (20-12-00).
(7) Remove fasteners securing headliner to aircraft structure.
(8) Lower headliner and disconnect electrical and air connections.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Position headliner and restore electrical and air connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing headliner to aircraft structure.
(3) Install headliner indirect fluorescent lights (20-12-00).
(4) Install left-hand inner and outer side panels, all left-hand windows, and shades.
(5) Install left-hand and right-hand PSU (25-26-20).
• Indirect lights, 33-21-02, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
Nov 10/2006
HEADLINER INDIRECT
LIGHT (TYPICAL)
HEADLINER
ATTACH POINT
(TYPICAL)
CABIN HEADLINER
PSU
CABIN HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
SIDELEDGE/DADO PANELS
SIDELEDGE/DADO PANELS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Sideledges are installed on the left and right sides of the cabin, below the side panels, from the forward
bulkhead to bulkhead FS560. The sideledges are secured outboard to brackets, which are secured to
the airframe. Channel assemblies are installed to the top of each sideledge to secure the bottom portion
of the side panels.
Below the sideledges, dado panels extend to the upper portion of the air-distribution ducts and conceal
various electrical components and other miscellaneous items. The dado panels are secured with
hook-and-loop strips, and with fasteners to the storage boxes and pullout tables. The fasteners are
accessed from inside the storage box or pullout table assembly.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
SIDELEDGE/DADO PANELS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: Open and lock out applicable circuit breaker(s) as needed before removing dado panels or
sideledges (21-61-18, 23-16-00, 23-90-00, and 25-20-10).
A. To remove a dado panel (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Shut off therapeutic oxygen supply, if applicable.
(2) Remove seats (25-21-10 and/or 25-21-20), divan (25-21-30), divan end cabinet (25-24-30),
or other obstructions, as necessary.
(3) If applicable, remove fasteners securing dado panel to sideledge pullout tables and/or
storage boxes.
(4) Pull gently inboard at one end of panel until it releases from hook-and-loop attach points.
(5) Disconnect wiring, if applicable.
(6) Disconnect hose to therapeutic oxygen outlet, if applicable.
(7) Disconnect hose to cabin temperature sensor inlet, if applicable.
(8) Remove dado panel.
B. To remove a sideledge (Figure 401):
(1) Remove seats (25-21-10 and/or 25-21-20), forward left-hand bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37),
divan (25-21-30), and divan end cabinet (25-24-30) as needed to remove sideledge.
(2) Remove dado panels (1.A.).
(3) Disconnect electrical connections to handset cradles, if applicable.
(4) Disconnect switch panels (23-90-00).
(5) Disconnect air temperature sensor (21-61-18), if applicable.
(6) Remove pullout tables (25-27-30).
(7) Remove PSU (25-26-20).
(8) Remove side panels (25-26-10), window reveals, and emergency exit door, if applicable.
(9) Remove fasteners securing sideledge to airframe and bulkheads, if applicable.
(10) Remove sideledge.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a dado panel (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Position dado panel and restore any electrical, air, or oxygen connections.
(2) If applicable, restore therapeutic oxygen supply and perform leak check per 35-20-02,
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(3) Push dado panel back against hook-and loop attach points.
(4) If applicable, install fasteners securing dado panel to sideledge pullout tables and/or storage
boxes.
(5) Install seats (25-21-10 and/or 25-21-20), divan (25-21-30), divan end cabinet (25-24-30),
and other obstructions, if removed.

• Cabin Temperature Control, 21-61-18, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Therapeutic Oxygen System, 35-20-02, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
B. To install a sideledge (Figure 401):
(1) Position sideledge and secure with fasteners to aircraft and bulkheads.
(2) Install side panels (25-26-10), window reveals, and emergency exit door, if applicable.
(3) Install pullout tables (25-27-30).
(4) Connect air temperature sensor (21-61-18), if applicable.
(5) Install PSU (25-26-20).
(6) Connect switch panels (23-90-00).
(7) Restore electrical connections to handset cradles, if applicable.
(8) Install seats (25-21-10 and/or 25-21-20), forward left-hand bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37),
divan (25-21-30), and divan end cabinet (25-24-30).
(9) Install dado panels (2.A.).
Nov 10/2006
(10) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of applicable
installed components, including:
• Iridium Communication System, 23-16-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

SIDELEDGE
HOOK-AND-LOOP
SIDELEDGE
ATTACH POINTS
DADO PANEL
HOOK-AND-LOOP

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
DADO PANEL
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
DADO PANEL
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
(DADO PANEL AT STORAGE BOX) (DADO PANEL AT PULLOUT TABLE)

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
PULLOUT TABLES
PULLOUT TABLES - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Pullout tables are installed into the sideledges. The pullout table assemblies are secured to brackets on
the conditioned air ducts and sideledges.
2. OPERATION
A. To open a pullout table:
(1) Open access panel in top of sideledge.
(2) Slide handle/supports upward and continue pulling it upward and inboard until fully extended
in a horizontal position.
(3) Unfold leaf of table to a horizontal position. Ensure handle/support levers are fully extended
inboard to support table leaf.
(4) Close access door in sideledge.
B. To stow a pullout table:
(1) Open access door in sideledge.
(2) Fold inboard leaf of table toward sideledge.
(3) Slide handle/supports toward sideledge, and push outboard and down on table assembly
until it is fully stowed in sideledge.
(4) Close access panel in top of sideledge.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PULLOUT TABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a tabletop (Figure 401):
(1) Deploy table mechanism. Do not unfold table top.
(2) While supporting tabletop, remove fasteners securing tabletop to table mechanism.
(3) Remove tabletop.
B. To remove a pullout table assembly (Figure 402):
(2) Remove tabletop (1.A.).
(3) Remove fasteners securing table mechanism.
(4) Remove table mechanism.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a tabletop (Figure 401):
(1) Deploy table mechanism.
(2) Position tabletop.
(3) Install fasteners securing tabletop to table mechanism.
(4) Close table and stow.
B. To install a pullout table assembly (Figure 402):
(1) Position table mechanism and secure with fasteners.
(2) Install tabletop (2.A.).
Nov 10/2006
TABLETOP
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
LEAF
HANDLE/SUPPORTS (VIEW LOOKING DOWN)

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
TABLETOP ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL)
PULLOUT TABLE MECHANISM TABLETOP

ATTACH POINTS
PULLOUT
TABLE
ASSEMBLY
PULLOUT TABLE
MECHANISM ATTACH
POINTS

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT TABLES
ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT TABLES - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A mechanical, two-position pedestal conference/dining table is located between the double seats in the
cabin. The table incorporates fold-out padded leaves and drink holders. The table can accommodate
four meal trays.
2. OPERATION
The table can be raised and lowered approximately 11.5 inches and mechanically locked in position.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT TABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the adjustable-height table assembly (Figure 401):
(1) Fold table leaves to stowed position and install securing straps.
(2) Remove fasteners securing table base to floor seat tracks.
(3) Remove table assembly.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the adjustable-height table assembly (Figure 401):
(1) Position table assembly and secure to floor seat tracks with fasteners.
(2) Remove securing straps and deploy table leaves.
(3) Verify proper operation of table.
Nov 10/2006
SEAT TRACK
ATTACH POINTS
(6 PLACES)
BOLT
WASHER
TABLE BASE
SEAT TRACK
SEAT TRACK
FITTING
ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT TABLE (TYPICAL) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
FLOOR COVERING
FLOOR COVERING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The padded carpet extends from the FS280 bulkhead to the aft pressure bulkhead. It is preshrunk and
incorporates a fire-retardant latex and anti-static backing. The carpet may be attached with
hook-and-loop strips at the outboard and bulkhead areas. A carpet underlay has also been installed.
The entry area, lavatory area, and baggage compartment have Protex-5 installed under the carpet to
contain accidental fluid spills and prevent possible damage to underlying structures.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FLOOR COVERING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the cabin carpet:
NOTE: Carpet may be secured with hook-and-loop strips along edges.
(1) Loosen carpet at lavatory and baggage area and fold to center of lavatory compartment.
(2) Fold forward into main cabin area, forward of bulkhead FS560.
(3) Loosen and fold entry area carpet into cabin.
(4) Loosen carpet along edges of cabin.
(5) Fold carpet down center line of aircraft.
NOTE: Protect bulkhead FS350 area before removing carpet from aircraft.
(6) Remove carpet from aircraft.
B. To remove the carpet underlay:
(1) Remove carpet (1.A.).
(2) Fold carpet underlay at lavatory and baggage areas to center of lavatory compartment.
(3) Fold forward into main cabin area, forward of bulkhead FS560.
(4) Fold entry area carpet underlay into cabin.
(5) Fold carpet underlay down center line of aircraft.
(6) Remove underlay from aircraft.
NOTE: Do not store carpet underlay with felt side facing out.
C. To remove a section of Protex-5:
(1) Remove carpet (1.A.) and carpet underlay (1.B.).
(2) Remove (peel off) Protex-5.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the cabin carpet:
(1) Install Protex-5 (2.C.), if applicable.
(2) Install carpet underlay (2.B.).
Nov 10/2006
(3) Position carpet immediately aft of bulkhead FS350.
(4) Position carpet down center line of aircraft and unfold.
(5) Unfold and position lavatory and baggage compartment carpet.
(6) Unfold and position entry area carpet.
(7) Secure carpet by pressing down all hook-and-loop strip areas.
B. To install carpet underlay:
(1) Position carpet underlay immediately aft of bulkhead FS350.
(2) Position underlay down center line of aircraft and unfold.
(3) Unfold and position lavatory and baggage compartment underlay.
(4) Unfold and position entry area carpet underlay.
C. To install a section of Protex-5:
(1) Position Protex-5.
(2) Peel off backing from Protex-5.
(3) Install Protex-5, applying pressure (with roller or other tool) to secure self-adhesive side to
aircraft floor.
(4) Install underlay (2.B.).
(5) Install carpet (2.A.).
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
GALLEY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Outlets for 115VAC/60Hz are located in the galley as follows:
• One dual GFI-type outlet in upper galley

THE CONDITION IS NOT HAZARDOUS BEFORE RESETTING THE GALLEY GFI
DEVICE.
protection feature. The RESET button should trip, and the outlet will de-energize. To reactivate the
outlet, press the RESET button.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. GENERAL
Refer to 24-25-00, 60HZ POWER SYSTEM, ADJUSTMENT/TEST, for test procedures.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY
GALLEY - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A galley is located in the entryway between FS280 and FS350 on the right-hand side of the aircraft. The
galley consists of three major sections: an upper assembly, a lower assembly, and a countertop. The
upper galley assembly is fastened to the lower galley and bulkhead FS350. The lower galley assembly is
secured to the floor, to the aircraft structure by way of shear plates, and to bulkhead FS350. Closeout
panels are installed in the galley to provide access to various cabin system relays, upper and lower
electrical equipment trays, and the right-hand angle-of-attack and fast/slow transducers. A crew
jumpseat (25-18-01) is stowed in the forward portion of the lower galley. Gaspers in the lower galley
provide cool air to the food and beverage drawers. A water heater supplies hot water to the galley sink.
The galley circuit breaker panel located in the upper galley provides electrical service and circuit
protection for various aircraft systems. Also installed in the galley are the electrical equipment trays
which house various relays and control equipment for lavatory, cabin, galley, and other system functions.
See Galley Electrical Equipment Trays for the location of the equipment trays. The Galley Switch Panel,
which controls the electrical components for the galley, lavatory, cabin, and water systems, is located in
the aft portion of the upper galley.
In addition to china, crystal, flatware, and food storage provisions, the galley has a sink with mechanical
drain, hot and cold running water, and food and beverage preparation equipment. The food preparation
equipment is specified by the customer (25-35-05).

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
HOT GALLEY LAV

DISP H EATER HEATER PURGE
W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ
Nov 10/2006
MICROWAVE OVEN DUAL GFI

(PROVISIONS) RECEPTACLE COFFEE MAKER
CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCH

PANEL CRYSTAL PANEL
STORAGE
(4)
HIGH-TEMPERATURE
OVEN HOT WATER
DISPENSER
FLATWARE MISC STORAGE

COLD PLATTER MISC
ICE DRAWER STORAGE
WASTE
CONTAINER
STORAGE ICE DRAWER
JUMPSEAT
MINI LIQUOR
STORAGE CHINA STORAGE
JUICE/WINE/ WATER
SODA STORAGE HEATER
MISC STORAGE CHINA STORAGE
INSTANT HOT
WATER
HEATER
GALLEY
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the galley (Figure 401, Figure 402, and Figure 403):
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING WITH THE INSTANT HOT WATER
DISPENSER (WATER HEATED TO 180° F) AND THE GALLEY WATER HEATER
(WATER HEATED TO 125° F).
(1) Drain water system and relieve water system pressure.
(3) Remove bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37).
(5) Remove all loose equipment, drawers, and doors from galley.
(6) Remove all electrical appliances and devices.
(7) Remove circuit breaker panel (24-70-00), switch panel (23-90-00), and lighting (33-26-00).
(8) Remove all closeout panels from galley.
(9) Disconnect all electrical, water, drain, and air connections.
(10) Remove fasteners securing countertop to lower galley.
(11) Remove countertop.
(12) Remove fasteners securing upper galley to lower galley.
(13) Move upper galley inboard enough to check for and disconnect other connections or
interference.
(14) Remove upper galley.
(15) Remove fasteners securing lower galley to floor.
(16) Remove fasteners from shear plates securing lower galley to aircraft structure.
(17) Remove ducts for entry heater, if applicable.
(18) Move galley inboard enough to check for and disconnect other connections or interference.
(19) Remove lower galley.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the galley (Figure 401, Figure 402, and Figure 403):
(1) Check integrity of Protex-5 (25-29-00). Reseal the Protex-5 penetrations and edges prior to
installation of the galley.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO ENSURE THAT THE PROTEX-5 IS SEALED CAN RESULT IN

DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(2) Position lower galley and route wiring and plumbing to proper places.
(3) Route entry heater ducts into lower galley, if applicable.
(4) Install fasteners securing lower galley to shear plates and floor.
(5) Position upper galley and route wiring to proper places.
(6) Install fasteners securing upper galley to lower galley.
(7) Install countertop.
(8) Install electrical devices.
(9) Install bulkhead FS350 (25-23-37).
(11) Restore all electrical, water, drain, and air connections.
(12) Install circuit breaker panel (24-70-00), switch panel (23-90-00), and lighting (33-26-00).
(13) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801), air, and water supplies.

• Load Shedding, 24-70-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
• Water system per Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure,
document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision
(15) Install all loose equipment, drawers, and doors.
(16) Install closeout panels.
(17) Perform inspection/check per INSPECTION/CHECK.
Nov 10/2006
UPPER GALLEY TO
LOWER GALLEY
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPCIAL)
FLOOR ATTACH
POINTS (TYPICAL) A
FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
SHEAR PLATE
ATTACH POINTS B
(TYPICAL)
FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
SCREW
SPACER WASHER
BUSHING
INSERT
GALLEY
BUSHING
WASHER
AIRCRAFT INSERT
FLOOR
GALLEY
SCREW SHEAR PLATES
WASHER
SPACER
BUSHING
AIRFRAME
FIGURE 403
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE GALLEY WASTE CONTAINER

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-35-60-601
B. Procedure
(1) Perform a detailed visual inspection of the waste container as follows:
(a) Inspect the condition of the door assembly for evidence of deterioration, wear, or
damage.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the condition of the seals.
(b) Inspect the waste container assembly for evidence of wear or damage.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the fit between the tracks and the phenolic seals,
and the integrity of the waste container liner.
(c) Physically check the operation of the spring loaded door (if installed) for proper
operation, and integrity of the seal.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
GALLEY EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The following equipment has been installed in the galley:
A. Coffee Maker
A coffee maker is located in the upper galley. Controls for operating the coffee maker are on the
unit. Power to the designated coffee maker circuit is controlled by the COFFEE ON/OFF switch on
the Galley Switch Panel, relay K6MF, and a tambour door switch operating through Cabin Control
Module 1 (CCM 1) (23-90-00), located on a lower galley equipment tray. Power is not available to
the coffee maker circuit if the tambour door is not fully open. Table 1 lists the coffee maker
components.
The coffee maker is powered by 115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 2 and is GFI protected. Relay
K6MF is powered by 28VDC - CABIN BUS 1.

Relay K6MF Lower galley equipment tray
GALLEY CONTROL circuit breaker (relay CB) CBPG-8
COFFEE MAKER circuit breaker CBPG-36
COFFEE MAKER COMPONENTS

TABLE 1
B. Microwave Oven
Provisions for a microwave oven have been installed in the upper galley. Power to the microwave
oven dedicated outlet is controlled by relay K7MF and a tambour door switch operating through
CCM 1. Power is not available to the microwave oven circuit if the tambour door is not fully open.
Table 2 lists the microwave oven components.
The microwave oven dedicated outlet is powered by 115VAC 60Hz and is GFI protected. Relay
K7MF is powered by 28VDC - CABIN BUS 1.

MICROWAVE circuit breaker CBPG-30
MICROWAVE OVEN COMPONENTS

TABLE 2
C. High-temperature Oven
A high-temperature oven is located in the upper galley. Power to the oven control module is
controlled by relay K8MF and a tambour door switch. Power is not available to the
Nov 10/2006
high-temperature oven if the tambour door is not fully open. Table 3 lists the high-temperature
oven components.
The high-temperature oven is powered by 115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 1. Relay K8MF is
powered by 28VDC - CABIN BUS 1.

OVEN circuit breaker CBPG-22
HIGH-TEMPERATURE OVEN COMPONENTS

TABLE 3
D. Galley Fans
Three exhaust fans vent excess moisture, heat, and kitchen odors. The fans are located in the
upper galley. The fans are on whenever the circuit breaker is closed and powered. Table 4 lists the
galley fan components.

Exhaust fans (3) Outboard of high-temperature
oven; outboard of microwave
oven space; outboard of coffee
maker
GALLEY CONTROL circuit breaker CBPG-8
GALLEY FAN COMPONENTS

TABLE 4
E. Hot Water Dispenser
A hot water dispenser is located in the galley sink. Pressing the HOT WATER DISP switch on the
Galley Switch Panel sends a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1, closing relay K903HR, which
supplies power to the hot water dispenser heater. CCM 1 and the relay are located on lower galley
equipment trays. Table 5 lists the hot water dispenser heater components.
The hot water dispenser heater is powered by 115VAC 400Hz - CABIN BUS 2. Relay K903HR is
powered by 28VDC - CABIN BUS 1.

Relay K903HR Lower galley equipment tray
HTR CONT circuit breaker (relay CB) CBPG-9
HOT WATER DISP circuit breaker CBPG-35
HOT WATER DISPENSER COMPONENTS

TABLE 5
Nov 10/2006
F. Water Heater
A water heater is installed in the galley (38-10-40).

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
MICROWAVE OVEN DUAL GFI

(PROVISIONS) RECEPTACLE COFFEE MAKER
CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCH

PANEL CRYSTAL PANEL
STORAGE
(4)
HIGH-TEMPERATURE
OVEN HOT WATER
DISPENSER
FLATWARE MISC STORAGE

COLD PLATTER MISC
ICE DRAWER STORAGE
WASTE
CONTAINER
STORAGE ICE DRAWER
JUMPSEAT
MINI LIQUOR
STORAGE CHINA STORAGE
JUICE/WINE/ WATER
SODA STORAGE HEATER
MISC STORAGE CHINA STORAGE
INSTANT HOT
WATER
HEATER
GALLEY
Nov 10/2006

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
HOT GALLEY LAV

DISP H EATER HEATER PURGE
W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the hot water dispenser heater:
DISPENSER (WATER HEATED TO 180° F) AND THE GALLEY WATER HEATER
(WATER HEATED TO 125° F).
(1) Open and lock out associated water heater circuit breakers (25-35-05 and 38-10-40).
(2) Remove waste container assembly from lower galley.
(3) Close galley water manual shutoff valve and depressurize water system by momentarily
opening galley hot and cold water faucets.
(4) Place a container under water heater to catch any remaining water.
(5) Disconnect lower water line and allow water to drain.
(6) Disconnect remaining electrical and water connections.
(7) Remove water heater mounting straps.
(8) Remove water heater.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the hot water dispenser heater:
(1) Position water heater and secure with mounting straps.
(2) Restore electrical and water connections.
(4) Perform applicable ground test(s) per Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LAVATORY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
LAVATORY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Outlets for 115VAC/60Hz are located in the lavatory as follows:
• One single outlet in vanity cabinet under sink

THE CONDITION IS NOT HAZARDOUS BEFORE RESETTING THE GALLEY GFI
DEVICE.
protection feature. The RESET button should trip, and the outlet will de-energize. To reactivate the
outlet, press the RESET button.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LAVATORY ELECTRICAL OUTLETS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. GENERAL
Refer to 24-25-00, 60HZ POWER SYSTEM, ADJUSTMENT/TEST, for test procedures.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY
AFT LAVATORY - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The aft lavatory consists of a vanity cabinet, countertop, and curio cabinet assembly with mirror cabinet
on the left side; and a toilet and toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly on the right side. It is located
between bulkheads FS560 and FS587. A single 115VAC/60Hz outlet is located in the vanity cabinet. The
toilet is electrically operated (38-31-00). A hinged door provides privacy from the cabin area, and a
second hinged door can close off the baggage area.
The vanity cabinet houses the sink, plumbing, water heater (38-10-40), waste container, switch panels,
facial tissue dispenser, hand towel racks, and miscellaneous storage. A mirror cabinet with lighted mirror
assembly is located above the sink. The toilet is enclosed by the toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly.
The vanity cabinet is secured to bulkheads FS560 and FS587, to the curio cabinet, and to a floor-level
angle bracket. The curio cabinet is also secured to bulkheads FS560 and FS587. The toilet
shroud/storage cabinet assembly is secured to bulkheads FS560 and FS587, and to floor-level angle
brackets. Closeout panels are installed to provide access to air-conditioning ducts, water system
components, and related systems.
OXYGEN BOX
PA SPEAKER
AIR GASPER
ORDINANCE
SIGN
MISC
STORAGE
TOILET TISSUE
DISPENSER
SWITCH FLUSH SWITCH

PANEL
WASTE
UTILITY CONTAINER
OUTLET
MISC
STORAGE
(VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD, RIGHT SIDE) (VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD, LEFT SIDE)
AFT LAVATORY
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the curio cabinet assembly mirror cabinet:
(2) Remove contents and shelves from mirror cabinet, as necessary.
(3) Remove mirror lamps (20-12-00), as necessary.
(4) Remove fasteners securing mirror cabinet to curio cabinet assembly.
(5) Move mirror cabinet inboard and disconnect electrical wiring.
(6) Remove mirror cabinet.
B. To remove the vanity curio cabinet assembly (Figure 401):
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING WITH THE LAVATORY WATER SYSTEM
AND WATER HEATER (WATER HEATED TO 125° F).
(2) Remove mirror cabinet (1.A.).
(3) Remove lavatory left-hand side panels (25-49-05).
(5) Remove fasteners securing curio cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS560.
(6) Remove left-hand bulkhead FS560 (25-23-55), as necessary.
(7) Disconnect water lines to faucet.
(8) Remove fasteners securing curio cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS587.
(9) Move curio cabinet assembly inboard and disconnect any remaining electrical or water
connections.
(10) Remove fasteners securing curio cabinet assembly to lavatory vanity cabinet.
(11) Remove curio cabinet assembly.
C. To remove the lavatory vanity cabinet (Figure 401):
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING WITH THE LAVATORY WATER SYSTEM
AND WATER HEATER (WATER HEATED TO 125° F).
(2) Remove contents from lavatory vanity cabinet.
Nov 10/2006
(3) Remove vanity curio cabinet assembly (1.B.).
(5) Disconnect switch panels (23-90-00).
(6) Remove doors and drawer.
(7) Remove closeout panels.
(8) Disconnect drain lines to sink.
(9) Disconnect all electrical and air connections.
(10) Remove middle baggage compartment headliner (25-55-03).
(11) Remove fasteners securing vanity cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS587.
(12) Remove bulkhead FS587, door header, and door (25-23-73).
(13) Remove fasteners securing vanity cabinet to bulkhead FS560 (25-23-55).
(14) Remove fasteners securing vanity cabinet assembly to floor angle bracket.
(15) Move vanity cabinet inboard enough to check for and disconnect other connections or
interference.
(16) Remove lavatory vanity cabinet.
D. To remove the toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly (Figure 402):
(2) Remove contents from storage cabinet.
(3) Remove right-hand side panels (25-49-05).
(4) Remove left-hand, middle, and right-hand baggage compartment headliner panels.
(5) Remove baggage compartment water panel.
(6) Remove toilet seat, seat cover, fillers, and FS587 header.
(7) Remove fasteners securing toilet shroud/storage cabinet to bulkhead FS587.
(8) Remove right-hand bulkhead FS587 (25-23-73).
(9) Move toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly inboard and disconnect any electrical wiring.
(10) Remove storage cabinet assembly.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the curio cabinet assembly mirror cabinet:
(1) Position mirror cabinet and restore electrical connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing mirror cabinet to curio cabinet assembly.
(3) Install mirror lamps (20-12-00), if removed.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of mirror lights.
(5) Install shelves and contents to mirror cabinet, if removed.
B. To install the vanity curio cabinet assembly (Figure 401):
(1) Position curio cabinet assembly and restore electrical and water connections.
(3) Install fasteners securing curio cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS587.
(4) Install fasteners securing curio cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS560.
(5) Install fasteners securing curio to lavatory vanity cabinet.
(6) Install mirror cabinet (2.A.).
(7) Install left-hand side panels (25-49-05).
(8) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of the water
system per:
• Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure, document number
TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision
C. To install the lavatory vanity cabinet (Figure 401):
(1) Check integrity of Protex-5 (25-29-00). Reseal the Protex-5 penetrations and edges prior to
installation of the lavatory vanity cabinet.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THE PROTEX-5 IS PROPERLY SEALED.
(2) Position lavatory vanity cabinet and restore electrical and air connections.
(3) Restore water and drain line connections and check for leaks.
(4) Install fasteners securing vanity cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS560.
(5) Install bulkhead FS587 (25-23-73).
Nov 10/2006
(6) Install fasteners securing vanity cabinet assembly to bulkhead FS587.
(7) Install fasteners securing vanity cabinet to floor angle bracket.
(8) Install baggage compartment middle headliner (25-55-03).
(9) Install FS587 door header and door (25-23-73).
(10) Connect switch panels (23-90-00).
(11) Install vanity curio cabinet assembly (2.B.).
• Cabin management system per Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test

Procedure, document number TE-GTP-251, revision (E), or the latest approved
revision
• Water system per Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure,
document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision
(13) Install doors and drawer.
D. To install the toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly (Figure 402):
(1) Position toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly and restore electrical connections.
(2) Install fasteners securing toilet shroud/storage cabinet to bulkhead FS560.
(3) Install right-hand bulkhead FS587 (25-23-73).
(4) Install fasteners securing toilet shroud to bulkhead FS587.
(5) Install fasteners securing toilet shroud/storage cabinet assembly angle brackets to floor.
(6) Install right-hand side panels (25-49-05).
(7) Install toilet seat, cover, and fillers.
(8) Install contents to storage cabinet.
(9) Install baggage compartment water panel.
(10) Install FS587 door header and door (25-23-73).
(11) Install left-hand, middle, and right-hand baggage compartment headliner panels.
(12) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of floor accent
lights.
Nov 10/2006
BULKHEAD FS560
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
BULKHEAD FS587
ATTACH POINTS MIRROR CABINET
(TYPICAL) ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
FLOOR ANGLE
BRACKET
A A
LAVATORY VANITY CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
BULKHEAD FS560
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
FLOOR ANGLE
BRACKETS
(TYPICAL)
BULKHEAD FS587
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
LAVATORY TOILET SHROUD/STORAGE CABINET ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE LAVATORY WASTE CONTAINER

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-49-60-601
B. Procedure
(1) Perform a detailed visual inspection of the waste container as follows:
(a) Inspect the condition of the door assembly for evidence of deterioration, wear, or
damage.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the condition of the seals.
(b) Inspect the waste container assembly for evidence of wear or damage.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the fit between the tracks and the phenolic seals,
and the integrity of the waste container liner.
(c) Physically check the operation of the spring loaded door (if installed) for proper
operation, and integrity of the seal.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY HEADLINER
AFT LAVATORY HEADLINER - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The lavatory headliner is a one-piece assembly covered with customer-approved material. The headliner
contains three dome lights and a smoke detector.
The sides of the headliner are secured to brackets by fasteners hidden behind the inner side panels.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable circuit breakers (26-10-01, 33-25-50, 33-45-00, and 33-51-00).
(2) Remove trim strips (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(3) Remove inner and outer side panels (25-49-05).
(4) Remove fasteners securing headliner to brackets.
(5) Disconnect wiring and air connections to smoke detector and air diffuser.
(6) Disconnect wiring to dome-light assemblies.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Position headliner and connect wiring to dome-light assemblies.
(2) Connect wiring and air connections to smoke detector and air diffuser.
(3) Install fasteners securing headliner.
(4) Install outer and inner side panels (25-49-05).
(5) Install trim strips (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(6) Verify proper operation of installed components:
• Smoke Detectors, 26-10-01, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Headliner dome lights
Nov 10/2006
HEADLINER
HEADLINER
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
OUTER SIDE
PANEL TRIM STRIP
INNER SIDE
PANEL
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD, LEFT SIDE)
HEADLINER
HEADLINER
ATTACH POINTS
(TYPICAL)
TRIM STRIP OUTER SIDE

PANEL
INNER SIDE
PANEL
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD, RIGHT SIDE)
LAVATORY HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY SIDE PANELS
AFT LAVATORY SIDE PANELS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The lavatory side panels consist of inner and outer panels. Each side panel extends from the top of a
lavatory cabinet to the headliner. The left-hand inner side panel contains an air gasper and an ordinance
sign. The right-hand inner side panel contains a speaker, a return air duct, and an oxygen drop box.
The bottom of each inner side panel is secured to the top of a lavatory cabinet with clips. The top of each
inner side panel is secured to the headliner with fasteners hidden behind trim strips. The top of each
outer side panel is secured to the airframe by fasteners hidden behind each inner side panel.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY SIDE PANELS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the right-hand inner side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Shut off oxygen supply to masks.
(3) Remove trim strip to reveal fasteners (trim strip secured with hook-and loop).
(4) Remove fasteners securing side panel to headliner.
(5) Pull side panel inboard to release from clips at top of cabinet.
(6) Disconnect electrical and oxygen connections, and air return connection.
(7) Remove right-hand inner side panel.
B. To remove the left-hand inner side panel (Figure 401):
(2) Remove ordinance sign (33-24-00).
(3) Remove trim strip to reveal fasteners (trim strip secured with hook-and-loop).
(4) Remove fasteners securing side panel to headliner.
(5) Pull side panel inboard to release from clips at top of cabinet.
(6) Disconnect electrical and air connections.
(7) Remove inner side panel.
C. To remove a lavatory outer side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Remove inner side panel (1.A. or 1.B.).
(2) Remove fasteners securing upper section of side panel to brackets.
(3) Lift outer side panel up and inboard.
(4) Remove outer side panel.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the right-hand inner side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Position right-hand inner side panel and restore electrical and oxygen connections, and air
return connection.
(2) Secure outboard edge of side panel in clip at cabinet.
(3) Install fasteners securing side panel to headliner.
(4) Install trim strip.
• Cabin Paging/Public Address, 23-31-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Passenger Oxygen System, 35-20-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST
B. To install the left-hand inner side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Position left-hand inner side panel and restore electrical and air connections.
(2) Secure outboard edge of side panel in clips at cabinet.
(3) Install fasteners securing side panel to headliner.
(4) Install trim strip.
(5) Install ordinance sign (33-24-00).
• Passenger Compartment Air Distribution System, 21-22-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Ordinance signs
C. To install a lavatory outer side panel (Figure 401):
(1) Lower outer side panel into place.
(2) Install fasteners securing upper section of side panel to brackets.
(3) Install inner side panel (2.A. or 2.B.).
Nov 10/2006
INNER SIDE
PANEL ATTACH
POINTS
OUTER SIDE
PANEL
ATTACH
POINTS
TRIM STRIP
INNER SIDE
PANEL
OUTER SIDE
PANEL
CLIPS
(TYPICAL)
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD, LEFT SIDE)
INNER SIDE
PANEL ATTACH
POINTS
OUTER SIDE
PANEL ATTACH
POINTS
TRIM STRIP
AIR RETURN OUTER SIDE

DIFFUSER PANEL
INNER SIDE
PANEL
CLIPS
(TYPICAL)
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD, RIGHT SIDE)
LAVATORY SIDE PANELS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The baggage compartment is located aft of bulkhead FS587 and extends to the aft pressure bulkhead at
FS621. The following features are included in the baggage compartment:
• Upholstered bulkheads, door, and headliner/side panels
• Flush-mounted dome lights installed in the headliner
• A removable hang-up bar
• Flip-down hang-up bars
• A removable shelf
• A baggage net with quick-disconnect
• A flip-out baggage door-flap protective cover with stainless steel threshold plate
• Rocker switches on the aft side of FS587L bulkhead at floor level to control the baggage lights
and the pylon lights
• A leather pull-down strap to assist in closing the baggage door
• Footman loops and tie-down straps
• A telescopic arm to assist in opening the baggage door from the outside (loose equipment)
• 10-gallon water tank behind a closeout on the right side
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT HEADLINER
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT HEADLINER - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The baggage compartment headliner extends from FS587 to the aft pressure bulkhead and consists of
three sections: right-hand, middle, and left-hand.
The right-hand headliner outboard end is secured in an angle bracket at the top of the water
compartment closeout. The inboard end is secured to a channel assembly at approximately RBL18.
The middle headliner is secured to channel assemblies at approximately RBL18 and LBL18.
The left-hand headliner outboard end fits into a channel support bracket which is fastened to the
airframe. The inboard end is secured to a channel assembly at approximately LBL18.
The right-hand and left-hand headliners are also secured with hook-and-loop strips at the forward and aft
edges for added support. Each headliner contains a dome light, and the middle headliner contains a
smoke detector.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: The baggage compartment headliner consists of three sections: right-hand, middle, and
left-hand.
A. To remove the right-hand headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable lighting circuit breakers (33-33-00).
(2) Remove fasteners securing headliner to channel assembly.
(3) Rotate headliner down and inboard to disengage outboard edge from water compartment
closeout angle bracket and to release hook-and-loop strips.
(4) Disconnect air diffuser duct.
(5) Disconnect wiring to lighting assembly.
B. To remove the middle headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable circuit breakers (26-10-01 and 33-33-00).
(2) Remove fasteners securing headliner to channel assemblies.
(4) Disconnect wiring and air connections to smoke detector.
C. To remove the left-hand headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out applicable lighting circuit breakers (33-33-00).
(2) Remove fasteners securing headliner to brackets at FS610.
(3) Remove fasteners securing headliner to channel assembly.
(4) Remove vertical trim strip at FS589.
(5) Remove center closeout panel at FS621.
(6) Pull headliner down and inboard to release hook-and-loop strips.
(7) Slide headliner up out of channel support.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the right-hand headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Restore electrical connections then position headliner into water compartment closeout
angle bracket.
(2) Install air return duct connection.
(3) Apply pressure to hook-and-loop-attached areas.
(4) Install fasteners securing headliner to channel assembly.
(5) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of headliner
dome light.
B. To install the middle headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Position headliner and restore electrical connections to lighting assembly.
(2) Restore electrical and air connections to smoke detector.
(3) Install fasteners securing headliner to channel assemblies.
• Smoke Detectors, 26-10-01, ADJUSTMENT/TEST

• Headliner dome light
C. To install the left-hand headliner (Figure 401):
(1) Restore electrical connections then position headliner outboard edge into channel support.
(2) Install fasteners securing headliner to channel assembly.
(3) Install fasteners securing headliner to brackets at FS610.
(4) Apply pressure to hook-and-loop-attached areas.
(5) Install FS621 center closeout panel.
(6) Install vertical trim strip at FS589.
(7) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of headliner
dome light.
Nov 10/2006
WATER TANK CHANNEL SMOKE CHANNEL CHANNEL

CLOSEOUT ASSEMBLY DETECTOR ASSEMBLY SUPPORT
FS610 ATTACH
RH HEADLINER MIDDLE LH HEADLINER POINTS
HEADLINER
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT HEADLINER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The following emergency equipment has been installed in the aircraft. See Emergency Equipment
Locations for a floor plan layout.
A. Crash Axe
The crash axe is located behind the pilot’s seat on bulkhead FS280L.
B. Smoke Goggles
Three pairs of smoke goggles, for use with the oxygen masks, are supplied in the cockpit on
bulkhead FS280.
C. Smoke Hoods
Smoke hoods are located on the back of each pilot’s seat.
D. Life Vests
Life vests are provided in the cabin for passenger use in the event of an over-water emergency
landing. They are stowed under each passenger seat and under the divan. A production crew life
vest is located under each pilot’s seat. An additional crew life vest is located in the forward
left-hand wardrobe. Instructions for use of the life vests are found on each vest.
E. First-aid Kit
A first-aid kit for treatment of minor injuries is located in the forward left-hand wardrobe.
F. Emergency Equipment Card
An emergency equipment location card is located in the forward left-hand wardrobe.
G. Flashlights
Two Maglite D-cell size flashlights are installed in the cockpit, one behind each pilot’s seat on the
forward side of bulkhead FS280.
An additional Maglite D-cell-size flashlight is installed in the forward left-hand wardrobe.
H. Emergency Escape Lanyard
An emergency escape lanyard is stowed in a leather pouch and hidden behind the emergency exit
cover. After removing the emergency exit cover, the lanyard is visible inside the wall. The lanyard
is knotted every 12 inches to assist in usage.
I. Additional Equipment
• Life rafts (25-61-01)
• Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) (25-63-04)
• Fire extinguishers (26-20-01)
• Therapeutic oxygen mask and nebulizer (supplied as loose equipment) (35-20-02)
• Portable oxygen bottle (35-30-00)
Nov 10/2006
CREW LIFE VEST CREW LIFE VEST
SMOKE HOOD SMOKE HOOD
CRASH AXE
FLASHLIGHT HALON FIRE EXTINGUISHER
SMOKE GOGGLES FLASHLIGHT
SMOKE GOGGLES (2)
FIRST-AID KIT
FLASHLIGHT
CREW PBE
CREW LIFE VEST
HALON FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE & MASK
BRIEFING CARDS
WATER FIRE EXTINGUISHER
LIFE VEST
(EACH SEAT LOCATION)
THERAPEUTIC
OXYGEN OUTLET
EMERGENCY ROPE
LIFE VESTS
LIFE RAFTS
HALON FIRE
EXTINGUISHERS (2)
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE LIFE VEST

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-602
Air Cruisers Company 25-64-02 P/N 63600-Series Component
Maintenance Manual
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the life vests from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore the life vests per manufacturer Component Maintenance Manual
(Air Cruisers Company 25-64-02).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the life vests to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
2. RESTORE THE SMOKE HOOD

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-604
Essex PB&R Corp. Technical Essex PB&R Pilot Unit Technical Manual
Manual
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the smoke hoods from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore the PBE per manufacturer Manual (Essex PB&R Corp. Technical Manual).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the smoke hoods to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE LIFE VEST

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-601
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the life vests from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of each life vest as follows:
(a) Check the expiration date.
(b) Check the condition of packaging, seal (if applicable) and the life vest for evidence of
damage, abuse, perforations, or any other defects.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the life vests to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
2. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE SMOKE HOOD

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-603
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the smoke hoods from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of each smoke hood as follows:
(b) Check the condition of the packaging, seal, and smoke hood (if not in a sealed
container) for evidence of damage, abuse, perforations, or any other defects.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the smoke hoods to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
3. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE FIRST AID/MEDICAL KIT (DO NOT OPEN IF SEALED)
A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-605
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the first-aid/medical kit(s) from the forward wardrobe and any other locations.
C. Procedure
(1) If sealed, check for expiration date and replace or recondition in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations (if applicable).
(2) If not sealed or seal is broken, inspect as follows:
(a) Check for expiration date and replace or recondition in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations (if applicable).
(b) Check the contents using the included content card and replenish as required.
(c) Reseal the kit with included seals as required.
NOTE: The manufacturer can perform kit restoration and reseal if desired. Contact
manufacturer for additional details.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the first-aid kits to the forward wardrobe and any other locations.
Nov 10/2006
4. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE EMERGENCY EXIT LIFE LINE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-60-60-606
B. Job Set-up
(1) Remove the over-wing emergency exit ditching line from its storage area.
C. Procedure
(1) Do the general visual inspection of the line as follows:
(a) Examine the full length of each line for deterioration, safety of installation, and
damage.
(b) Make sure there is no wear on the outer edges of the line.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the over-wing emergency exit ditching line to its storage area.
Nov 10/2006
LIFE RAFTS
LIFE RAFTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Two life rafts, each containing its own Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT), are carried on the aircraft.
Both are stored under the divan. Instructions for using the life rafts and ELT units are found on the rafts.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LIFE RAFTS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for preparing the life rafts for return to the manufacturer
or an approved facility and for installing the life rafts.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. No special set-up is required.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Before returning a life raft to the manufacturer or an approved facility:
(1) Take height, width, and length measurements of life raft in stored and packed condition.
(2) Include a copy of life raft measurements when returning life raft to manufacturer or approved
facility.
NOTE: The manufacturer or approved facility must repack the life raft to the original size so that it
fits into the designed space and is easily removable.
B. When installing a life raft into aircraft, verify that it is accessible and removable at all times during
flight.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LIFE RAFTS - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE LIFE RAFT

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-61-60-602
Air Cruisers Company 25-62-28 P/N 64413-Series Component
Maintenance Manual
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the life rafts from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore the life rafts per manufacturer CMM (Air Cruisers Company 25-62-28).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the life rafts to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LIFE RAFTS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE LIFE RAFT

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-61-60-601
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the life rafts from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of each life raft as follows:
(b) Check the condition of packaging, seal (if applicable) and the life raft for evidence of
damage, abuse, perforations, or any other defects.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the life rafts to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
406MHZ ELT
2. DESCRIPTION
The Artex 406MHz is a triple frequency ELT transmitter. It has simultaneous transmission capabilities on
121.5MHz, 243MHz, and 406MHz. The manufacturer encodes the ELT serial number, an ID code, and
country code on the 406MHz transmission. This data enables the authorities to quickly contact the
owner/operator of the ELT. The 406MHz transmission is received by the COSPAS/SARSAT satellite
system.
The ELT/NAV interface unit receives latitude/longitude information from the flight management system
and sends it to the ELT transmitter. This information is transmitted as part of the 406.025 MHz satellite
message.
The ELT system consists of a transmitter with built-in battery, an ELT/NAV interface unit, an antenna, a
circuit breaker, a remote switch, and an audio warning (buzzer).
3. LOCATION
The remote switch is located in the cockpit. The transmitter, ELT/NAV interface unit, and buzzer are
located in the aft equipment bay between FS682 and FS700, RBL 22.20, WL118.60. The antenna is
mounted on the RH side of the vertical stabilizer between FS700.00 and FS718.00 between STR2R and
STR3R. The ELT circuit breaker on the pilot’s CB panel provides circuit protection for the remote switch.
4. OPERATION
Operation of the ELT is controlled by the remote switch. This switch has two positions. In the ON position
the unit will broadcast on all three frequencies. In the ARM position the unit will be activated by a change
in velocity of 4.5 +/- 0.5 fps. Table 1 lists applicable documents.
Component Manual/Document
Artex 406MHz ELT Artex Installation and Operation Manual Document Number 570-5000 Rev -
Artex ELT/NAV Interface Artex Installation and Operation Manual Document Number 570-4602 Rev D
General CL-600 1A11/2A12/2B16 Wiring Manuals
CL-600 1A11/2A12/2B16 Maintenance Manuals
BAS63120049 Ground Test Procedure - Artex 406MHZ ELT
Wiring Diagrams and BAS63021223 W/D EL Artex 406MHz ELT
Installation Drawings TM432560-02 Switch Install, ELT, Cockpit
TM432560-03 Antenna Install - ELT Aft Fuse
TM432560-04 ELT Install-Artex 406
TM432560-05 Panel Mod Install - ELT/CVR Mic Control
TM432560-06 Nav Interface Install - Aft Equipment Bay
Antenna Challenger Nondestructive Testing Manual, Section 9
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
TABLE 1
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 1
Dec 14/01
NAV INTERFACE
REMOTE SWITCH ELT ANTENNA

(TYPICAL)
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 2
Dec 14/01
REMOTE
SWITCH
COCKPIT EQUIPMENT LOCATION (TYPICAL)
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 3
Dec 14/01
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 4
Dec 14/01
406MHZ ELT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5. REMOVAL
CAUTION: BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE OR INSTALL ANY UNITS, TURN ELECTRICAL
POWER OFF.
A. To remove the ELT, buzzer, and/or NAV interface unit:
(1) Locate unit in aft equipment room.
(2) Remove hardware securing unit to mounting bracket.
(3) Disconnect antenna lead and remove unit.
(4) If the unit requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
• Return the unit to manufacturer or an authorized repair facility.
B. To remove the antenna:
(1) Use a phenolic scraper to remove fillet seal around antenna base.
(2) Remove hardware securing antenna to aircraft structure.
(3) Carefully lift antenna sufficient to gain access to antenna lead.
(4) Disconnect antenna lead and remove antenna.
(5) If the unit requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
• Return the unit to manufacturer or an authorized repair facility.
6. INSTALLATION
A. To install the ELT:
(1) Connect antenna lead to unit.
(2) Secure unit to mounting bracket with correct fasteners.
(3) Perform applicable test per ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
B. To install the buzzer and/or NAV interface unit:
(1) Secure unit to mounting bracket with correct fasteners.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 401
Dec 14/01
C. To install the antenna:
(1) Clean antenna and aircraft mating surfaces in accordance with procedures outlined in
CL600-1A11/2A12/2B16 Structural Repair Manual.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE CONDUCTIVE FINISH FROM ANTENNA BASE PLATE.
(2) Remove any sealant from base plate connector and holes.
(3) Ensure that antenna base plate and aircraft mating surface are clean and bright.
NOTE: Take care not to make depressions which would decrease the contact area.
(4) Position antenna at appropriate location on aircraft and connect antenna lead.
(5) Secure antenna to aircraft structure with attaching hardware.
(6) Check electrical resistance between antenna and aircraft structure. Resistance shall not be
greater than the value specified in CL600-1A11/2A12/2B16 AMM, Section 51-80-00.
(7) Fillet seal around base of antenna and seal attaching hardware in accordance with proce-
dures outlined in CL600-1A11/2A12/2B16 Structural Repair Manual.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 402
Dec 14/01
406MHZ ELT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
7. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying the proper operation of the Artex
406MHz ELT for Canadair CL-600 1A11/2A12/2B16 aircraft.
NOTE: The following test procedure requires qualified operators using approved aircraft operating pro-
cedures.
(1) Equipment
• AM Radio
• SARSAT Beacon Test Set (Artex Part Number 453-0131)
(2) Facilities
• External power
C. Reference Documents
(1) Artex Installation and Operation Manual, Document Number 570-5000 Rev -
(2) Artex Installation and Operation Manual, Document Number 570-4602 Rev D
8. TEST SET-UP
A. Visually inspect the ELT and verify that it is labeled with the Serial Number, Country Code, and a
Hex ID Code. Verify that the date of manufacturer is within one year of the installation date.
B. Apply external power to the aircraft.
9. TEST
A. Perform the following tests within five minutes after the hour, and notify the appropriate authorities
that a test is in progress.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW A TEST TRANSMISSION TO EXCEED 15 SECONDS! After 15

seconds, the COSPAS/SARSAT satellite considers the transmission to be a valid dis-
tress signal!
B. Engage the ELT circuit breaker.
NOTE: The circuit breaker runs the indicator light. The ELT itself runs on internal batteries.
C. Hold an inexpensive AM broadcast receiver about six inches from the antenna and tune it to a rel-
atively clear frequency. Tune a receiver (preferably in another aircraft) to 121.5MHz.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 501
Dec 14/01
D. In the cockpit, momentarily actuate the ELT switch from the ARM position to the ON position.
(1) Verify that the cockpit mounted indicator light flashes.
(2) Verify that the buzzer in the tail cone sounds.
(3) Verify that a sweeping signal is heard in both the AM radio and the aircraft radio.
E. After approximately three sweeps, return the switch to the ARM position.
(1) Verify that the cockpit indicator light illuminates steadily for approximately one second and
then is extinguished.
(a) A flashing light, other than described above, after the switch is returned to the ARM
position, is a failure indication.
• One flash indicates that the G-switch loop is open.

• Three flashes indicate that there is a 406.25MHz transmitter problem.
• Five flashes indicate that there is no navigation data present or that no NAV inter-
face unit is installed.
• Seven flashes indicate a battery problem.
NOTE: There is a priority assigned to the failure indications in the sequence indicated
above. The first indicated failure must be resolved before a subsequent failure will
be indicated.
(2) Verify that the buzzer ceases.
F. NAV Interface Unit Test
(1) Verify the position data and 24 bit programming by using the SARSAT beacon test set in
accordance with the Digital Message Verification test outlined in the ELT/NAV Interface
Installation and Operation Manual (Artex Part Number 570-4602 Rev D). Verify that the 15-
digit hex code displayed by the SARSAT test set matches the 15-digit hex code displayed on
the ELT.
G. Conduct any other tests deemed necessary.
10. TEST COMPLETION

A. Remove all equipment used for testing and clear area of all debris.
B. If any unit fails any test, remove and proceed as follows:
• Return unit to manufacturer or an authorized repair facility for troubleshooting and

repair.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. A)
25-62-00 Page 502
Dec 14/01
406MHZ ELT - INSPECTION/CHECK
11. INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Refer to the applicable vendor manual for servicing, cleaning, operational
checkouts/adjustments or any repair of the equipment that is required.
The information in this section is presented to help personnel perform the necessary tasks.
As much information as deemed necessary to achieve the described tasks has been given. If additional
information is necessary, use the Challenger manuals for purposes of illustration, access, preparation,
etc.
A. Purpose
(1) To perform an inspection of the ELT antenna fuselage penetrations.
(2) To perform an inspection of the ELT unit.
(1) Equipment
• A light source and magnification of 10(x) power is required.
(2) Facilities
• No special facilities are required.
12. JOB SET-UP

A. Open and lock out the ELT circuit breaker.
B. Refer to Canadair Non-Destructive Testing Manual Part 9 - General and Canadair Structural
Repair Manual as necessary.
13. PROCEDURE
A. ELT Antenna Fuselage Penetrations
NOTE: The ELT antenna fuselage penetrations are to be inspected at the interval given in
document BAS-63010055-AWL-5.
(1) Remove antenna per REMOVAL/INSTALLATION, so penetrations under antenna footprint

are visible.
NOTE: Coaxial connection does not have to be broken.
NOTE: No permanent fasteners need to be removed unless damage is detected.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. B)
25-62-00 Page 601
Feb 12/05
(2) Visually inspect ELT antenna penetrations.
(a) Penetration types are:
• Fastener holes filled with expanding fasteners

• Open holes used for mounting antennas
• Antenna connector routing holes
(b) Any evidence of cracking and corrosion is grounds for rejection.
• If fatigue cracks or stress corrosion are detected, the damage is to be

repaired per the FAA-approved structural repair manual.
• If the damage falls outside the methods called out in the FAA-approved
structural repair manual, then the repair is to be accomplished by an
authorized repair facility; and the engineering required for the repair must
be FAA-approved.
(3) Reinstall the ELT antenna per REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
B. ELT Unit
NOTE: The ELT unit is to be inspected at the interval given in document BAS-63010055-SM-5.
(1) Locate the ELT unit in the aft equipment room.
(2) The ELT unit is to be inspected in accordance with regulations from the applicable regulatory
authority following the procedures in Section 4 of the Artex Installation and Operation
Manual, Document Number 570-5000 Rev A, or the latest approved revision.
NOTE: Removal and installation of the ELT unit is required. Refer to

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
(3) Close access to the ELT unit.
14. JOB COMPLETION

A. Return aircraft to its initial condition.
BAS-63010055-SMM-5 (Rev. B)
25-62-00 Page 602
Feb 12/05
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A crew member Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) is located in the forward left-hand wardrobe. The
PBE consists of a heat-resistant hood with neck seal, two attached 18-liter oxygen bottles, and a carbon
dioxide control device.
2. OPERATION
When donned, the PBE incorporates a silicone rubber neck seal that will seal around the neck and
shoulders of the crew member. Tuck all hair inside the PBE upon donning. Pull the shoulder/neck seal
completely down over the shoulders.
To activate, sharply pull the two oxygen bottles apart from one another so that each valve’s retaining
lever pulls free of the valve. A whoosh sound will accompany the release of the first bottle’s oxygen. For
the PBE to be functioning correctly, both bottles must be releasing their contents. A green LED indicator
just below eye level on the left side of the hood (visible to wearer) will illuminate.
WARNING: IF THE GREEN LED INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITHIN TWO TO THREE
SECONDS, THE PBE IS NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY AND MUST BE REMOVED.
NOTE: All hair must be tucked within the PBE to ensure a good seal. Failure to completely tuck in all
hair will result in a loss of oxygen, thus decreasing the performance of the PBE.
A. Service/End of Service Indicator
(1) The green LED indicator also serves as a Service/End of Service indicator. When oxygen is
flowing correctly inside the PBE, the LED indicator just below eye level on the left side of the
hood (visible to wearer) will be illuminated. When the oxygen supply has been exhausted,
the indicator will begin flashing an alternating red/green color. This indicates that the service
life of the product has been exhausted, and the PBE must be removed.
WARNING: IF THE LED INDICATOR SHOWS AN ALTERNATING RED/GREEN COLOR, THE

PBE MUST BE REMOVED, AS THE BOTTLES ARE NO LONGER SUPPLYING THE
NEEDED OXYGEN.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE PBE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-63-60-602
Essex PB&R Corp. PMR-01 User Reference and Procedures Manual
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore the PBE per manufacturer Manual (Essex PB&R Corp. PMR-01).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the PBE to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE PBE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 25-63-60-601
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the PBE from all installed locations in the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of each PBE as follows:
(b) Check the condition of the packaging, seal, and PBE (if not in a sealed container) for
evidence of damage, abuse, perforations, or any other defects.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the PBE to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Floor/Catwalk Assembly
A floor/catwalk assembly has been installed forward of the equipment compartment access door.
B. Right Side Shelf Assembly
A shelf assembly is located on the right side in the aft equipment compartment. It is located at
approximately FS682, RBL15. A placard indicates maximum weight capacity.
C. Storage Box
A two-compartment storage box for storage of the nose-wheel tire assembly and miscellaneous
tools has been installed. Each compartment has a maximum weight capacity which is listed on the
storage box. Lashing straps and latches secure the hinged doors in the closed position.
D. Main Wheel/Tire Storage
Storage provisions for a spare main tire are located on top of the storage box. The tire is held in
place with two straps and four tire-stops. Deflate tire to 10 psi before securing to storage box.
E. Removable Maintenance Ladder
Storage provisions for a maintenance ladder (supplied as loose equipment) are located on top of
the right side shelf assembly. These provisions consist of a ladder support assembly and two
straps for securing the ladder.
F. Spare APU Electronic Control Unit
See 49-60-10 for information.
Nov 10/2006
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD
FS FS
621.00 RH SHELF 700.00
REF ASSEMBLY REF
LADDER STORAGE
(PROVISIONS)
AFT EQUIPMENT
COMPARTMENT
FLOOR/CATWALK DOOR
ASSEMBLY
STORAGE BOX
MAIN
WHEEL/TIRE
STORAGE
(PROVISIONS)
SPARE APU ECU

(PROVISIONS)
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT MODIFICATIONS
Nov 10/2006
THERMAL/ACOUSTIC INSULATION
THERMAL/ACOUSTIC INSULATION - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A sophisticated soundproofing and thermal insulation package has been installed in the aircraft. It has
been optimized to provide a suitable passenger environment at a minimum weight. The package on this
aircraft consists of the following:
A. Fuselage Skin in the Cabin Area (including doors)
Individual blankets, consisting of layers of fiberglass insulation and layers of polyimide foam
contained within a covering of reinforced polyester film, are installed adjacent to the fuselage skin,
fitting in between the frames and stringers.
A foam skin-damping treatment is also installed in some areas. It is a thin layer of foam, backed
with a thin aluminum sheet, attached to the fuselage skin using a pressure-sensitive adhesive. In
the areas where skin damping is applied, insulation bags are installed over the skin-damping
treatment.
B. Interior Components
Cabinets, bulkheads, and cabin shell are treated with a variety of felts, foams, etc.
C. FS621 Pressure Bulkhead
The FS621 bulkhead is treated with self-adhesive damping materials.
D. Cabin Floor
The bottom of the floorboards and the fuel tank skins have a foam skin-damping treatment added
in some areas. Cabin carpet and carpet pad are also a part of the insulation system.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
THERMAL/ACOUSTIC INSULATION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Removal and installation of the insulation blankets are self-evident. Care should be taken to restore any
removed blanket to its original location and orientation. Failure to properly reinstall a blanket will reduce
insulation performance and could create a corrosion hazard due to misaligned drain holes.
Removal of self-adhesive foams is not recommended and should only be attempted when absolutely
necessary to investigate or repair structural damage. Use of improper scraping tools will damage skins.
CAUTION: SELF-ADHESIVE FOAMS HAVE LOW CHEMICAL RESISTANCE TO HYDRAULIC FLUID

EXPOSURE. THEY ARE NOT INSTALLED IN AREAS THAT ARE PRONE TO HYDRAULIC
LEAKAGE AND SHOULD NOT BE ADDED IN SUCH AREAS.
2. INSPECTION/CHECK
Inspect blankets for physical damage and moisture retention. Damaged blankets must be repaired or
replaced, depending on condition.
Blankets which are retaining moisture shall be replaced and should be reported to the Bombardier
Completion Center engineering department.
Further inspection for corrosion of adjacent structure must be performed if any insulation is found to be
retaining moisture.
Self-adhesive foams should be inspected for deterioration of the foam if they have been exposed to
hydraulic fluid, fuel, or other chemicals.
3. REPAIRS
Damaged aluminum covering on skin-damping foam may be repaired by applying suitable aluminum foil
tape.
Damaged outer covering film on insulation blankets may be repaired using Orcon Corp. Orcotape PN
OT-57CW or other tape meeting Bombardier Aerospace Material Specification BAMS 535-004, Type 1.
Take care to provide the same vent and drain holes as found in the original covering.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 26 - FIRE PROTEC-
TION
CHAPTER 26 - FIRE PROTECTION

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
26-10-01 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
26-10-01 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
26-10-01 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
26-10-01 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
26-20-01 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
26-20-01 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
26-20-01 601 Nov 10/2006

602 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 26 - FIRE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SMOKE DETECTORS 26-10-01

Operation 1
Servicing
Restore the Smoke Detectors 301
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 26-20-01

Servicing
Restore the Portable Fire Extinguisher 301
Inspection/Check
Functional Test of the Portable Fire Extinguisher 601


SMOKE DETECTORS
SMOKE DETECTORS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A smoke detector has been installed in the lavatory headliner. The production-installed smoke detector
located in the baggage compartment headliner has been replaced with the same Walter Kidde smoke
detector part number as installed in the lavatory. Each smoke detector functions automatically when
smoke is detected. Both smoke detectors are interfaced to Data Concentrator Unit 1 (DCU 1) and
DCU 2. Each smoke detector activates EICAS displayed messages, illuminates MASTER WARNING
annunciators, and initiates an aural voice warning alert. Circuit breaker CBP2 K-4, BAG LAV SMOKE,
provides circuit protection for both smoke detectors.
2. OPERATION
Pressing the SMOKE DET TEST button on the auxiliary annunciator panel, for approximately two
seconds, sends 28VDC to each smoke detector 28VDC TEST IN input, which activates both smoke
detectors. Each smoke detector then sends a 28VDC WARNING OUTPUT signal to test the warning
outputs of DCU 1 and DCU 2. The lavatory smoke detector activates the SMOKE TOILET message on
EICAS, both red MASTER WARNING annunciators, and the aural "SMOKE" voice warning. The
baggage compartment smoke detector activates the SMOKE BAGGAGE BAY message on EICAS, both
red MASTER WARNING annunciators, and the aural "SMOKE" voice warning.
CABIN CALL SMOKE

DET
COCKPIT CABIN
CABIN LAV
TEMP RESET TEST
ENTRY
LIGHTS
ON
OFF
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
SMOKE DETECTORS - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 26-10-60-601
Kidde Aerospace Smoke Detector Component Maintenance Manual
Assembly 473597-2 26-10-69
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the smoke detector(s) per Removal/Installation.
(2) Clean the smoke detector(s) per the manufacturer CMM (Kidde Aerospace 473597-2
26-10-69).
(3) Install the smoke detector(s) per Removal/Installation.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
SMOKE DETECTORS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a lavatory smoke detector:
(1) Open and lock out associated circuit breaker(s) listed in DESCRIPTION/LOCATION.
(2) Remove aft lavatory headliner panel (25-49-03).
(3) Remove fasteners securing the smoke detector closeout to the headliner panel.
(4) Remove smoke detector closeout.
(5) Disconnect wiring to smoke detector.
(6) Remove fasteners securing smoke detector to the closeout panel.
(7) Remove smoke detector.
B. To remove a baggage compartment smoke detector:
(1) Open and lock out associated circuit breaker(s) listed in DESCRIPTION/LOCATION.
(2) Remove fasteners securing smoke detector to the closeout panel.
(3) Disconnect wiring to smoke detector.
(4) Remove smoke detector.
2. INSTALLATION
NOTE: Before installing any smoke detector, perform the following per the manufacturer’s CMM:
• External and Internal Inspection

• Functional Test
• Insulation Resistance Test
• Smoke Detector Calibration
• Smoke Test
A. To install a lavatory smoke detector:
(1) Position smoke detector and secure with fasteners to the closeout panel.
(2) Connect wiring to smoke detector.
(3) Position closeout and secure with fasteners to the headliner.
(4) Install aft lavatory headliner panel (25-49-03).
(5) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and check for proper operation per
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install a baggage compartment smoke detector:
(1) Connect wiring to smoke detector.
(2) Position smoke detector and secure with fasteners.
(3) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and check for proper operation per
ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
SMOKE DETECTORS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the baggage
compartment and lavatory smoke detectors.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the baggage compartment smoke detector in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center
Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-291, revision (C), or the latest approved
revision.
B. Test the lavatory smoke detector, if installed, in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center
Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-292, revision (B), or the latest approved
revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Five portable fire extinguishers are located in the aircraft. Table 1 lists the components and their
locations. See vendor documentation and instructions on bottle for operation instructions.

Halon fire extinguisher On forward bulkhead in forward LH wardrobe
Halon fire extinguisher (2) On slide-out drawer in aft LH storage cabinet
Halon fire extinguisher (Production-supplied) In cockpit on FS280R bulkhead behind copilot’s seat
Water fire extinguisher Aft side of bulkhead FS350L
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
NOTE: Please become familiar with all operating instructions contained on the extinguisher’s
nameplate.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 26-20-60-604
Flag Fire Equipment Component Maintenance Manual (3.5 lbs.
HAL-035-AVH extinguisher)
Kidde Aerospace 466090 Component Maintenance Manual (9 lbs.
26-21-39 extinguisher)
26-20-20 liquid extinguisher)
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain fire extinguishers from aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore each portable fire extinguisher per manufacturer CMM (Flag Fire Equipment
HAL-035-AVH, Kidde Aerospace 466090 26-21-39, and Kidde Aerospace 892480
26-20-20).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return fire extinguishers to aircraft.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. FUNCTIONAL TEST OF THE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 26-20-60-603
Flag Fire Equipment Component Maintenance Manual (3.5 lbs.
HAL-035-AVH extinguisher)
26-21-39 extinguisher)
26-20-20 liquid extinguisher)
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain fire extinguishers from aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Do a weight check of the each portable fire extinguisher per manufacturer CMM (Flag Fire
Equipment HAL-035-AVH, Kidde Aerospace 466090 26-21-39, and Kidde Aerospace
892480 26-20-20).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return fire extinguishers to aircraft.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
28-41-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
28-41-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FUELING PANEL 28-41-00

Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501


FUELING PANEL
FUELING PANEL - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A refuel/defuel panel has been installed in the cockpit at FS280R. Refer to the Challenger Aircraft
Maintenance Manual for operation, maintenance instructions, and removal/installation instructions. For
Ground Test Procedures for the fueling panel system refer to ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FUELING PANEL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the fueling panel
system.
(1) Equipment
• Digital Voltmeter
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
A. Apply external power to the aircraft.
B. Verify that all circuit breakers are in on all circuit breaker panels, except those necessary for
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test fueling panel system per Aircraft Maintenance Manual section 28-25 (Same as Wing
Refuel/Defuel Panel) in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure,
document number TE-GTP-283, revision (A), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove external power unless needed for further tests.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
30-75-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
30-75-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WATER SYSTEM FREEZE PROTECTION 30-75-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401


WATER SYSTEM FREEZE PROTECTION
WATER SYSTEM FREEZE PROTECTION - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Ribbon heaters prevent water from freezing in the supply and drain lines. Additional system components
include, a production-installed drain mast heater, water tank heaters and circuit breakers. The ribbon
heaters are installed spirally around the water lines. They are secured to the water lines with fiberglass
tape and covered with insulation. Heater blankets, on the storage tank, prevent potable water from
freezing in the tank. Table 1 lists the components and their locations. The drain mast, water line, water
tank, and drain line heaters are powered by 115VAC CABIN BUS 2.

Drain line heater HR902HR From galley to overwing exit
Drain line heater HR903HR From overwing exit to drain mast
Drain line heater HR908HR From lav sink drain to drain mast
Supply line heater HR901HR From galley to overwing exit
Supply line heater HR903HR From overwing exit to FS591R
Supply line heater HR905HR From water tank to lav
Tank heater blanket HR911HR Water tank at FS589R
Tank heater blanket HR912HR Water tank at FS605R
WTR HTRS TANK circuit breaker CBP2 D-5
WTR HTRS LINE circuit breaker CBP2 D-6
WATER LINE HEATER COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The water line, water tank, and drain mast heaters are powered by 115VAC CABIN BUS 2, whenever
aircraft power is available and the cabin bus disconnect switch is selected to the active position
(24-70-00).
Thermal switches on each ribbon heater turn the heaters on at 40°F and off at 60°F. A thermal switch in
heater blanket HR911HR turns both heaters on at 55°F and off at 60°F. A thermostat switch in the drain
mast, turns the heater on at approximately 80°F and off at approximately 160°F.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
WATER SYSTEM FREEZE PROTECTION - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a water line ribbon heater (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out associated circuit breaker listed in Table 1.
(2) Remove necessary panels/cabinets so that the ribbon-heated line is accessible.
(3) Purge line of water.
(4) Disconnect line and remove from aircraft.
(5) Remove insulation and ribbon heater from water line by removing tape.
(6) Check lines for obvious damage and replace worn and defective parts.
B. To remove a water tank blanket heater (Figure 402):
(2) Gain access to water tank.
(3) Remove electrical connections.
(4) Remove water tank (38-10-00).
(5) Loosen fasteners and remove blanket heater.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a water line ribbon heater (Figure 401):
(1) Install heater tape on entire length of supply and drain lines with a minimum of six turns per
foot with no overlap. Ensure that thermostat sensor is in contact with line. On drain lines, ensure
that thermostat is mounted on end away from heated drain mast.
(2) Secure ribbon heater with fiberglass tape (Hi Temp Materials P/N 340-7S-1) approximately
every 6 inches.
(3) Insulate with 2-3 inch wide strips of fiberglass insulation (MicroLite P/N BMS 8-48R, 1" thick)
folded around lines. Secure insulation with fiberglass tape.
(4) Completely wrap insulation and fiberglass tape with Orco tape (Orco P/N OT-7; alternately
Orco film AN-18R may be used).
(5) Install insulated line in aircraft.
(6) Test supply and drain lines (38-10-00).
(7) Restore power per AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801 and verify that line is heating.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Install panels/cabinets removed for access to ribbon-heated line.
B. To install a water tank blanket heater (Figure 402):
(1) Position blanket heater and tighten laces.
(2) Reconnect electrical connections.
(3) Install the water tank (38-10-00).
(4) Restore power per AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801.
(5) Activate system and check proper operation (38-10-00).
ORCO TAPE
FIBERGLASS
TAPE
THERMOSTAT
INSULATIVE
MATERIAL
RIBBON HEATER
WATER LINE
WATER LINE HEATERS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
WATER TANK
HEATER LACES
BLANKET HEATERS
WATER TANK BLANKET HEATER (TYPICAL) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING
AND RECORDING SYSTEMS
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
31-60-10 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
31-60-10 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COCKPIT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PANELS 31-60-10

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501


COCKPIT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PANELS
COCKPIT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PANELS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
The production auxiliary annunciator panel has been replaced with a new panel which adds the following
new switches:
• CABIN TEMP - COCKPIT/CABIN
• CALL RESET - CABIN/LAV
• ENTRY LIGHTS - ON/OFF
• SMOKE DET TEST
The CABIN TEMP switch allows the cockpit crew to transfer control of the cabin temperature to the cabin
switch panels. The CALL RESET switch illuminates when a CALL switch is pressed in the cabin or
lavatory and allows the cockpit crew to reset the call system. The ENTRY LIGHTS switch allows the
cockpit crew to turn the entry lights on or off. The SMOKE DET switch allows the cockpit crew to test the
lavatory and baggage compartment smoke detectors.
A new annunciator dim/test unit has been installed to provide additional power and test functionality for
the backlighting of switches installed in the cockpit during the completion process. The
production-installed IND LTS DIM/BRT switch provides dim/test control of the original aircraft system
and the added annunciator dim/test unit.
2. LOCATION
Table 1 lists the operational components and their locations.

Annunciator dim/test unit Forward avionics compartment, at FS235R
Auxiliary Annunciator Panel Cockpit center pedestal
IND LTS DIM/BRT toggle switch Miscellaneous Lights Panel on cockpit overhead panel
AUX ANNUN circuit breaker CBP2 P-8
COCKPIT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PANELS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
3. OPERATION
Operation of the CABIN TEMP switch is discussed in 21-61-18. The CALL RESET switch is discussed in
23-31-50. The ENTRY LIGHTS switch is discussed in 33-10-00. The SMOKE DET switch is discussed in
26-10-01.
The IND LTS DIM/BRT switch sends a signal to the annunciator dim/test unit, which changes the
intensity of the backlighting for the cockpit panels.
Nov 10/2006
CABIN CALL SMOKE

DET
COCKPIT CABIN
CABIN LAV
TEMP RESET TEST
ENTRY
LIGHTS
ON
OFF
MISC LTS IND OVHD

BOARD CABIN LTS
NORM DIM
ON BRT
ON/OFF
EXTERNAL LTS
NAV BEACON LOGO WING INSP
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON
MISCELLANEOUS LIGHTS PANEL
Nov 10/2006
COCKPIT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PANELS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the auxiliary
annunciator system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
B. Close all circuit breakers applicable to annunciator operation.
3. TEST
A. Test auxiliary annunciator system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number TE-GTP-238, revision (A), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove external power unless needed for further tests.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTING

2 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
33 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006 33-24-00 401 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 33-24-00 501 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006
33-05-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 33-25-50 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
33-05-00 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 33-25-50 401 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
33-10-00 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 33-26-00 1 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
33-26-00 401 Nov 10/2006
33-10-00 401 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006 403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
33-21-02 1 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006 33-32-00 1 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
33-33-00 1 Nov 10/2006
33-21-02 401 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
33-37-01 1 Nov 10/2006
33-21-02 501 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006
33-37-03 1 Nov 10/2006
33-21-08 1 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
33-37-07 1 Nov 10/2006
33-22-01 1 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006 33-41-00 1 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
33-22-20 1 Nov 10/2006 33-45-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006

33-45-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
33-46-01 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
33-46-01 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
33-51-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
33-51-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
33-51-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
503 Nov 10/2006
504 Nov 10/2006

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COCKPIT LIGHTING 33-05-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
ENTRY LIGHTING 33-10-00

Operation 2
Removal 401
Installation 401
INDIRECT LIGHTS 33-21-02

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT LIGHTING 33-21-08

Operation 1
FLOOR ACCENT LIGHTS 33-22-01

Operation 1
READING/TABLE LIGHTS 33-22-20

Operation 1

ORDINANCE SIGNS 33-24-00

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Ordinance Signs 501
AFT LAVATORY LIGHTING 33-25-50

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
GALLEY LIGHTING 33-26-00

Operation 2
Removal 401
Installation 402
PYLON LIGHTS 33-32-00

Operation 1
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS 33-33-00

Operation 1
EXTERIOR COMPARTMENT LIGHTS 33-37-01

Operation 1
AVIONICS COMPARTMENT LIGHTS 33-37-03

AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT DOOR SWITCH 33-37-07

Operation 1

LANDING/TAXI LIGHTS 33-41-00

AIRSTAIR/BOARDING LIGHTS 33-45-00

Operation 1
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
BEACON LIGHTS 33-46-01

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
EMERGENCY LIGHTING 33-51-00

Description 1
Location 1
Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Interior Emergency Lights 501
Operational Test of the Interior Emergency Lights Battery Packs 503


COCKPIT LIGHTING
COCKPIT LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Chart Holder Lights
Two chart holders have been installed on the pilot and copilot side walls. Table 1 lists the
components and their locations.

Bombardier lighted chart holders (2) Pilot and copilot side walls
Rheostat controls (2) Pilot and copilot side walls
CHRT HLDR circuit breaker CBP1 G-11
CHART HOLDER LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
B. Map Lights
Incandescent variable-dimming map lighting has been installed to provide additional reading light
for the cockpit crew. Table 2 lists the components and their locations.

Incandescent lamps (2) Cockpit overhead panel, one above each seat
Power supplies PS1LD and PS2LD In bulkheads FS280L and FS280R, respectively,
above circuit breaker panels
Rheostat controls (2) Cockpit overhead panel, one above each seat
PLT OVHD MAP LT circuit breaker CBP1 P-4
CPLT OVHD MAP LT circuit breaker CBP2 N-12
COCKPIT MAP LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 2
2. OPERATION
A. Chart Holder Lights
Rotate the rheostat controls clockwise to send power to the lamps. The greater the clockwise
rotation, the more power is sent to the lamps, and the brighter the light becomes.
B. Map Lights
Rotate the rheostat controls clockwise to send power to the power supples, which then power the
lamps. The greater the clockwise rotation, the more power the power supples send to the lamps,
and the brighter the light becomes.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
COCKPIT LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a map light power supply (Figure 401):
(2) Remove access panel.
(3) Disconnect wiring from power supply.
(4) Remove fasteners securing power supply to bulkhead.
(5) Remove power supply.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a map light power supply (Figure 401):
(1) Position power supply and secure with fasteners to bulkhead.
(3) Install access panel.
(4) Check on/off and dimmer functions of lighting.
Nov 10/2006
POWER
SUPPLIES
BULKHEAD FS280
COCKPIT MAP LIGHTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY LIGHTING
ENTRY LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Entry Headliner Lights
Two dome-light assemblies have been installed to provide general lighting for the entry area. An
Entry Lights ON/OFF switch has been added to provide additional control of the entry lights from
the cockpit. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.
NOTE: The aft dome-light assembly houses a second lamp which is part of the emergency
lighting system (33-51-00). The forward dome-light assembly houses a second lamp
which is part of the boarding light system (33-45-00).

DOME LIGHT switch Forward Wardrobe Switch Panel
Entry lights ON/OFF switch Auxiliary annunciator panel
Incandescent lamps (2) In forward and aft sections of entry headliner
ENTRY AREA circuit breaker CBPG-3
ENTRY HEADLINER LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
B. Jumpseat Light
A variable-dimming lamp has been installed to provide light for the jumpseat occupant. Table 2
lists the components and their locations.

Bright/dim controller WCU4 Outboard of forward wardrobe
Incandescent lamp In forward section of entry headliner
JUMPSEAT LIGHT Switch Forward wardrobe header
JUMPSEAT LIGHT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 2
Nov 10/2006
C. Forward Wardrobe Light
A dome-light assembly containing has been installed to provide light in the forward wardrobe.
Component Location
Incandescent lamp In forward wardrobe at top of main storage compartment
WARD ROBE LIGHT switch Forward Wardrobe Switch Panel
FORWARD WARDROBE LIGHT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 3
2. OPERATION
A. Entry Headliner Lights
Press the DOME LIGHT switch to energize a relay in the switch panel, sending power to the
lamps. Press the switch again to de-energize the relay, removing power from the lamps.
The ENTRY LIGHTS switch sends momentary ground signals to the Forward Wardrobe Switch
Panel, jumpseat light bright/dim control, and the cabin management system Cabin Control Module
1 (CCM 1). These signals turn the jumpseat light, the entry area dome lights, and the forward
wardrobe light on and off.
B. Jumpseat Light
Press the JUMPSEAT LIGHT Switch to send a signal to the bright/dim controller, turning on the
lamp at low intensity. Press and hold the switch to send a continuous signal to the bright/dim
controller and increase its voltage output, thereby increasing the brightness of the lamp. Release
the switch; then press and hold again to decrease the voltage output from the bright/dim controller,
dimming the lamp. Momentarily press the switch again to turn off the lamp.
C. Forward Wardrobe Light
Press the WARD ROBE LIGHT switch to energize a relay in the switch panel, sending power to
the lamp. Press the switch again to de-energize the relay, removing power from the lamp.
Nov 10/2006
WARD
AIRSTAIR ROBE DOME
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
FORWARD WARDROBE SWITCH PANEL
JUMPSEAT
LIGHT
JUMPSEAT LIGHT SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTRY LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
NOTE: See 20-12-00 for lamp replacement instructions.
A. To remove jumpseat light bright/dim controller WCU4:
(2) Remove forward wardrobe outboard closeouts.
(3) Disconnect wiring from controller.
(4) Remove fasteners securing controller to wardrobe.
(5) Remove controller.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install jumpseat light bright/dim controller WCU4:
(1) Position controller and secure with fasteners.
(2) Restore electrical connections to controller.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of jumpseat light.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
INDIRECT LIGHTS
INDIRECT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Fluorescent upwash and downwash lighting is installed in the headliner and the Passenger Service Units
(PSU) to provide indirect cabin lighting. Control of the components listed in Table 1 is managed by the
cabin management system Cabin Control Module 1 (CCM 1) (23-90-00). Table 1 lists the components
and their locations.

CABIN DNWASH LIGHTS switches (2) Galley and VIP Switch Panels
CABIN UPWASH LIGHTS switches (2) Galley and VIP Switch Panels
CABIN NORM/ON switch Miscellaneous Lights Panel
Dimming modules PS721LR and PS722LR Lower galley equipment tray
Lamps (20) Headliner and lower PSU
Power supplies (20) In PSU
Relays K700LR, K701LR, K702LR, and K703LR Lower galley equipment tray
Resistors (2) Adjacent to relays K702LR and K703LR
UPR CABIN LTS circuit breaker CBP1 C-12
CABIN LTS CONT circuit breaker CBP1 E-14
LOWER CABIN LTS circuit breaker CBPG-32
INDIRECT LIGHTING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The CABIN UPWASH LIGHTS and CABIN DNWASH LIGHTS switches on the Galley and VIP Switch
Panels have identical functions. Press any switch to turn on the associated lights. A second press
changes the intensity. To turn the lights off, press a third time.
The switch outputs are sent to CCM 1 via the cabin management data bus. Relays K700LR and K701LR
control ON/OFF switching for the upwash and downwash lights, respectively. Relays K702LR and
K703LR control the BRIGHT/DIM function for the upwash and downwash lights, respectively. Light
intensity is varied when CCM 1 switches a resistor in and out of the dimmer sense lines.
The CABIN NORM/ON switch on the Miscellaneous Lights Panel manually turns the upwash lights on
bright.
Refer to 24-70-00 for upwash lighting operation in the event of a utility bus power loss.
Nov 10/2006

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
MISC LTS IND OVHD

BOARD CABIN LTS
NORM DIM
ON BRT
ON/OFF
EXTERNAL LTS
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON
Nov 10/2006
FS UPWASH LIGHTS FS
560.31 355.45
REF REF
DOWNWASH LIGHTS
INDIRECT LIGHTING
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
INDIRECT LIGHTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a power supply:
(2) Remove PSU covers in power supply area (25-26-20).
(4) Remove fasteners securing power supply.
B. To remove a dimming module (Figure 401):
(2) Remove applicable drawers from lower galley.
(3) Disconnect wiring from module.
(4) Remove fasteners securing module.
(5) Remove module.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a power supply:
(1) Position power supply and secure with fasteners.
(4) Close PSU.
Nov 10/2006
B. To install a dimming module (Figure 401):
(1) Position module and secure with fasteners.
UPPER EQUIPMENT
TRAY
G ALLEY GALLEY GALLEY CABIN

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
LIGHTS L IGHTS LIGHTS L IGHTS
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
ON/OFF L IGHTS LIGHTS L IGHTS
HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ
LOWER EQUIPMENT
TRAY

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
INDIRECT LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the indirect lights.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
B. Verify that the circuit breakers listed in Table 1, and all cabin management circuit breakers are
closed.
3. TEST
A. Test the indirect lights in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test Procedure,
document number TE-GTP-251, revision (F), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT LIGHTING
ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A lighting strip has been installed in the aft divan end cabinet to provide light for the entertainment
equipment controls. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

Door switch Aft divan end cabinet
Incandescent lighting strip Aft divan end cabinet
CABIN FLOOR circuit breaker CBPG-4
ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT LIGHTING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Open the entertainment cabinet door to close the switch and send power to the lighting strip. Close the
door to open the switch and remove power from the lighting strip.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FLOOR ACCENT LIGHTS
FLOOR ACCENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
NOTE: See 20-12-00 for light strip replacement instructions.
Lighting strips have been installed to provide floor accent lighting in the main cabin, entry area, and aft
lavatory. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.
Control of the components listed in Table 1 is managed by cabin management system Cabin Control
Modules 1 and 2 (CCM 1 and CCM 2) (23-90-00).

CABIN FLOOR LIGHTS switches (2) Galley and VIP Switch Panels
GALLEY FLOOR LIGHTS switch Galley Switch Panel
Incandescent lighting strips (6) Below air ducts in main cabin; below toilet enclosure;
below galley and vanity kick panels. See floorplan layout
graphic.
LAV FLOOR LIGHTS switches (2) Lavatory and Galley Switch Panels
Relay K1LR Behind dado panel at RH chair 2
GALLEY LAV ACCENT circuit breaker CBPG-1
CABIN FLOOR circuit breaker CBPG-4
FLOOR ACCENT LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Press one of the CABIN FLOOR LIGHTS switches to send a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1,
which energizes relay K1LR, sending power to the cabin lighting strips. Press the switch again to send a
signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1, which de-energizes relay K1LR, removing power from the cabin
lighting strips.
Press one of the LAV FLOOR LIGHTS switches to send a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 2, which
sends power to the lavatory lighting strips. Press the switch again to send a signal via the cabin data bus
to CCM 2, turning off the lavatory lighting strips.
Press the GALLEY FLOOR LIGHTS switch to send a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1, which
sends power to the galley lighting strip. Press the switch again to send a signal via the cabin data bus to
CCM 1, removing power to the galley lighting strip.
Nov 10/2006

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
CONTROL
MODE -
ADJUST
+ CALL

AFT FWD CABIN CABIN

VIP SWITCH PANEL
LAV
DOME
LIGHT
LAV
MIRROR
LIGHTS
LAV
FLOOR
LIGHTS
BAGGAGE
LIGHTS
LAVATORY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
FLOOR LIGHTS FLOOR LIGHTS
FLOOR LIGHTS
FLOOR ACCENT LIGHTS FLOORPLAN LAYOUT
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
READING/TABLE LIGHTS
READING/TABLE LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Reading and table lights have been installed in the Passenger Service Units (PSU) to provide individual
lighting for the passengers. Switch panels in the sideledges, on the aft divan end cabinet, and in the
inboard conference seat armrests control the lights. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.
NOTE: Some of the reading lights are also used as part of the emergency lighting system (33-51-00).

Incandescent reading lights (11) In PSU, above each seat
Incandescent table lights (6) In PSU, above each seat
READ LIGHT switches (11) Passenger switch panels
TABLE LIGHT switches (6) Passenger switch panels
CONF READ circuit breaker CBPG-6
LH READ TABLE circuit breaker CBPG-11
RH READ TABLE circuit breaker CBPG-12
READING/TABLE LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Press either a READ LIGHT or a TABLE LIGHT switch on a Passenger Switch Panel to operate the
selected light.
TABLE READ SOURCE

LIGHT LIGHT SELECT VOLUME VOLUME
MODE
SOURCE READ TABLE

MODE VOLUME VOLUME SELECT LIGHT LIGHT
PASSENGER SWITCH PANELS (TYPICAL)
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ORDINANCE SIGNS
ORDINANCE SIGNS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Ordinance signs have been added in the cabin to display instructions to the passengers. These graphic
ordinance signs are interfaced to the production-installed ordinance sign system, and the cabin paging
and public address systems (23-31-00). Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

NO SMOKING/FASTEN SEAT BELT RH and LH main cabin side panels, at forward and aft
ordinance signs (4) locations
NO SMOKING/RETURN TO SEAT In lavatory, above sink
ordinance sign
PASS WARN SIGNS circuit breaker CBP1 F-11
ORDINANCE SIGNS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The ordinance signs are controlled by two production-installed cockpit switches labeled NO SMKG and
SEAT BLTS. There are three positions on each switch: ON, OFF, and AUTO. For more information on
switch functions, consult the Challenger Aircraft Maintenance Manual. Activation of the ordinance signs
either manually or automatically will also generate an aural chime signal through the cabin audio system.
NOTE: The NO SMOKING segment of the ordinance sign in the lavatory is constantly illuminated.
CABIN ORDINANCE SIGNS
LAVATORY ORDINANCE SIGN
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ORDINANCE SIGNS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a cabin or lavatory ordinance sign:
(2) Grasp ordinance sign with fingers and pull out far enough to reach wiring.
(3) Disconnect electrical connection.
(4) Remove ordinance sign.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a cabin or lavatory ordinance sign:
(1) Restore electrical connection.
(2) Insert ordinance sign into slot until it snaps into place.
(3) Perform applicable test(s) per 23-31-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
ORDINANCE SIGNS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE ORDINANCE SIGNS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 33-24-60-601
B. Test Set-up
(3) Make sure the circuit breakers that follow are closed:
LOCATION CB NO. NAME

CBP1 F-11 PASS WARN SIGNS
CBP1 P-7 PA MHE CONT
CBPG 34 AUDIO AMP
C. Test
(1) Make sure the following ordinance signs are on:
(a) Lavatory NO SMOKING
(2) In the flight compartment, set the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel NO SMKG
switch to ON.
(a) Make sure a chime tone is heard from the passenger address speakers.
(b) Make sure the following ordinance signs are on:
• Lavatory NO SMOKING
• Cabin NO SMOKING
(3) In the flight compartment, set the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel SEAT BLTS
switch to ON.
(a) Make sure a chime tone is heard from the passenger address speakers.
• Lavatory RETURN TO SEAT

• Cabin FASTEN SEAT BELT
Nov 10/2006
(4) In the flight compartment, set the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel NO SMKG
switch to OFF.
(5) In the flight compartment, set the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel SEAT BLTS
switch to OFF.
(a) Make sure the following ordinance signs are off:
• Lavatory RETURN TO SEAT

• Cabin NO SMOKING and FASTEN SEAT BELT
• Lavatory NO SMOKING
D. Test Completion
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY LIGHTING
AFT LAVATORY LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Mirror Lights
Lighting has been installed to provide light for the lavatory mirror. Table 1 lists the components and
their locations. Control of the components listed in Table 1 is managed by the cabin management
system Cabin Control Module 2 (CCM 2) (23-90-00).

Fluorescent lamps (4) Around periphery of mirror
LAV MIRROR LIGHTS switch Lavatory Switch Panel
Power supply PS3LY In lavatory, behind vanity cabinet
LAV MIRROR circuit breaker CBPG-7
MIRROR LIGHT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
B. Headliner Dome Lights
Dome-light assemblies have been installed to provide general lighting for the lavatory. Table 2 lists
the components and their locations.
NOTE: One of the lamps also operates as part of the airstair/boarding lights system (33-45-00).
The dome-light assembly for this lamp houses a second lamp which is part of the
emergency lighting system (33-51-00).

Incandescent lamps (3) Lavatory headliner
LAV DOME LIGHT switch Lavatory Switch Panel
Relay K1LY Lavatory headliner
LAV circuit breaker CBPG-13
HEADLINER DOME LIGHT COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 2
2. OPERATION
A. Mirror Lights
Press the LAV MIRROR LIGHTS switch to energize a relay in the switch panel, which sends
power to the power supply, turning on the lamps. Press the switch again to de-energize the relay,
which removes power from the power supply, removing power from the lamps.
Nov 10/2006
B. Headliner Dome Light
Press the LAV DOME LIGHT switch to energize a relay in the switch panel, sending power to the
center lamp. Pressing the LAV DOME LIGHT switch also energizes relay K1LY, sending power to
the left- and right-hand lamps. Press the switch again to remove power from the lamps.
LAV
DOME
LIGHT
LAV
MIRROR
LIGHTS
LAV
FLOOR
LIGHTS
BAGGAGE
LIGHTS
Nov 10/2006
AFT LAVATORY LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the mirror lighting power supply:
(2) Remove mirror cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the mirror lighting power supply:
(3) Install mirror cabinet assembly (25-49-00).
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of mirror lights.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY LIGHTING
GALLEY LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A. Work Lights
Lighting has been installed to provide light for the galley countertop area, and is managed by the
cabin management system Cabin Control Module 1 (CCM 1) (23-90-00). Table 1 lists the

Dimming unit PS200LR Upper galley equipment tray
Fluorescent lamps (4) Upper galley, directly over countertop
GALLEY WORK LIGHTS switch Galley Switch Panel
Power supplies PS201LR, PS202LR, Upper galley equipment tray
and PS203LR
Relay K200LR Upper galley equipment tray
GALLEY WORK circuit breaker CBPG-2
WORK LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
B. Effect Lights
Lighting has been installed to provide effect lighting for the galley crystal storage area, and is
managed by CCM 1 (23-90-00). Table 2 lists the components and their locations.

Fluorescent lamps (2) Upper galley, outboard of crystal storage areas
GALLEY EFFECT LIGHTS switch Galley Switch Panel
Power supply PS205LR Upper galley equipment tray
GALLEY WORK circuit breaker CBPG-2
EFFECT LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 2
Nov 10/2006
2. OPERATION
A. Work Lights
Press the GALLEY WORK LIGHTS switch to send a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1, which
sends power to the lamps, turning them on at high intensity. Press the switch a second time to
energize relay K200LR, switching in a resistor on the dim sense line of the dimming unit, changing
the intensity of the lamps to low intensity. Press the switch a third time to send a signal via the
cabin data bus to CCM 1, removing power from the lamps.
B. Effect Lights
Press the GALLEY EFFECT LIGHTS switch to send a signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1,
which sends power to the power supply, powering the lamps. Press the switch again to send a
signal via the cabin data bus to CCM 1, which removes power from the power supply, removing
power from the lamps.

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
GALLEY LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a work lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(2) Remove galley appliance(s) inboard of upper equipment tray.
(4) Remove fasteners securing power supply to equipment tray.
B. To remove the work lighting dimming unit (Figure 401):
(3) Disconnect wiring from dimming unit.
(4) Remove fasteners securing dimming unit to equipment tray.
(5) Remove dimming unit.
C. To remove the effect lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(4) Remove fasteners securing power supply to equipment tray.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a work lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(1) Restore electrical connections to power supply.
(2) Position power supply on upper equipment tray and secure with fasteners.
(3) Install galley appliance(s).
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of galley work
lights.
B. To install the work lighting dimming unit (Figure 401):
(1) Restore electrical connections to dimming unit.
(2) Position dimming unit on upper equipment tray and secure with fasteners.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of galley work
lights.
C. To install the effect lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(1) Restore electrical connections to power supply.
(2) Position power supply on upper equipment tray and secure with fasteners.
(4) Restore power (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801) and verify proper operation of galley effect
lights.
Nov 10/2006
UPPER EQUIPMENT
TRAY

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
HOT GALLEY LAV

WATER WATER WATER W ATER
W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ
LOWER EQUIPMENT
TRAY

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PYLON LIGHTS
PYLON LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Microswitches have been installed to turn on the pylon lights when a No. 3 hydraulic pump service door
is opened. A rocker switch has been installed to provide operation of the left-hand pylon light from the
baggage compartment area. The rocker switch is located close to the baggage compartment door to
provide easy access from outside the aircraft. The production pylon lighting system and circuit breaker
have been retained. Table 1 lists the added components and their locations.

Microswitches LHYDS1 and RHYDS1 LH and RH No. 3 hydraulic pump service compartments
PYLON LIGHT rocker switch Baggage compartment at floor level, close to exterior door
Production circuit breaker CBP5 A-9
PYLON LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Open No. 3 hydraulic pump service door 3A to activate microswitch LHYDS1, which sends 28VDC from
the battery bus to the left-hand pylon light. Open No. 3 hydraulic pump service door 3B to activate
microswitch RHYDS1, which sends 28VDC from the battery bus to the right-hand pylon light. Close the
door to deactivate the microswitch, removing power from the associated pylon light.
Press the PYLON LIGHT switch up to send 28VDC from the battery bus to the left-hand pylon light.
Press the switch down to remove power from the left-hand pylon light.
PYLON
LIGHT
OFF
PYLON LIGHT SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
NOTE: See 20-12-00 for headliner lamp replacement instructions.
Overhead dome-light assemblies have been installed to provide general lighting for the baggage
compartment area. Each dome-light assembly contains two lamps. Flush-mounted light assemblies
have been installed in the baggage compartment door header to provide additional lighting in the door
area. Each flush-mounted light assembly contains one lamp. The production switch has been replaced
with a rocker switch located close to the baggage compartment door to provide access from outside the
aircraft. Table 1 lists the added components and their locations.
Control of the components listed in Table 1 is managed by the cabin management system Cabin Control
Module 2 (CCM 2) (23-90-00).

BAGGAGE LIGHTS switch Lavatory Switch Panel
Incandescent lamps (8) Baggage compartment headliner and door header
BAGGAGE LIGHTS Rocker Switch Baggage compartment at FS589L
BAGGAGE circuit breaker CBPG-5
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Press the BAGGAGE LIGHTS switch on the Lavatory Switch Panel to send a signal via the cabin data
bus to CCM 2, which then sends power to the lamps. Press the switch again to send a signal via the
cabin data bus to CCM 2, which then removes power from the lamps.
Press the BAGGAGE LIGHTS Rocker Switch up to send a momentary ground to CCM 2, sending power
to the lamps. Press the switch down to remove power from the lamps.
BAGGAGE
LIGHTS
ON/OFF
BAGGAGE LIGHTS ROCKER SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
LAV
DOME
LIGHT
LAV
MIRROR
LIGHTS
LAV
FLOOR
LIGHTS
BAGGAGE
LIGHTS
Nov 10/2006
EXTERIOR COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
EXTERIOR COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Two post lights have been installed to provide light for the exterior refuel/defuel control panel. A floodlight
has also been installed to provide light for the fuel port compartment. The production microswitches and
circuit breaker have been retained. Table 1 lists the added components and their locations.

Diode module CR1LQ Behind dado panel, near FS442R
Floodlight Right-hand forward wing fairing
Post lights (2) Refuel/defuel control panel compartment
Relays K1LQ-1 and K1LQ-2 Behind dado panel, near FS442R
Production circuit breaker CBP5 B-8
EXTERIOR COMPARTMENT LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Open the refuel/defuel compartment door to activate the microswitch, which then energizes relay
K1LQ-1, sending 28VDC from the battery bus to the post lights. It also sends a ground through diode
module CR1LQ to the service door indication system. Close the door to de-activate the microswitch,
de-energizing the relay, and thus removing power from the post lights.
Open the fuel port compartment door to activate the microswitch, which then energizes relay K1LQ-2,
sending 28VDC from the battery bus to the floodlight. It also sends a ground through a diode splice on
diode module CR1LQ to the service door indication system. Close the door to de-activate the
microswitch, de-energizing the relay, and thus removing power from the floodlight.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AVIONICS COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
AVIONICS COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An additional service light has been installed to supplement the existing main avionics compartment
lighting system. This new service light is operated by the existing service light switch, which has been
relocated. Table 1 lists the components and their locations. Operation of the main avionics compartment
lighting remains the same.

Service lights (2) Main avionics compartment
Relocated service light switch Main avionics compartment, at FS314R
SERVICE circuit breaker CBP5 A-11
AVIONICS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT DOOR SWITCH
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT DOOR SWITCH - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A microswitch and additional service light have been installed to supplement the aft equipment
compartment lighting system. The microswitch allows the service lights to be turned on only when the
access door is open. The microswitch turns off the lights when the door is closed. The microswitch is
wired in series with the existing aft equipment compartment service light switch. Table 1 lists the

Door microswitch Aft equipment compartment door
Existing service light switch Aft equipment compartment, at FS750L
Service lights (2) Aft equipment compartment
SERVICE circuit breaker CBP5 A-11
AFT EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT LIGHTING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
With the service light switch in the ON position, open the aft equipment compartment door to activate the
door switch, sending 28VDC from the battery bus to the lamps. To remove power from the lamps, close
the aft equipment compartment door or toggle the service light switch to the OFF position.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
LANDING/TAXI LIGHTS
LANDING/TAXI LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The production-installed left and right landing light switches on the Landing Lights Panel in the cockpit
have been removed and replaced to allow the lights to operate in a pulse mode. The new light switches
have a center PLS position. The nose landing light and taxi light switches have also been replaced. The
OFF/ON operation of all four switches remains the same. The switches were modified to be compatible
with the pulse light system installed under Service Bulletin (SB) 604-33-001.
RECOG
LANDING LTS TAXI
LEFT NOSE RIGHT LTS
OFF OFF OFF OFF
PLS PLS
ON ON ON ON
LANDING LIGHTS PANEL
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIRSTAIR/BOARDING LIGHTS
AIRSTAIR/BOARDING LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The production-installed airstair/boarding light system has been supplemented by the addition of
boarding lights for the main cabin and switches to control the lighting system. Table 1 lists the

AIRSTAIR LIGHT switch Forward Wardrobe Switch Panel
BOARD ON/OFF switch Miscellaneous Lights Panel, on cockpit overhead panel
Lamp Entry headliner, forward dome-light assembly
Lamp Lavatory headliner, center dome-light assembly
Magnetic proximity switch Main entry door frame
Relay K1LT Outboard of the forward wardrobe, at FS295L
STAIR LIGHTS Switch Forward side of step No. 5 on the airstair
BOARD circuit breaker CBP5 A-10
AIRSTAIR/BOARDING LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The main entry door must be open in order to allow operation of the airstair/boarding lights. Closing the
main entry door will turn off the lights, by actuating the magnetic proximity switch.
Press the AIRSTAIR LIGHT switch to energize a relay within the switch panel, sending 28VDC from the
MAIN BATTERY DIRECT BUS to relay K1LT, which then sends power to the lamps. Press the switch
again to de-energize the internal relay, removing power from relay K1LT, which then removes power
from the lamps.
Press the STAIR LIGHTS or toggle the BOARD ON/OFF switch to send a momentary ground signal to
the AIRSTAIR LIGHT switch, energizing its internal relay, which then sends 28VDC from the MAIN
BATTERY DIRECT BUS to relay K1LT. Relay K1LT then energizes, sending power to the lamps. When
the switch is pressed again, it sends a momentary ground signal to the switch, de-energizing its internal
relay, which then removes power from relay K1LT. Relay K1LT then de-energizes, removing power from
the lamps.
WARD
AIRSTAIR ROBE DOME
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
FORWARD WARDROBE SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
MISC LTS IND OVHD

BOARD CABIN LTS
NORM DIM
ON BRT
ON/OFF
EXTERNAL LTS
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON
AIRSTAIR STEP
NUMBER 5
STAIR LIGHTS
SWITCH
STAIR LIGHTS SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
AIRSTAIR/BOARDING LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the airstair/boarding
lights system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
B. Verify that boarding lights and cabin management circuit breakers are closed.
3. TEST
A. Test the airstair/boarding lights system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove power from the aircraft if it is no longer required.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BEACON LIGHTS
BEACON LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A strobe-type beacon system utilizing red lenses has been installed. Table 1 lists the components and
their locations.

BEACON OFF/ON switch Miscellaneous Lights Panel on cockpit overhead panel
Lower beacon light assembly FS567
Power supply PS1LS Under floor in baggage compartment at FS610, LBL41.5
Upper beacon light assembly FS431
BEACON LIGHTS circuit breaker CBP2 G-13
BEACON LIGHTS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Toggle the BEACON OFF/ON switch to the ON position to send power to the power supply, which then
powers both beacon light assemblies. Toggle the switch to the OFF position, which removes power from
the power supply, removing power from the beacon light assemblies.
MISC LTS IND OVHD

BOARD CABIN LTS
NORM DIM
ON BRT
ON/OFF
EXTERNAL LTS
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
BEACON LIGHTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the upper beacon light assembly:
(2) Remove fasteners securing lens and remove lens.
(3) Carefully remove sealant from around light assembly base.
(4) Remove fasteners securing beacon assembly.
(5) Pull beacon assembly out and disconnect wiring.
(6) Remove beacon assembly.
B. To remove the lower beacon light assembly:
(2) Remove fasteners securing lens and remove lens.
(3) Carefully remove sealant from around beacon assembly base.
(4) Remove fasteners securing beacon assembly to fairing.
(5) Disconnect beacon assembly wiring connector.
(6) Remove beacon assembly.
C. To remove the power supply (Figure 401):
(2) Remove carpet and Protex-5 floor covering over appropriate floorboard (25-29-00).
(3) Remove floorboard.
Nov 10/2006
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the upper beacon light assembly:
NOTE: Do not touch lamp directly with fingers. If touched with bare fingers, wipe finger oil off of
lamp with a soft cloth and alcohol. Finger oil will cause momentary smoking and
premature lamp failure when lamp is energized.
(1) Clean aircraft surface and beacon assembly base.
(2) If installing a new beacon assembly, remove drain plugs from beacon assembly base.
(3) Restore electrical connections to beacon assembly.
(4) Position beacon assembly into place and secure with fasteners.
(5) Perform an electrical bond test (See Structures Repair Manual for detailed instructions).
(6) Position beacon assembly lens into place and secure with fasteners.
(7) Apply a bead of aerodynamic sealant around beacon assembly base (See Structures Repair
Manual for detailed instructions.)
(9) Restore power and verify light turns on when BEACON OFF/ON switch is toggled to ON.
B. To install the lower beacon light assembly:
NOTE: Do not touch lamp directly with fingers. If touched with bare fingers, wipe finger oil off of
lamp with a soft cloth and alcohol. Finger oil will cause momentary smoking and
premature lamp failure when lamp is energized.
(1) Clean fairing surface and beacon assembly base.
(2) If installing a new beacon assembly, remove drain plug from beacon assembly lens.
(3) Restore electrical connections to beacon assembly.
(4) Perform an electrical bond test (See Structures Repair Manual for detailed instructions.)
(5) Position beacon assembly lens into place and secure with fasteners.
(6) Apply a bead of aerodynamic sealant around beacon assembly base (See Structures Repair
Manual for detailed instructions.)
(8) Restore power and verify light turns on when BEACON OFF/ON switch is toggled to ON.
Nov 10/2006
C. To install the power supply (Figure 401):
(3) Replace appropriate floorboard.
(4) Replace carpet and Protex-5 floor covering (25-29-00).
(6) Restore power and verify lights turns on when BEACON OFF/ON switch is toggled to ON.
POWER SUPPLY
BEACON LIGHTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Refer to STC No. SA6011NM for the Emergency Escape Path Lighting System.
The emergency light system consists of the production-installed emergency light system and the added
components listed in Table 1.
The EICAS has an EMER LTS OFF caution indication when the emergency lights switch on the cockpit
overhead panel is selected to OFF. It also has an EMER LTS ON status indication when the emergency
lights are on.
The power supplies are self-contained, consisting of a rechargeable battery pack with charge and control
circuits. The power supply outputs are rated at 24VDC. Each output circuit of the power supplies is fused
to provide isolation and protection. Power is supplied from the production-installed emergency lights
circuit.
For redundancy purposes, both power supplies provide power to all the lights and signs listed in Table 1.
The cabin lights used as emergency lights are left-hand and right-hand reading lights 1, 3, 4, and 6.
Diodes are used to isolate the two emergency power supply inputs from each other and from the normal
voltage sources for the cabin lights.
2. LOCATION
Table 1 lists the operational components and their locations.

Cabin reading/emergency lamps (8) PSU
EXIT signs (2) Main entry door and overwing emergency door
No. 1 emergency lights power supply Main avionics compartment at FS280R
No. 2 emergency lights power supply Under floor in baggage compartment at FS613L
Overhead incandescent lamps (2) Aft lavatory center and entry area aft dome-light assemblies
EMERGENCY LIGHTING COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
3. OPERATION
All the emergency battery packs are remotely controlled from the EMER LTS switch on the cockpit
overhead panel. This switch has three positions: ON, OFF, and ARM.
When power is applied to the aircraft and the EMER LTS switch is set to ON, the emergency lights
operate, and the power supplies do not charge. If power is removed from the aircraft, the emergency
lights operate and get their power from the power supplies.
When power is applied to the aircraft and the EMER LTS switch is set to OFF, the emergency lights do
not operate, but the power supplies charge. When power is removed from the aircraft, the emergency
lights do not operate, and the power supplies do not charge.
Nov 10/2006
When power is applied to the aircraft and the EMER LTS switch is set to ARM, the emergency lights do
not operate, but the power supplies charge and are armed. If power is removed from the ESS DC or ESS
AC bus, the emergency lights come on automatically and get their power from the power supplies.
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove a cabin emergency lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(1) Open and lock out production-installed circuit breaker(s).
(2) Remove appropriate floorboard or dado panel.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install a cabin emergency lighting power supply (Figure 401):
(3) Replace appropriate floorboard or dado panel.
(5) Return aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY LIGHTS
(TYPICAL)
POWER POWER
SUPPLY NO. 1 SUPPLY NO. 2
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE INTERIOR EMERGENCY LIGHTS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 33-51-60-601
B. Test Set-up
(2) Ensure that on the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel, the EMER LTS switch is set
to OFF.
(4) Make sure the circuit breakers that follow are closed:
LOCATION CB NO. NAME

CBP1 F-11 PASS WARN SIGNS
CBP1 P-7 PA MHE CONT
CBPG 34 AUDIO AMP
(5) Switch all cabin and lavatory lights OFF.
C. Test
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE EMERGENCY LIGHTING FOR MORE THAN TEN MINUTES.
CONTINUED OPERATION WILL DECREASE THE CHARGE OF THE BATTERY CELLS
WHICH COMPROMISE THE BATTERY PACKS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING POWER
SUPPLIES.
(1) In the flight compartment, on the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel, set the EMER
LTS switch to ON.
(a) In the flight compartment, on the EICAS primary page, make sure the EMER LIGHTS
ON advisory message comes on.
(b) Make sure that all emergency lights come on.
Nov 10/2006
(2) In the flight compartment, on the PASS SIGNS/EMER LIGHTS control panel, set the EMER
LTS switch to OFF.
(a) Make sure the emergency lights go off.
(b) In the flight compartment, on the EICAS primary page, make sure the EMER LIGHTS
OFF caution message comes on.
D. Test Completion
Nov 10/2006
2. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE INTERIOR EMERGENCY LIGHTS BATTERY PACKS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 33-51-60-602
(2) Equipment and Materials
Commercially Available Digital Voltmeter
Commercially Available Battery charger, adjustable constant
current, 28VDC 2 amps minimum
Commercially Available Three resistors, 25-ohm 50 Watt, Dale
RH-50 25 (Newark P/N 01F9923)
Commercially Available One resistor, 30-ohm 50 Watt, Dale RH-50
30 (Newark P/N 01F9926)
Commercially Available Miscellaneous connector pins, clips, and
jumper leads as required
B. Test Set-up
(2) Remove the appropriate floor panel in order to gain access to both emergency lighting
power supplies.
(3) Connect charger to unit connector pins A (positive) and B (negative) of each battery. Charge
each battery assembly for eight to ten hours at 0.7 amps at 28VDC (Figure 501).
C. Test
(1) Power Supply Capacity Check (Figure 501)
(a) Connect one end of a 25-ohm resistor to unit connector pins J, M, and S. Connect
other end of resistors to either pin B or unit chassis.
(b) Connect one end of 30-ohm resistor to unit connector pin Y. Connect other end of
resistor to either pin B or unit chassis.
(c) Connect voltmeter to unit connector pin K (positive) and pin B (negative).
(d) Connect charger 28VDC to unit connector pin E.
(e) Connect charger 28VDC to unit connector pin C.
(f) Connect charger 28VDC to unit connector pin A.
Nov 10/2006
(g) Remove charger 28VDC from unit connector pins A and E. Voltmeter should indicate
greater than 24VDC.
(h) Remove charger 28VDC from unit connector pin C. Charger should now not be
connected to unit.
(i) After one hour, voltmeter should indicate greater than 18.5VDC. This indicates
batteries meet minimum capacity specifications.
NOTE: If batteries fail to meet criteria as specified above, they must be replaced (in
pairs, not individually).
(j) Connect charger 28VDC to unit connectors A and E.
(k) Remove charger 28VDC from unit connector pin E.
(l) Connect charger to unit connector pins A (positive) and B (negative). Charge each
battery assembly for eight to ten hours at 0.7 amps at 28VDC.
EMER BATT PWR SPLY CHARGER

CHARGER INPUT (28 V DC) A
"ARM" INPUT C
"DISABLE" INPUT E
CHASSIS GROUND B
BATTERY OUTPUT J 25-OHM
BATTERY OUTPUT M 25-OHM VOLTMETER
BATTERY OUTPUT S 25-OHM
BATTERY OUTPUT Y 30-OHM
BATTERY OUTPUT K
CAPACITY CHECK DIAGRAM

FIGURE 501
D. Test Completion
(1) Install the floor panels.
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION


CHAPTER 35 - OXYGEN
CHAPTER 35 - OXYGEN

2 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
35 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006 35-30-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
35-00-00 1 Nov 10/2006 35-30-00 201 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 202 Nov 10/2006
3/4 Nov 10/2006
35-30-00 501 Nov 10/2006
35-10-05 1 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
35-30-00 601 Nov 10/2006
35-10-05 201 Nov 10/2006 602 Nov 10/2006
202 Nov 10/2006
35-10-05 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
35-10-05 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
35-20-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006
35-20-00 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006
35-20-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006
35-20-00 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
503 Nov 10/2006
504 Nov 10/2006
505 Nov 10/2006
506 Nov 10/2006
35-20-02 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
35-20-02 301 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 35 - OXYGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OXYGEN SYSTEM 35-00-00

THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM 35-10-05

Operation 1
Restore the Crew Oxygen Mask Modifications 201
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 301
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Crew Oxygen Modifications 501
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM 35-20-00

Servicing
Restore the Passenger Oxygen Control Panel 301
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Operational Test of the Passenger Oxygen System 501
Functional Test of the Passenger Oxygen System 503
THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN SYSTEM 35-20-02

Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 301
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501

PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE 35-30-00

Introduction 201
Job Set-up 201
Procedure 201
Job Completion 201
Adjustment/Test
Restore the Portable Oxygen Bottle and Regulator 501
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Portable Oxygen Bottle Mask 601

OXYGEN SYSTEM
OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The aircraft is equipped with a gaseous emergency oxygen system consisting of supply and delivery for
the crew and passengers, a therapeutic oxygen outlet, and a separate portable oxygen bottle. The
system is supplied by two pressurized 115-cu.-ft. bottles located in the forward equipment compartment.
The bottles can be serviced from an overboard service port.
Oxygen pressure is monitored by an oxygen pressure transducer on the high-pressure side, and a
pressure sensor on the low-pressure side of each bottle. A regulator is attached to each bottle to reduce
the bottle pressure to the system level of 70 psi. The pressure readings are shown on the EICAS display.
See Oxygen System Schematic.
WARNING: FAILURE TO OBEY ALL OXYGEN SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING ON THE
OXYGEN SYSTEM AND/OR AN OXYGEN SYSTEM COMPONENT CAN CAUSE A FIRE
OR AN EXPLOSION.
WARNING: GREASE, OIL, AND SOLVENTS CAN BURN IF TOUCHED BY OXYGEN. DO NOT GET
GREASE, OIL, OR SOLVENTS ON HANDS, CLOTHING, OR EQUIPMENT USED TO
WORK ON THE OXYGEN SYSTEM.
WARNING: OXYGEN AND NITROGEN BOTTLES ARE UNDER HIGH PRESSURE. FAILURE TO
OBSERVE ALL HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN DEATH
OR INJURY.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
FS
202.75
OVERBOARD OVERBOARD ACCESS DOOR, REF
LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE FILLER VALVE AND TO P.A. & CHIME CIRCUIT AS WELL
PRESSURE FS FS
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE QUANTITY GAUGE AS CABIN STANDBY LIGHT CIRCUIT
BULKHEAD 280.00 621.00
INDICATOR INDICATOR AND ORDINANCE SIGN CIRCUIT REF REF
LOW SUPPLY PRESSURE BULKHEAD

PRESSURE MAIN
PRESSURE COCKPIT BULKHEAD
TRANSDUCER ENTRANCE
ANNUNCIATOR
BULKHEAD
DCU1
SHUT-OFF
DCU2 VALVE
CABIN OXYGEN BOX
TM433520-07-7
DOUBLE MASK 9 PL
OXYGEN BOX
DOUBLE MASK
PRESSURE
O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2
SWITCH NORMAL
CLOSED OVERRIDE
CO-PILOT AFT
SEAT #1 SEAT #2 DIVAN
LAVATORY
CABIN
THERAPEUTIC
OXYGEN
OXYGEN BOX
DOUBLE MASK
OXYGEN CONTROL
PANEL/COPILOT'S
CONSOLE
O2 O2
JUMPSEAT
EICAS
1
115 CU FT
CAPACITY
115 CU FT
CAPACITY
SEAT #8 SEAT #6
SEAT #11 SEAT #10 SEAT #9 SEAT #7 VENT
EICAS
2 FITTING
O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2
PILOT
ALTITUDE
SWITCH
JUMPSEAT OXYGEN
CREW OXYGEN DEMAND DEMAND SYSTEM FS FS
SYSTEM (CANADAIR) (SCOTT MAGIC MASK) 310.35 348.65
REF REF
OXYGEN SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Nov 10/2006
THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM
THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An EROS MF10-03-03 full-face oxygen mask and stowage box have been installed in the forward
wardrobe for the jumpseat occupant. The unit includes an attached regulator that provides NORMAL,
100%, and EMERGENCY operating positions, and an inflatable harness to facilitate quick donning. The
mask has a built-in microphone, and is attached to the oxygen and microphone lines via
quick-disconnect couplings. A transparent protective strip covers the lens to protect the lens from
scratches and to provide a method to quickly remove icing caused by sudden decompression. The mask
has a vent valve that allows oxygen to flow across the face and interior of the lens to expel smoke and
fumes, and to defog the lens. The stowage box has an indicator flag showing when oxygen pressure is
applied to the mask, and a blinking indicator that turns yellow during harness inflation. The blinking
indicator returns to normal (black) after harness deflation to indicate that there are no leaks in the
system. The stowage box also has a PRESS-TO-TEST AND RESET control. The mask operates from
the regular oxygen supply system.
2. OPERATION
The mask is stowed in the stowage box. Remove the mask and depress the harness inflation tab to
activate oxygen flow to the regulator. During harness inflation, the blinking indicator turns yellow. Once
the mask is in place, deflate the harness by releasing the tab. If there are no leaks in the system, the
blinking indicator returns to normal (black).
Two controls on the mask are adjusted to suit the situation. In the case of smoke or fumes, 100% and
EMERGENCY positions are selected. The N/100% control adjusts the oxygen concentration; and the
EMERGENCY/PRESS-TO-TEST knob adjusts the flow rate to normal or emergency. Activation of
oxygen flow is indicated by an OXY-ON flag in the storage box. When use is no longer required, stow the
mask, and depress the PRESS-TO-TEST AND RESET control to stop oxygen flow to the mask.
Refer to EROS Quick Donning Mask-Regulator MF10 Series, Operating and Maintenance Instructions,
document number 4NUT0046A, for complete operating instructions.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. RESTORE THE CREW OXYGEN MASK MODIFICATIONS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-10-60-602
EROS/Zodiac Operating and Maintenance Instructions
4NUT0046A/35-13-61 for Quick Donning Mask-Regulator MF10
Series/Component Maintenance Manual
With Illustrated Parts List
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the crew oxygen masks from the aircraft.
C. Procedure
(1) Restore the third crew member oxygen masks per manufacturer CMM (EROS/Zodiac
4NUT0046A/35-13-61).
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the crew oxygen masks to their installed locations.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
• The following procedure is used to clean and sanitize the face piece.
(1) Equipment
• EROS SAN 50 disinfectant swabs
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Remove mask from stowage box.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Wipe elastomer face piece quickly and lightly with SAN 50 swab. Allow to completely air dry.
4. JOB COMPLETION
A. Stow face mask in stowage box per EROS Quick Donning Mask-Regulator MF10 Series,
Operating and Maintenance Instructions, document number 4NUT0046A.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
THIRD CREW MEMBER OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE CREW OXYGEN MODIFICATIONS

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-10-60-601
B. Test Set-up
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE OF THE OXYGEN CYLINDER IS NOT LESS THAN
50 PSI (340 KPA). IF THE PRESSURE IS LESS THAN 50 PSI (340 KPA),
CONTAMINATION CAN GO INTO THE OXYGEN CYLINDER. IF THIS OCCURS, YOU
MUST BLEED THE OXYGEN SYSTEM (AFTER YOU REMOVE THE OXYGEN
CYLINDER) AND DO TESTS FOR PURITY ON THE SYSTEM AND THE CYLINDER.
(1) Obey all the oxygen-system safety precautions (AMM Task 35-00-00-910-801).
C. Test
(1) Do the operational test of replaced or additional outlets/masks in accordance with the
operational test of the crew oxygen system (AMM Task 35-10-00-710-801) and according to
the applicable manufacturer’s component maintenance manual instructions.
NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions only for specific information concerning the
operation and inspection of the installed oxygen mask. The procedure in the Aircraft
Maintenance Manual provides additional information that is required in order to
confirm that the installed system is operational.
MANUFACTURER DOCUMENT DOCUMENT TITLE

EROS/Zodiac 4NUT0046A Operating and Maintenance Instructions
for Quick Donning Mask-Regulator
MF10 Series
35-13-61 Component Maintenance Manual With

Illustrated Parts List
D. Test Completion
(1) Stow all masks.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The passenger emergency oxygen system provides emergency oxygen to the passengers, crew
members, jumpseat occupant, and lavatory. The passenger oxygen is supplied by two pressurized,
115-cu.-ft. oxygen bottles located in the forward equipment compartment. High-pressure oxygen from
the bottles is reduced by the regulators to 70 ± 10 psi. Deployable oxygen masks are located above each
passenger seat, the jumpseat, and in the lavatory. The system comes on automatically when the cabin
altitude is above 14,500 feet and shuts off below that cabin altitude. The flight crew can manually
operate the system at any time. There is an oxygen bleed valve to relieve pressure from the oxygen
system and prevent accidental deployment of the passenger masks. A pressure-activated switch
(S4WQ) in the copilot’s side console sends an oxygen ON signal to the EICAS when the passenger
oxygen is flowing.
A. Control Panel
The Passenger Oxygen Control Panel is located on the copilot’s side console. The panel
determines the operating mode of the oxygen system, and contains the altimetric valve that turns
on the oxygen system in the event of cabin depressurization. The selector switch on the panel has
three settings: CLOSED, NORMAL, and OVERRIDE.
In the CLOSED position, the passenger oxygen system is turned off.
In the NORMAL setting, the passenger oxygen masks will be deployed automatically when the
cabin altitude is above 14,500 feet. When automatically activated, the control unit will activate the
chime warnings and the NO SMOKING ordinance signs, and a PAX OXY ON message will display
on the EICAS.
The OVERRIDE position manually deploys the cabin masks and provides oxygen to the
passengers.
The control panel also controls the therapeutic oxygen (35-20-02). The THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN
ON switch controls a solenoid valve (V1WQ) in the copilot’s side console that turns the therapeutic
oxygen on or off.
PASSENGER OXYGEN
THERAPEUTIC
OXYGEN NORMAL
CLOSED OVERRIDE
ON TEST
PORT
PASSENGER OXYGEN CONTROL PANEL
Nov 10/2006
B. Passenger Oxygen Deployment
One headliner-mounted, one side panel-mounted, and nine Passenger Service Unit-mounted
(PSU) deployment containers have been installed in the aircraft as shown in the Passenger
Oxygen System Distribution graphic.
All of the deployment containers are dual-mask assemblies. The masks, when deployed, are
presented in proximity to all cabin seat positions, the jumpseat, and the lavatory. They are
deployed by a line pressure of 30-60 psi and activated by pulling on the lanyards/pins. The
lavatory deployment container is the exception because it does not have lanyards/pins and is
activated as soon as the masks are deployed.
OXYGEN MASK
DEPLOYMENT BOXES
(10 PLACES)
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION
C. Oxygen Bleed Fitting
An oxygen bleed fitting is installed in the passenger oxygen system. Located in the PSU at
FS538L, it will automatically bleed any leakage from the passenger oxygen control panel to
prevent accidental deployment of the oxygen masks. It is also used to bleed the pressure from the
passenger supply line to allow stowage of the masks after deployment.
Nov 10/2006
LANYARD CORD
PASSENGER AND RING
MASK
DOOR
ACTIVATOR OXYGEN SHUT-OFF
VALVE
LANYARD CORD TO OPPOSITE SIDE

AND RING MANIFOLD
LANYARD OXYGEN SUPPLY

PIN TO MASK
OXYGEN LINE
CONNECTION
INSTRUCTION
LABEL DEPLOYMENT
BOX
PASSENGER OXYGEN DEPLOYMENT BOX (TYPICAL)

(LANYARD AND PIN ARE NOT INSTALLED IN LAVATORY DEPLOYMENT BOX)
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. RESTORE THE PASSENGER OXYGEN CONTROL PANEL

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-20-60-603
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the passenger oxygen control panel.
(2) Send the passenger oxygen control panel to the manufacturer for restoration.
(3) Install the passenger oxygen control panel.
(4) Verify proper operation per Adjustment/Test.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION, INSTALL PROTECTIVE COVERS ON ALL LINES,
OPEN PORTS, ELECTRICAL PLUGS, AND RECEPTACLES IMMEDIATELY AFTER
DISCONNECTING. DO NOT REMOVE PROTECTIVE COVERS UNTIL IMMEDIATELY
BEFORE CONNECTING. OBSERVE INSTALLATION AND TORQUING PROCEDURES
FOR OXYGEN FITTINGS AND LINES IN CHAPTER 20 OF THE CANADAIR AIRCRAFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR INSTALLATIONS AND REMOVALS IN THIS SECTION.
A. To remove a passenger oxygen mask:
(1) Remove oxygen supply to mask by switching control on passenger oxygen control panel to
CLOSED.
(2) Pull down on oxygen mask drop box PSU trim cover (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(3) Pull down on door of oxygen mask drop box. Passenger mask will drop.
(4) Disconnect oxygen supply tube on mask from oxygen supply line at lanyard valve.
(5) Remove lanyard pin from lanyard receptacle.
(6) Remove oxygen mask from drop box.
2. INSTALLATION
NOTE: These instructions are to help facilitate oxygen mask replacement. If there are discrepancies
between these instructions and oxygen mask manufacturer’s instructions, always refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
A. To replace a passenger oxygen mask:
(1) Let oxygen mask hang to remove twists from oxygen supply tube.
(2) Hold oxygen mask with open end up.
(3) Fold head strap into mask. Pull lanyard cord out to side of face piece so that it does not
interfere with repacking.
(4) Smooth out wrinkles in reservoir bag.
(5) Gently fold reservoir bag lengthwise into thirds. Outside edges fold inward over center of
bag. Do not crease.
(6) Fold two sides of face piece inward over elastic strap.
(7) Fold reservoir bag into three layers of equal length over folded face piece.
(8) Fold two open sides of face piece over reservoir bag.
Nov 10/2006
(9) Coil oxygen tubing under mask.
(10) Connect oxygen tubing to supply line at lanyard valve.
WARNING: MAKE SURE LANYARD PIN IS INSERTED INTO CORRECT LANYARD PIN
RECEPTACLE. CROSS-CONNECTED PINS WILL RESULT IN PASSENGERS
PULLING LANYARD CORDS ONLY TO INITIATE OXYGEN FLOW TO
ANOTHER MASK.
(11) Insert lanyard pin into corresponding lanyard pin receptacle.
(12) Place mask in drop box. Make sure that oxygen tubing and lanyard cord are free to deploy
and are not caught between container and lid.
(13) Install oxygen mask drop box PSU trim cover (secure with hook-and-loop strips).
Nov 10/2006
PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. OPERATIONAL TEST OF THE PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-20-60-601
B. Test Set-up
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE OF THE OXYGEN CYLINDER IS NOT LESS
THAN 50 PSI (340 KPA). IF THE PRESSURE IS LESS THAN 50 PSI (340 KPA),
CONTAMINATION CAN GO INTO THE OXYGEN CYLINDER. IF THIS OCCURS,
YOU MUST BLEED THE OXYGEN SYSTEM (AFTER YOU REMOVE THE OXYGEN
(3) Connect and energize external AC electrical power to the aircraft

(AMM Task 12-00-07-861-801).
C. Test
(1) On the basic reversionary control panel located on the center pedestal, make sure that the
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) switch is set to NORM.
(2) On the EICAS status page, make sure the PASSENGER OXY ON indication is not
displayed.
(3) In the flight compartment, on the PASSENGER OXYGEN control panel, set the
CLOSED/NORMAL/OVERRIDE selector to OVERRIDE.
(a) On the EICAS status page, make sure the PASSENGER OXY ON indication is
displayed.
(b) Make sure all passenger oxygen masks deploy correctly (masks drop from
deployment containers and are presented to airplane occupants).
CLOSED/NORMAL/OVERRIDE selector to NORMAL.
(a) On the EICAS status page, make sure the PASSENGER OXY ON indication does not
show.
(5) Connect the therapeutic oxygen mask into the outlet identified Therapeutic Oxygen Outlet in
the passenger cabin.
Nov 10/2006
(6) Select the THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN annunciator/switch on the PASSENGER OXYGEN

control panel, to ON position.
(a) Make sure oxygen flows to therapeutic oxygen mask.
(b) Make sure the THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN annunciator/switch illuminates.
(c) Make sure the therapeutic oxygen mask functions properly (35-20-02).
(7) Deselect the THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN annunciator/switch.
(a) Make sure oxygen flow to therapeutic oxygen mask stops.
(b) Make sure the THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN annunciator/switch extinguishes.
(8) Perform a visual inspection of the therapeutic oxygen mask.
(9) Do the servicing of the therapeutic oxygen mask (35-20-02).
D. Test Completion
(1) Disconnect therapeutic mask from the outlet and stow.
(2) Remove the external AC electrical power (AMM Task 12-00-07-861-802).
(3) Inspect, clean, disinfect, and repack passenger oxygen masks in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions (refer to Scott Aviation Service Instruction 833-35-01, Repacking
Procedure for 289 Series Passenger Oxygen Masks Used in Business and General Aviation
Aircraft Deployment Containers).
(4) Do the servicing of the crew oxygen system (AMM Task 12-14-35-614-801).
Nov 10/2006
2. FUNCTIONAL TEST OF THE PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-20-60-602
(2) Tools and Equipment
Commercially available Electrical outlet tester
GSE 35-20-02 Pressure-Tester, Passenger Oxygen
Station
GSE 34-10-01 Air Data Test Set
B. Test Set-up
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE OF THE OXYGEN CYLINDER IS NOT LESS
THAN 50 PSI (340 KPA). IF THE PRESSURE IS LESS THAN 50 PSI (340 KPA),
CONTAMINATION CAN GO INTO THE OXYGEN CYLINDER. IF THIS OCCURS,
YOU MUST BLEED THE OXYGEN SYSTEM (AFTER YOU REMOVE THE OXYGEN
(3) Connect and energize external AC electrical power to the aircraft

(AMM Task 12-00-07-861-801).
(4) Make sure all circuit breakers are closed except those required for ground safety.
(5) In the flight compartment, make sure the CABIN BUS/OFF switch is ON.
(6) On the status page of the Engine Indicating and Crew Alerting System (EICAS), examine
the oxygen quantity indication.
(a) If the oxygen quantity is below 75%, service the crew oxygen system
(AMM Task 12-13-01-614-801).
CLOSED/NORMAL/OVERRIDE selector to CLOSED.
CAUTION: USE TWO WRENCHES WHEN YOU REMOVE/TORQUE THE HOSES/TUBES. USE
ONE WRENCH TO HOLD THE FITTING, AND THE OTHER WRENCH TO
LOOSEN/TORQUE THE COUPLING NUT. IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS, YOU CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Remove the cap from the valve test receptacle on the PASSENGER OXYGEN control
panel.
(9) Connect the air data test set to the test port on the PASSENGER OXYGEN control panel.
(10) Connect the passenger-oxygen-station pressure-tester to the end of the passenger-oxygen

supply line at the rear of the passenger compartment.
NOTE: For convenience, it is recommended that the passenger-oxygen-station

pressure-tester be connected to the aft lavatory oxygen mask deployment container
supply line.
(11) On the basic reversionary control panel located on the center pedestal, make sure that the
EICAS switch is set to NORM.
(12) On the EICAS status page, make sure the PASSENGER OXY ON indication is not
displayed.
C. Test
(1) Increase altitude and at 14,500 ft, ±500 ft, and make sure that you see or hear the
indications that follow.
(a) On the EICAS status page, make sure the amber PASSENGER OXY ON indication
shows.
(b) Make sure all passenger oxygen masks deploy correctly (masks drop from
deployment container and are presented to airplane occupants).
(c) Make sure the passenger-oxygen-station pressure-tester indicates a pressure of 70

±5 psig.
(d) In aircraft where smoking is permitted, passenger compartment NO SMOKING signs

illuminate.
(e) Passenger compartment SEAT BELTS signs illuminate.
(f) Lavatory RETURN TO SEAT or SEAT BELT sign illuminates.
(g) Passenger compartment upper indirect lights illuminate, or remain ON.
(h) Passenger compartment lower indirect and direct lights go off.
(i) Passenger compartment reading lights go off.
(j) Passenger compartment chime is heard.
(k) Power to the passenger compartment electrical outlets goes off.
• Use an electrical outlet tester to verify.
Nov 10/2006
(2) Initiate oxygen flow at all passenger oxygen masks by pulling down on the lanyards until the
corresponding pins are released from the lanyard valves.
(a) Make sure that you get a free flow of oxygen from each mask.
(b) Make sure the passenger-oxygen-station pressure-tester decreases to 22 psig, +4/-0

psig.
(3) Continue to increase altitude and make sure that the oxygen pressure is as follows:
(a) Up to 21,000 ft, +0/-3,000 ft, the oxygen pressure stays at 22 psig, +4/ 0 psig.
(b) Higher than this altitude, up to 40,000 ft, the oxygen pressure is 70 psig, ±5 psig.
(4) Decrease altitude and make sure that the oxygen pressure is as follows:
(a) Down to 18,000 ft, + 3,000 ft/- 0 ft, the oxygen pressure stays at 70 psig, ±5 psig.
(b) Lower than this altitude, down to 10,000 ft, ± 500 ft, the oxygen pressure is 22 psig, +
4/ -0 psig.
(c) Lower than 10,500 ft, ±500 ft, the oxygen pressure is 0 psig.
(5) As you decrease altitude below 10,500 ft, ±500 ft, make sure that you see or hear the
indications that follow:
(a) On the EICAS status page, make sure the amber PASSENGER OXY ON indication is
not displayed.
(b) In aircraft where smoking is permitted, passenger compartment NO SMOKING signs

extinguish.
(c) Passenger compartment SEAT BELTS signs extinguish.
(d) Lavatory RETURN TO SEAT or SEAT BELT sign extinguish.
(e) Passenger compartment upper indirect lights remain ON.
(f) Passenger compartment lower indirect and direct lights remain off.
(g) Passenger compartment reading lights come ON.
(h) Passenger compartment chime is heard.
(i) Power to the passenger compartment electrical outlets come ON.
CLOSED/NORMAL/OVERRIDE selector to CLOSED.
Nov 10/2006
D. Test Completion
(1) Disconnect the test equipment.
(2) Make sure that all oxygen line connections are put back to their initial positions.
(3) Put the cap on the valve test receptacle on the PASSENGER OXYGEN control panel.
(4) Insert the lanyard pins into the corresponding lanyard valves at all passenger oxygen
masks.
(5) Do a leak test of the passenger oxygen system connections that were disturbed as follows:
(a) On the PASSENGER OXYGEN control panel, set the control knob to OVERRIDE.
(b) Do a leak test of the oxygen system (AMM TASK 35-10-00-790-801).
(c) On the PASSENGER OXYGEN control panel, set the control knob to CLOSED.
(6) Remove the external AC electrical power (AMM Task 12-00-07-861-802).
(7) Inspect, clean, disinfect, and repack passenger oxygen masks in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions (refer to Scott Aviation Service Instruction 833-35-01, Repacking
Procedure for 289 Series Passenger Oxygen Masks Used in Business and General Aviation
Aircraft Deployment Containers).
(8) Do the servicing of the crew oxygen system (AMM Task 12-14-35-614-801).
Nov 10/2006
THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN SYSTEM
THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
One therapeutic oxygen outlet is located on the right-hand dado panel forward of the overwing
emergency exit by right-hand seat 2. Two 12-foot oxygen hoses and masks (provided as loose
equipment) are stowed in their respective pouches in the aft divan end cabinet. They are each equipped
with a nebulizer and a flowmeter that will provide an adjustable flow of oxygen from 2 to 15 liters per
minute (lpm). The therapeutic oxygen system functions independently of the passenger oxygen system
and is turned on by pressing the THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN switch on the Passenger Oxygen Control
Panel to illuminate ON. This will open an electrically-operated valve (V1WQ) in the copilot’s side
console. A pressure-activated switch (S3WQ) will send an oxygen ON indication to the Passenger
Oxygen Panel. This switch is in the copilot’s side console.
The therapeutic oxygen system is supplied by the same bottles as the crew and passenger oxygen
systems.
A. To use the therapeutic oxygen system:
(1) Insert a hose outlet connector into the oxygen supply outlet and turn clockwise
approximately a sixteenth of a turn to lock into place.
NOTE: Oxygen outlet must supply at least a 7.5 lpm flow.
(2) Unscrew the clear container portion from the nebulizer assembly.
(3) Fill the container with sterile or distilled water so that the water level is between the
MINIMUM and MAXIMUM marks. Do not use potable water.
(4) Replace by threading container into unit.
(5) Adjust the flow on the top of the nebulizer assembly to the appropriate lpm flow setting.
• Medical applications - 7.5 lpm or more
• Headache or nausea - 2 lpm
(6) Check for bubbles flowing through water, and check mask for flow.
NOTE: Unit should be positioned to prevent any kinks in hose or line that would restrict flow.
(7) Place mask over the user’s nose and mouth, place elastic strap over the back of the head,
and secure by pulling the straps on the side of the mask.
(8) User should breathe normally.
(9) Monitor water level and refill when level falls below the MINIMUM mark.
(10) Stop flow by positioning regulator control knob to OFF or by removing outlet connector from
outlet. To remove outlet connector, push connector in and turn counterclockwise.
Nov 10/2006
OXYGEN MASK
ECONOMIZER BAG QUICK-DISCONNECT

NEBULIZER HOSE VALVE
BAYONET
PLUG
REGULATOR CONTROL
KNOB
ADAPTER
NEBULIZER
TO ON/OFF TOGGLE
REGULATOR
VALVE
NEBULIZER
ASSEMBLY
THERAPEUTIC MASK AND NEBULIZER (LOOSE EQUIPMENT)
Nov 10/2006
THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for servicing the therapeutic oxygen mask and
nebulizer kit.
(1) Equipment
• Zephiran Chloride solution, Scott Aviation P/N 00-2572
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Obey all the oxygen safety precautions (AMM Task 35-00-00-910-801).
3. PROCEDURE
A. Perform the following service after each use of the system:
(1) Empty water from container and wash with a mild detergent.
(2) Flow oxygen for approximately two minutes, with clear container removed. This will blow out
any excess water in aerator. Allow aerator to air dry before replacing clear container. Verify
that aerator is dry and is not discolored. Replace bubble humidifier if aerator is discolored.
(3) Clean mask and sterilize with an aqueous solution of Zephiran Chloride.
(4) Nebulizer kit should be stored in such a manner as to prevent kit from coming in contact with
contaminants.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
THERAPEUTIC OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the therapeutic
oxygen system.
(1) Equipment
• Leak detection compound

• Clean, lint-free cloth
• Oxygen charging system
• Oxygen pressure gauge
• Oxygen control panel static test port adapter
• Nitrogen charging system
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
B. Verify that all equipment necessary for test is installed in aircraft before proceeding.
3. TEST
A. Test the therapeutic oxygen system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Procedure, document number D-GT35205000, revision (A), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An 11-cu.-ft. portable oxygen bottle is located in the forward wardrobe. It is equipped with two outlets,
one for an Eros mask and one for the wide-screen mask that is provided. The wide-screen mask is a
full-face oxygen mask, providing 100% forward visibility and full 180° peripheral vision.
MASK
DEMAND
REGULATOR
PRESSURE
GAUGE
BOTTLE OXYGEN
REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for maintaining the portable oxygen bottle.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• None
2. JOB SET-UP
3. PROCEDURE
A. Check pressure gauge for sufficient pressure prior to each flight.
B. Check bottle weekly for leakage, corrosion, gouges, distortion, and integrity of mounting hardware.
C. Return bottle to manufacturer for hydrostatic testing and overhaul of valve/regulator assembly at
intervals, as specified in Chapter 5.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. RESTORE THE PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE AND REGULATOR

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-30-60-601
Scott Aviation 35-32-18 5500 Series and 5600 Series Portable
Cylinder Assembly Component
Maintenance Manual
B. Test Set-up
(1) Obtain the portable oxygen bottle from the forward wardrobe.
C. Test
(1) Perform a hydrostatic test and regulator test/overhaul per manufacturer Component
Maintenance Manual (Scott Aviation 35-32-18).
D. Test Completion
(1) Return the portable oxygen bottle to the forward wardrobe.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE MASK

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 35-30-60-602
B. Job Set-up
(1) Obtain the portable oxygen bottle mask from the forward wardrobe.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of the oxygen mask (used with the portable oxygen
bottle) as follows:
(a) Check the oxygen mask and straps for evidence of damage or deterioration (stretch
all rubber parts and pay particular attention to seams when inspecting for damage or
deterioration of the rubber).
(b) Check the hose for evidence of damage or deterioration.
D. Job Completion
(1) Return the portable oxygen bottle mask to the forward wardrobe.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 38 - WATER/
WASTE
CHAPTER 38 - WATER/WASTE

2 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
38 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006 38-31-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
38-10-00 1 Nov 10/2006 38-31-00 301 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006 302 Nov 10/2006
3 Nov 10/2006
4 Nov 10/2006 38-31-00 401 Nov 10/2006
5/6 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
38-10-00 201 Nov 10/2006 38-31-00 501 Nov 10/2006

202 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
38-10-00 301 Nov 10/2006 38-31-00 601 Nov 10/2006

302 Nov 10/2006 602 Nov 10/2006
303 Nov 10/2006
304 Nov 10/2006 38-40-00 1 Nov 10/2006
305 Nov 10/2006 2 Nov 10/2006
306 Nov 10/2006
307 Nov 10/2006 38-40-00 301 Nov 10/2006
308 Nov 10/2006 302 Nov 10/2006
38-10-00 401 Nov 10/2006 38-40-00 401 Nov 10/2006

402 Nov 10/2006 402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
38-10-00 501 Nov 10/2006 404 Nov 10/2006
502 Nov 10/2006
38-40-00 501 Nov 10/2006
38-10-40 1 Nov 10/2006 502 Nov 10/2006
2 Nov 10/2006
38-40-00 601 Nov 10/2006
38-10-40 401 Nov 10/2006 602 Nov 10/2006
402 Nov 10/2006
403 Nov 10/2006
404 Nov 10/2006
38-10-40 501 Nov 10/2006

502 Nov 10/2006
38-30-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 38 - WATER/WASTE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 38-10-00

Description 1
Location 2
Operation 3
Restore the Potable Water Filter Cartridge 201
Restore the Potable Water System 202
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 308
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
WATER HEATERS 38-10-40

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Functional Test of the Water Heater Pressure Relief Valve 501
WASTE DISPOSAL 38-30-00

Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501

TOILETS 38-31-00
Operation 1
Servicing
Introduction 301
Job Set-up 301
Procedure 301
Job Completion 302
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
Inspection/Check
Introduction 601
Job Set-up 601
Procedure 601
Job Completion 601
AIR SUPPLY 38-40-00

Operation 1
Servicing
Replace the Bleed Air Filter 301
Removal 401
Installation 402
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
Inspection/Check
General Visual Inspection of the Air Pressure Regulator Gauge 601

POTABLE WATER SYSTEM
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
1. DESCRIPTION
The aircraft is equipped with a pressurized potable water system. For water to flow, the system must be
pressurized (38-40-00).
A. Water Tank
The water tank is a pressurized water tank with a capacity of 10 US gallons (38 liters).
B. Water Level Indication
Water level is sensed by a water quantity probe in the water tank interfaced to a control unit. The
level is indicated at the galley switch panel and at the exterior water service panel.
C. Manual Shutoff Valves
Manual shutoff valves are installed adjacent to the water filter to isolate the galley and lavatory
plumbing for repairs and maintenance.
D. Lavatory Water Supply Valve
Solenoid valve V705MJ controls the water supply to the lavatory sink. This valve is controlled by
pressure-sensitive mat switch SJ700MJ, located under the mat in front of the sink.
E. Fill System
The potable water tank can be filled from the external filling station at FS597R, or at the manual fill
port of the water tank which is accessed through the water tank closeouts in the baggage
compartment. The water fill circuitry is powered by the 28VDC BATTERY bus, allowing the water
fill system to operate on battery power.
F. Purge System
Two methods are available to purge the potable water system, and one method is available to
purge the water lines. The automatic water purge system is the preferred method used to purge
the potable water system. Purging without pressure or manual purging may result in incomplete
evacuation of the water lines. The water system should be purged any time the aircraft is parked in
a location where freezing is a possibility.
(1) Automatic water purge system
The automatic water purge system provides a process which, once initiated, drains the
potable water system. The process is initiated by pressing and holding the water purge
switch on the galley switch panel until the switch backlighting changes from amber to green
(approximately 5 seconds). Water can be purged from the potable water system any time
28VDC Cabin Bus 1 is energized, WATER SYSTEM circuit breaker CBP5 A-8 is closed, and
the system is pressurized.
Nov 10/2006
The automatic water purge system consists of a two-way solenoid purge valve and a purge
activation switch on the galley switch panel. The system is interfaced to empty tank sensor
MT700MJ, relay K702MJ, and the cabin management system to turn off the water heaters
and the hot water dispenser heater (if installed), and to end the purge cycle when empty.
(2) Manual water purge system
The manual water purge system provides a means of draining the potable water system
while the aircraft is on the ground for service. Water can be purged from the potable water
system any time the system is pressurized. Purging without pressure may result in
incomplete evacuation of the water system. The manual water purge system consists of a
manual purge valve located on the water system components tray which interfaces with the
production drain mast.
(3) Water line purge system
The water line purge system provides a means of draining the potable water lines for
servicing. Water can be purged from the potable water lines any time the system is
pressurized. Purging without pressure will result in incomplete evacuation of the water lines.
The water line purge system consists of a three-way manual valve which is interfaced to the
galley and lavatory sinks.
See the following sections for other related systems:

• Water heaters, 38-10-40
• Water line heaters, 30-75-00
• Water tank heaters, 30-75-00
• Air supply, 38-40-00
2. LOCATION
Table 1 lists the water system components, their locations, and if applicable, the associated circuit
breaker(s). See WATER SYSTEM SCHEMATIC for functional diagram.
Component (Qty) Location Associated Circuit Breaker

Empty sensor MT700MJ Water system components tray below CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
water tank CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
Galley water heater See 38-10-40 See 38-10-40
Lavatory faucet valve V705MJ Lavatory vanity cabinet CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
Lavatory mat switch SJ700MJ Floor in front of sink CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
Lavatory water heater See 38-10-40 See 38-10-40
Manual two-way purge valve Water system components tray below
water tank
Manual air pressure three-way Water system components tray below
valve water tank
Purge valve V701MJ Water system components tray below CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
water tank
Nov 10/2006
Component (Qty) Location Associated Circuit Breaker

Water fill overflow valve Water system components tray below CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
V702MJ water tank
Water fill relays K703MJ, Water system components tray above CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
K704MJ, and K705MW water tank
Water fill valve V703MJ Water system components tray below CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
water tank
Water filter assembly In vanity cabinet, outboard of toilet
shroud assembly
Water heater control relays Lower galley equipment tray (see CBPG-9, WATER HTR CONT
K901HR and K902HR 38-10-40)
Water level control unit On bulkhead outboard access door at CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
A700MJ FS587R CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
Water quantity indicators Galley switch panel and water fill CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
service panel CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
Water quantity probe MT701MJ In water tank CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
Water tank Baggage compartment, outboard of
RH closeout panel
Wet/dry control relay K702MJ Water system components tray above CBPG-10, WATER SYSTEM
water tank CBP5 A-8, WATER SYSTEM
WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
3. OPERATION
A. General
The water system is interfaced to the cabin management system for control and switching
operations, and to the production-installed water fill service panel.
See the following sections for other related systems:

• Water heaters, 38-10-40
• Water line heaters, 30-75-00
• Water tank heaters, 30-75-00
• Air supply, 38-40-00
B. Fill System
NOTE: By placing the fill switch to the ON position prior to filling the main water tank, the overflow
valve will open and the water system will depressurize.
To fill the main water tank with potable water from an external source, select the WATER FILL
switch on the water fill service panel to ON. The water fill switch activates water fill relays K703MJ,
K704MJ, and K705MW which open water fill valve V703MJ and water fill overflow valve V702MJ
to initiate water fill sequence. When the tank is full, the water quantity probe sends a full signal to
the water level control unit. The control unit sends a full signal to the water quantity indicators and
Nov 10/2006
to relay K705MW to de-energize the water fill valve. Water is then routed to the drain mast through
the overflow valve. When water flows out the drain mast, select the water fill switch to OFF.
Time-delay relay K703MJ will then close the overflow valve after the preset time delay. The water
level indicators in the water fill service panel and Galley Switch Panel should show FULL.
C. Water Level Indication
This system, which operates automatically, is interfaced with the water heaters (38-10-40), the
water fill system, the water purge system, and the cabin management system (23-90-00).

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
PLUNGER INSTANT HOT WATER AIR PRESSURE REGULATOR

GALLEY PLUMBING
AND PRESSURE GAUGE
SINK STRAINER (20-22 PSI)
I AIR PRESSURE, RELIEF VALVE
DRAIN VALVE VENT/MUFFLER
3-WAY MANUAL 10th STAGE
CHECK VALVE BLEED AIR
VALVE
ICE ICE
DRAWER DRAWER
H C
MECHANICAL
PLUNGER
RELIEF VALVE
AIR FILTER
OVERFLOW, 2-WAY
T-HANDLE FOR TANK PURGE,
SOLENOID VALVE
DRAIN VALVE 2-WAY MANUAL
VALVE
WATER HEATER
AFT LAV PLUMBING
GALLEY SHUTOFF, PURGE, 2-WAY 10 GALLON

H C MANUAL VALVE WATER FILL, SOLENOID VALVE WATER TANK
3-WAY SOLENOID
WATER HEATER VALVE
VENT/MUFFLER
SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVE
MECHANICAL
PLUNGER SINK
STRAINER
WATER FILTER
MAT ACTIVATED LAV SHUTOFF,
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
2-WAY SOLENOID MANUAL VALVE EXTERNAL PRESSURE
FILL/RINSE WASTE VALVE FILL DRAIN MAST
PORT PORT PORT DRAIN
WATER SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Nov 10/2006
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. RESTORE THE POTABLE WATER FILTER CARTRIDGE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 38-10-60-601
B. Procedure
(1) Replace the potable water filter cartridge per SERVICING.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
2. RESTORE THE POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 38-10-60-602
B. Procedure
(1) Restore (sanitize) the potable water system per SERVICING.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
BD-100 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for servicing components of the potable water
system.
(1) Equipment
• Equipment and supplies specific to task
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Apply electrical power to galley CB panel.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Water Tank Fill Procedure
(1) Select the air pressure three-way manual valve to FLIGHT position.
(2) Shut off bleed air supply.
(3) Close galley faucets.
(4) Ensure that lavatory faucets are closed.
(5) Connect water supply hose to filling station.
(6) Select water fill switch on water fill service panel to ON.
(7) Turn on water supply.
(8) Fill until water flows overboard through drain mast.
(9) Turn off water supply.
(10) Select water fill switch to OFF.
(11) Disconnect water supply hose.
Nov 10/2006
B. Automatic Purge Procedure (Figure 301)
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN THE USE OF HIGH-PRESSURE NITROGEN. DO NOT

OVER-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM.
NOTE: Instructions for purging water system are also indicated on water system purging placard.
In the case of a discrepancy between placard and these instructions, follow placard
instructions.
(1) With galley and lavatory faucets closed and electrical power available, pressurize system
with aircraft bleed air or nitrogen (38-40-00). Do not use shop air.
(2) Press and hold WATER PURGE switch on Galley Switch Panel until switch backlighting
changes from green to amber (about 5 seconds).
(3) Verify that water is draining from drain mast.
(4) Verify that water quantity level indication on Galley Switch Panel decreases in sequence as
tank purges.
(5) Allow water to fully drain overboard.
(6) The purge switch will remain illuminated.
(7) Verify that water heaters and hot water dispenser heater (if installed) are off and cannot be
turned on.
NOTE: Empty sensor MT700MJ forces water heaters and hot water dispenser heater to
stay off until tank is refilled.
(8) Place air pressure three-way valve to LINE PURGE position.
(9) Open galley cold water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
(a) Allow water to fully drain overboard.
(10) Open galley hot water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
(11) Open galley instant hot water faucet and drain.
(12) Repeat steps 3.B.(7) and 3.B.(8) for lavatory valves.
NOTE: If vanity and/or galley faucet control switches are installed in the aircraft, verify
pressure switch activation.
(13) Shut off bleed air or nitrogen supply.
(14) Open all faucets to bleed remaining air in the line and tank.
Nov 10/2006

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL

FIGURE 301
C. Manual Purge Procedure (Figure 302)

(2) Open water tank closeouts.
(3) Open manual purge valve located on water system components tray below water tank.
(4) Verify that water is draining from drain mast.
(5) Verify that water quantity level indication on Galley Switch Panel decreases in sequence as
tank purges.
(6) Allow water to fully drain overboard.
(7) Verify that water heaters and hot water dispenser heater (if installed) are off and cannot be
turned on.
NOTE: Empty sensor MT700MJ forces water heaters and hot water dispenser heater to
stay off until tank is refilled.
(8) Open galley cold water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
(9) Open galley hot water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
Nov 10/2006
(10) Repeat steps 3.C.(8) and 3.C.(9) for lavatory valves.
NOTE: If vanity and/or galley faucet control switches are installed in the aircraft, verify
pressure switch activation.
(12) Close manual purge valve.
AIR PRESSURE THREE-WAY

MANUAL VALVE (LINE PURGE)
(BLEED AIR SHUT-OFF VALVE) AIR PRESSURE TO EXTERNAL
TO WATER TANK FILL PORT
TO WATER BLEED AIR
FILTER FILTER DRAIN
VALVE
AIR FILTER
TO FORWARD
FITTING ON
WATER TANK
BLEED AIR
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
MANUAL TANK
PURGE VALVE
TO DRAIN
MAST
10TH STAGE BLEED

AIR IN
WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS TRAY

FIGURE 302
D. Manual Line Purge Procedure (Figure 302)
(1) Ensure that external electrical power is applied and select water fill switch on water fill
service panel to OFF.
(2) At Galley Switch Panel, actuate GALLEY WATER HEATER and LAV WATER HEATER
switches to OFF.
Nov 10/2006
(3) Close galley and lavatory faucets.
(4) Remove baggage compartment shelves and water tank closeouts.

(5) Pressurize system with aircraft bleed air or nitrogen (38-40-00). Do not use shop air.
(6) Actuate air pressure manual three-way valve to LINE PURGE position.
(7) Open lavatory cold water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
(8) Open lavatory hot water valve and drain until water stops flowing from faucet.
NOTE: If lavatory and/or galley faucet control pressure switches are installed in aircraft,
ensure that pressure switch activates when purging lines.
(9) Repeat steps 3.D.(7) and 3.D.(8) for galley water valves.
(11) Actuate air pressure manual three-way valve to FLIGHT position.
E. Water Filter Cartridge Replacement (Figure 303)
(1) Purge water system in accordance with 3.B. or 3.C. above.
WARNING: VERIFY THE WATER SYSTEM IS DEPRESSURIZED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
(2) Gain access to water filter by removing toilet shroud (25-49-00).
(3) Unscrew water filter assembly wing nut and remove quick-release bracket clamp.
(4) Unthread and discard the expended filter cartridge.
(5) Be sure to replace old gaskets with new ones provided with the filter kit.
(6) Insert a new filter cartridge and hand-tighten only.
(7) Run about 1 US gallon (3.8 liters) of potable water through the water system to expel
trapped water.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Refill water system in accordance with 3.A. above.
(10) Check for leaks. Correct as necessary.
(11) Turn on galley and lavatory faucets and allow water to run for a minimum of 3 minutes. Shut
off galley and lavatory faucets.
WALL BRACKET
QUICK RELEASE BRACKET CLAMP
WATER FILTER COVER BOWL AND AND WING NUT
ASSEMBLY
CARTRIDGE GASKET
FILTER CARTRIDGE
HOUSING GASKET
FILTER HOUSING
VENT DRAIN KNOB
VENT DRAIN KNOB O-RING
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM FILTER - SERVICING

FIGURE 303
Nov 10/2006
F. Sterilizing Main Water Tank and Lines
NOTE: The water tank should be sterilized every 6 months. The water filter cartridge should be
removed before sterilizing the system.
To avoid the possibility of damage to tank and water lines, the following procedure should be used
to sterilize the water system.
WARNING: VERIFY THE WATER SYSTEM IS DEPRESSURIZED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
(2) Gain access to water filter by removing toilet shroud (25-49-00).
(3) Remove water filter cover from water filter housing (Figure 303) by turning nut handle
counterclockwise. Remove water filter cartridge and replace water filter cover and nut
handle.
(4) Mix 1 teaspoon of household liquid bleach or its equivalent in a small amount of water and
add to main water tank at water tank manual fill port.
(5) Fill water system with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above. (Allow for a
minimum amount of overflow.) Open hot and cold faucets until chlorinated water flows from
lavatory and galley. Top off water and let stand for 1 hour.
(7) Refill water system with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above. Flow water
through lavatory and galley hot and cold faucets for approximately 1 minute.
(9) Dissolve 1.5 tablespoons (22 milliliters) of baking soda in a small amount of water and add
to main water tank at water tank manual fill port.
(10) Refill water system with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above.
(11) Flow water through lavatory and galley hot and cold faucets for approximately 1 minute.
(13) Refill water system with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above.
(14) Flow water through lavatory and galley hot and cold faucets for approximately 1 minute.
(16) Remove top of water filter housing by turning nut handle counterclockwise.
(17) Install a replacement filter cartridge.
Nov 10/2006
(18) Fill water filter canister with potable water.
(19) Replace water filter cover and nut handle.
(20) Fill water system with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above.
(21) Flow water through lavatory and galley hot and cold faucets until it runs clear.
(22) Momentarily press bleed air filter drain valve (Figure 302) to remove any water or
contaminants that may have accumulated in bleed air filter.
(23) Fill water tank with clean potable water in accordance with 3.A. above.
(24) Check water system for leaks. Correct as necessary.
(25) Verify that all heat tapes and thermostats are functioning properly.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the potable water tank (Figure 401):
(1) Remove baggage compartment right-hand headliner (25-55-03).
(2) Remove baggage compartment shelf and water tank closeouts.
(3) Purge water in accordance with SERVICING (Procedure 3.B. or 3.C.).
(5) Remove water tank blanket heaters (30-75-00).
(6) Turn all water system manual shut-off valves to OFF.
(7) Disconnect electrical, water, and air connections.
(8) Remove fasteners securing tank to brackets.
(9) Remove tank by lifting up, then inboard.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the potable water tank (Figure 401):
(1) Install water tank blanket heaters (30-75-00).
(2) Restore electrical, water, and air connections.
(3) Position tank and secure with fasteners.
(4) Fill water system with clean potable water in accordance with SERVICING (Procedure 3.A.).
(6) Install water tank closeouts and shelf.
(7) Install baggage compartment right-hand headliner (25-55-03).
Nov 10/2006
WATER TANK
ATTACH POINTS
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the potable water
system.
(1) Equipment
• Air pressure gauge: 0-60 psi (0-414 kPa)

• Liquid leak detector
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the potable water system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Water System
Ground Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved
revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
WATER HEATERS
WATER HEATERS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Two water heaters supply hot potable water to the galley and lavatory. The galley hot water dispenser is
discussed in 25-35-05. Table 1 lists the water heater components, their locations, and if applicable, the
associated circuit breaker(s).

Galley water heater HR909HR Outboard of galley waste container drawer
GALLEY WATER HEATER switch Galley switch panel
Galley water manual shutoff valve Outboard of toilet
Hot water dispenser control relay K903HR Lower galley equipment tray
Hot water dispenser heater A1HR Outboard of galley waste container drawer
Lavatory water heater HR910HR Under vanity cabinet sink
LAV WATER HEATER switch Galley switch panel
Lavatory water manual shutoff valve Outboard of toilet
Water heater control relays K901HR and K902HR Lower galley equipment tray
WTR HTR CONT circuit breaker CBPG-9
GALLEY WATER HTR circuit breaker CBPG-24
LAV WATER HTR circuit breaker CBPG-33
HOT WATER DISP circuit breaker CBPG-35
WATER HEATERS COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The water heaters are activated by pressing the Galley Switch Panel GALLEY WATER HEATER and
LAV WATER HEATER switches. The empty tank indication must not be on, or the water heaters will not
energize. The water heaters will automatically shut off if the empty tank indication is activated.
Relays K901HR and K902HR control the galley and lavatory water heaters, respectively. These relays
receive an activation signal from the cabin management system Cabin Control Module 1, and are
inhibited by the empty tank sensor and relay K702MJ if the tank is empty (38-10-00).
Each water heater has an on/off switch and a temperature control adjustment on the water heater. The
switch must be on and the temperature setting selected to HIGH for normal operation.
Nov 10/2006

CABIN LAV CABIN

HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
GALLEY SWITCH PANEL
Nov 10/2006
WATER HEATERS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the galley water heater (Figure 401):
DISPENSER (WATER HEATED TO 180º F) AND THE GALLEY WATER HEATER
(WATER HEATED TO 125º F).
(1) Open and lock out associated circuit breakers in Table 1.
(2) Run water from hot water tap until cool.
(3) Run water from instant hot water tap, if installed, until cool.
(4) Remove waste container assembly from lower galley.
(5) Close galley water manual shut-off valve.
(6) Depressurize galley water system by momentarily opening hot water tap, and instant hot
water tap (if installed), at galley sink.
B. To remove the lavatory water heater (Figure 401):
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE WHEN WORKING WITH THE LAVATORY HOT WATER
HEATER (WATER HEATED TO 125º F).
(2) Run water from hot water tap until cool.
(3) Remove storage compartment door from under lavatory sink.
(4) Remove closeout panels (secured with hook-and-loop strips).
(5) Close lavatory water manual shutoff valve.
(6) Depressurize lavatory water system by momentarily opening hot water tap at lavatory sink.
Nov 10/2006
C. To remove relay K901HR or K902HR (Figure 402):
(2) Remove applicable drawers and contents from lower galley.
(3) Remove relay.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the galley water heater (Figure 401):
(4) Test potable water system in accordance with ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
B. To install the lavatory water heater (Figure 401):
C. To install relay K901HR or K902HR (Figure 402):
(1) Position relay onto equipment tray and secure.
(2) Install galley drawers and contents.
Nov 10/2006
ON/OFF TOGGLE ON LIGHT

SWITCH
WATER OUT
MOUNTING
FASTENING BRACKETS
STRAPS
CONNECTOR
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
3-POSITION TOGGLE
SWITCH (BEHIND)
WATER IN
WATER HEATERS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006

WORK EFFECT FLOOR
CABIN LAV CABIN

COFFEE FLOOR FLOOR
HOT GALLEY LAV

W Q
T
R
FULL T
Y
RESET TEST
MICROWAVE
115 VAC
60 Hz COFFEE POT
115 VAC
400 HZ

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
WATER HEATERS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. FUNCTIONAL TEST OF THE WATER HEATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 38-10-60-603
BF Goodrich 38-10-01 Component Maintenance Manual
B. Job Set-up
(1) Remove the water heaters per Removal/Installation.
C. Procedure
(1) Do the pressure relief valve test of the water heaters per manufacturers CMM
(BF Goodrich 38-10-01).
D. Job Completion
(1) Install the water heaters per Removal/Installation.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
WASTE DISPOSAL
WASTE DISPOSAL - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Waste water from the lavatory sink, galley sink, and ice drawers is discharged overboard through the
production drain mast. The drain lines and drain mast are electrically heated by 115VAC heaters to
prevent freezing (30-75-00). The galley sink is equipped with a cable-operated, mechanical, valve-type
drain with a T-handle. The ice drawers are equipped with mechanical plunger-type drains. A strainer with
a quick removal plug is installed under the galley and lavatory sinks to facilitate easy removal of debris
from the drain lines. The lavatory sink is equipped with a spring-operated, mechanical, plunger-type
drain.
FROM CABIN DRAIN LINE
LH LAVATORY DRAIN
FROM TOILET VENT
FROM WATER TANK CLAMPS

MANUAL PURGE
(TYPICAL)
FROM WATER TANK

AUTOMATIC PURGEAND
DRIP PAN
DRAIN MAST
(VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD)
WASTE DISPOSAL
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
WASTE DISPOSAL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the waste disposal
system.
(1) Equipment

• Compressed nitrogen
(2) Facilities
• None
2. TEST SET-UP
3. TEST
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE WITH HIGH-PRESSURE NITROGEN. DO NOT OVER-PRESSURIZE
SYSTEM.
A. Perform leak check of drain system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
TOILETS
TOILETS - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A self-contained, electrically operated flush toilet is located in the aft lavatory. The toilet is plumbed to be
serviced from outside the aircraft, using a standard sanitary service cart. Table 1 lists the components
and their locations.

FLUSH switch Aft lavatory vanity cabinet
TOILET circuit breaker CBPG-14
TOILET COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
The toilet assembly holds a flushing solution as well as the waste materials until they are disposed of
during ground servicing. When the FLUSH switch is pressed, the motor/pump/filter assembly is
energized for a period of ten seconds. During the flush cycle, the flushing solution is pumped from the
holding tank through the basket strainer of the bowl and removes the waste materials into the holding
tank. The motor/pump assembly automatically stops after ten seconds, and the next flush cycle is
immediately available. A flapper valve keeps the holding tank materials from reentering the toilet bowl.
The motor/pump assembly has a built-in overheat switch to prevent the toilet motor from overheating.
The vent on the toilet is vented overboard through a drain line to the drain mast.
FLUSH
FLUSH SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
TOILETS - SERVICING
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for draining, rinsing, and recharging the toilet system.
(1) Equipment
• Lavatory service cart

• Rubber gloves
WARNING: WEAR RUBBER GLOVES WHEN SERVICING THE TOILET SYSTEM. IF THE
WASTE FLUID GETS ON YOUR HANDS OR SKIN, INFECTION CAN OCCUR.
(2) Facilities
• None.
2. JOB SET-UP
3. PROCEDURE
CAUTION: TO PROTECT TOILET RECIRCULATION SYSTEM AGAINST FREEZING
TEMPERATURES, ADD E GLYCOL (ANTIFREEZE) TO THE FLUSH LIQUID IN THE
RATIO RECOMMENDED BY THE ANTIFREEZE MANUFACTURER.
CAUTION: IF AN ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION CANNOT BE VERIFIED AND THE AIRCRAFT WILL BE

SUBJECT TO FREEZING TEMPERATURES, THEN THE TOILET SYSTEM MUST BE
DRAINED.
CAUTION: STOP THE RINSING OPERATION IF YOU THINK THERE IS A BLOCKAGE IN THE
SYSTEM. THE RINSE WATER SUPPLIED TO THE TOILET TANK CAN CAUSE THE
TANK CONTENTS TO COME OUT THE TOP OF THE TOILET.
NOTE: Refer to the vendor service manual or instruction placard first. If not available, use the following
procedure.
A. Connect external sewage hose and tank flush hose to service panel.
B. Actuate cable to open toilet drain valve and dump waste into sewage line.
C. Turn flush water on and run water through service flush fitting for approximately 3 minutes with
drain valve open. Release cable to close drain valve and fill tank with approximately 4 US gallons
(15 liters) of water.
Nov 10/2006
D. Turn water off and open drain valve to empty water from tank. Close drain valve.
E. Charge empty tank through bowl or through service panel flush fitting with approximately 2 US
gallons (7.5 liters) of water and 3 ounces (90 milliliters) of Monogram DG-19 Toilet Chemical as
indicated on toilet placard or in manufacturer’s component maintenance manual.
F. Disconnect sewage and water lines from service panel.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
TOILETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
WARNING: WASTE WATER CAN CAUSE INFECTIONS. WEAR RUBBER GLOVES AND EYE
PROTECTION WHEN SERVICING OR REPAIRING THE TOILET SYSTEM.
A. To remove the toilet (Figure 401):
(1) Service and drain toilet per SERVICING instructions.
(3) Remove toilet shroud assembly (25-49-00).
(4) Release hold-down rods.
(5) Disconnect cable, vent line, and rinse line.
(6) Disconnect electrical connections.
NOTE: Hold cloth or other suitable material around bottom of toilet assembly to avoid dripping on
aircraft furnishings.
(7) Lift toilet by handles directly up and clear of sewage drain.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the toilet (Figure 401):
(1) Verify that condition of all rubber seals is acceptable, and replace them as needed.
(2) Align aircraft and toilet sewage fittings, and then lower toilet into place.
(3) Align hold-down rods and make sure that they are correctly hooked before securing.
(4) Secure rods.
(5) Attach cable, vent line, and rinse line.
(6) Restore power to toilet (AMM Task 24-00-00-861-801).
(7) Flush toilet and check for leaks.
(8) Install toilet shroud assembly (25-49-00).
(9) Test toilet in accordance with ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
Nov 10/2006
DRAIN VALVE
TOILET AND TANK

ASSEMBLY
TIMER
ASSEMBLY MOTOR, PUMP &
FILTER ASSEMBLY
DRAIN VALVE
CABLE
INLET CHECK
VALVE
VENT FITTING
MOUNTING
FRAME
HOLD-DOWN
RODS (TYPICAL)
TOILET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
TOILETS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the waste disposal
system.
(1) Equipment
• None
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Test the waste disposal system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground Test
Procedure, document number TE-GTP-292, revision (B), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove power from the aircraft if it is no longer required.
B. Remove all equipment used for these tasks and return the aircraft to its initial condition.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
TOILETS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure gives instructions for inspecting the flush cycle.
(1) Equipment
• Water
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. JOB SET-UP
A. Apply electrical power to the aircraft.
B. Ensure that toilet circuit breaker is closed.
3. PROCEDURE
A. Fill tank with approximately 2 US gallons (7.5 liters) of clear water.
B. Complete at least three flush cycles and observe flushing action. Flushing should be vigorous and
consistent with a curtain of water completely covering inside of bowl throughout flush cycle.
C. If flushing action is not satisfactory, refer to manufacturer’s component maintenance manual.

Return toilet to operating condition.
D. Drain tank and clean toilet bowl with a mild disinfectant and a wet sponge.
4. JOB COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIR SUPPLY
AIR SUPPLY - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The pressure for the water system is obtained from the 10th stage bleed air. The bleed air line is tapped
at the manifold in the aft equipment compartment. The bleed air regulator reduces the air pressure from
the tapped line in the aft equipment compartment. A filter assembly traps any contaminants from the air
line. The filter and regulator are installed in the water tank area, and the air line is routed to the baggage
area through bulkhead FS621. Pressure is also available from the Auxiliary Power Unite (APU) or from
an auxiliary air pump (if installed).
2. OPERATION
The air pressure from the 10th stage is approximately 100-120 psi (690-830 kPa). The pressure is
reduced to 20-22 psi (138-152 kPa) by an air pressure regulator before pressurizing the water tank. The
relief valve on the distribution line will open at 25 psi (172 kPa).
The bleed air filter is a Monnier miniature-style, 3009 series, in-line air filter. The filter bowl collects
moisture, oils, and dirt from the bleed air lines and supplies clean air to the water supply. A spring
actuated drain valve is mounted on the bottom of the air filter bowl so that water can be drained from the
filter.
REDUCER FITTING
MANIFOLD
BLEED AIR LINE
TRANSDUCER
FS621 PRESSURE BULKHEAD
AIR SUPPLY
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIR SUPPLY - SERVICING
1. REPLACE THE BLEED AIR FILTER

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 38-40-60-602
B. Procedure
(1) Replace the bleed air filter per REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
C. Job Completion
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIR SUPPLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
A. To remove the bleed air filter (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(3) Open bleed air filter drain valve to vent pressure from bleed air line.
(4) Unscrew bowl.
(5) Remove element retainer and element.
(6) Replace worn or questionable parts.
B. To remove the bleed air pressure regulator (Figure 402):
(3) Open bleed air filter drain valve to vent pressure from bleed air line.
(4) Loosen swage connectors securing outlet line of air filter.
(5) Loosen swage connectors securing inlet and outlet lines of air pressure regulator.
(6) Remove air pressure regulator.
C. To remove the bleed air line check valve (Figure 402):
(1) Close galley and lavatory faucets.
(3) Pressurize water system with aircraft bleed air, nitrogen, or internal pressure pump (if
installed). Do not use shop air.
(4) Open manual purge valve to purge water and vent pressure from water system.
NOTE: Water will drain from the drain mast if water is present in the water system.
(5) Allow all water to drain from water system.
(7) Allow all pressure to vent from water system.
Nov 10/2006
(8) Loosen swage connectors securing inlet line of three-way manual valve.
(9) Loosen swage connectors securing inlet line of overflow two-way solenoid valve at tee
connector.
(10) Loosen swage connectors securing inlet and outlet lines of bleed air line check valve, and
remove check valve.
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the bleed air filter (Figure 401 and Figure 402):
(1) Place element on element retainer and position shield on top of element.
(2) Screw retainer back into head, making sure shield fits over shoulder on head.
(3) Insert piston assembly into bowl.
(4) Place bowl seal on bowl, screw bowl into head (hand-tighten only), and inspect for leaks.
(5) Test air supply system in accordance with ADJUSTMENT/TEST.
(6) Install baggage compartment shelf and water tank closeouts.
B. To install the bleed air pressure regulator (Figure 402):
(1) Position air pressure regulator and hand-tighten swage connectors to secure into place.
(2) Hand-tighten swage connector on outlet line of air filter.
(3) Tighten swage connectors a quarter-turn with appropriate tool.
C. To install the bleed air line check valve (Figure 402):
(1) Position check valve and hand-tighten swage connectors to secure into place.
(2) Hand-tighten swage connectors securing inlet line of overflow two-way solenoid valve at
tee fitting.
(3) Hand-tighten swage connector on inlet line of three-way manual valve.
(4) Tighten check valve swage connectors a quarter-turn with appropriate tool.
Nov 10/2006
(5) Tighten swage connector on tee fitting a quarter-turn with appropriate tool.
(6) Tighten swage connectors on inlet line of three-way manual valve a quarter-turn with
appropriate tool.
SHIELD
ELEMENT
ELEMENT
RETAINER
BOWL SEAL
BOWL KIT
W/DRAIN
DRAIN VALVE
ASSEMBLY
BLEED AIR FILTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Nov 10/2006
AIR PRESSURE THREE-WAY

MANUAL VALVE (LINE PURGE)
(BLEED AIR SHUT-OFF VALVE) BLEED AIR OVERFLOW
CHECK VALVE TWO-WAY
SOLENOID
VALVE
BLEED AIR
FILTER DRAIN
VALVE
BLEED AIR
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
MANUAL TANK BLEED AIR

PURGE VALVE FILTER
OUTLET
LINE
BLEED
AIR FILTER
WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS TRAY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 402
Nov 10/2006
AIR SUPPLY - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying proper operation of the air supply
system.
(1) Equipment
• Compressed nitrogen
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. Perform leak check of supply system in accordance with Bombardier Completion Center Ground
Test Procedure, document number TE-GTP-243, revision (G), or the latest approved revision.
4. TEST COMPLETION
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIR SUPPLY - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE AIR PRESSURE REGULATOR GAUGE

A. Introduction
(1) Purpose
TLMC Task 38-40-60-601
B. Job Set-up
(1) Open the access panel to view the pressure gauge.
(2) Pressurize the water system.
C. Procedure
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of the air pressure regulator gauge as follows:
(a) Observe the pressure gauge on the air supply regulator during system operation.
Verify that the system is being regulated to 20 to 22 psi (138-152 kPa).
D. Job Completion
(1) Close the access panel.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 49 - AIRBORNE
AUXILIARY POWER
CHAPTER 49 - AIRBORNE AUXILIARY POWER

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
49-60-10 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
49-70-10 1 Sep 25/2002

2 Sep 25/2002
49-70-10 401 Sep 25/2002

402 Sep 25/2002
49-70-10 501 Sep 25/2002

502 Sep 25/2002


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 49 - AIRBORNE AUXILIARY POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT/ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT 49-60-10

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER 49-70-10

Operation 1
Removal 401
Installation 401
Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 502


AUXILIARY POWER UNIT/ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT/ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A spare Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Electronic Control Unit (ECU) has been installed adjacent to the
production ECU. This modification has been designed to allow easy disconnection and reconnection of
the wire harness to the spare unit.
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
An additional Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) hour meter with LCD display has been installed in the existing
APU fault panel. The meter shows hours of operation and operates in parallel with the production meter.
2. OPERATION
The operation of the hour meter is controlled by the APU control system and no crew input is required.
APU
FS HOUR
640 METER
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER LOCATION
Revision FI 49-70-10 Page 1
Sep 25/2002
A1.0
Sep 25/2002

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. REMOVAL
CAUTION: BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OR REMOVE ANY UNITS, TURN ELECTRICAL
POWER OFF.
NOTE: The following procedures require qualified personnel using approved aircraft maintenance
procedures.
A. To remove the hour meter (Figure 401):
(1) Remove two screws securing unit to fault panel.
(2) Lift unit out of fault panel.
(3) Disconnect and mark wires.
(4) If unit requires repair or troubleshooting, proceed as follows:
2. INSTALLATION
A. To install the hour meter (Figure 401):
(1) Connect wiring harness.
(2) Place unit in fault panel and secure with attaching hardware.
(4) Return aircraft to normal operating condition.
Sep 25/2002
A1.0
ATTACHING APU HOUR

HARDWARE METER
(2 PLACES)
FS
640
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

FIGURE 401
Sep 25/2002

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT HOUR METER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for verifying the proper operation of the additional
APU hour meter in CL-604 aircraft.
procedures.
(1) Equipment
• No special equipment is required.
(2) Facilities
• External power
2. TEST SET-UP
ground safety.
3. TEST
A. APU Hour Meter Check
(1) Verify that the additional APU hour meter readout matches that of the existing aircraft APU
hour meter.
(a) If hour meter readings do not match, then remove added hour meter from fault panel
and apply 28VDC ± 0.5VDC power to the meter’s green (+) and the white (-) wires.
Observe proper polarity of connections.
(b) Run hour meter until its reading matches that of the existing aircraft APU hour meter.
(c) Reinstall hour meter in fault panel.
(2) Observe the additional APU hour meter readout before and after APU operation, and verify
the following:
• Hour meter readings reflect the actual run time of the APU
• Hours displayed on its readout track and match that of the existing aircraft APU
hour meter
Sep 25/2002
A1.0
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove all equipment used for testing and clear area of debris.
B. If any unit fails any test, remove and proceed as follows:
• Return unit to manufacturer or an authorized repair facility for troubleshooting and

repair.
Sep 25/2002
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS

2 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
52-11-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
52-11-00 201 Nov 10/2006

202 Nov 10/2006
52-41-00 1 Aug 9/2000

2 Aug 9/2000
52-41-00 501 Aug 9/2000

502 Aug 9/2000
52-44-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006
52-72-00 1 Nov 10/2006

2 Nov 10/2006


Table of Contents
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIRSTAIR DOOR 52-11-00

Operation 1
Handrail Rigging Instructions 201
AFT EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR 52-41-00

Adjustment/Test
Introduction 501
Test Set-up 501
Test 501
Test Completion 501
EXTERIOR DOORS LOCKING PACKAGE 52-44-00

SERVICE DOOR INDICATOR SYSTEM 52-72-00

Operation 1


AIRSTAIR DOOR
AIRSTAIR DOOR - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The production-installed airstair door has been modified to increase compatibility with the entryway
interior. This modification consists of two modified handrail assemblies, relocation of two mounting
brackets, and adjustments to pushrod assemblies. Table 1 lists the airstair components and their
locations.

AIRSTAIR UP Switch Forward wardrobe
Relay K2LT Outboard of forward wardrobe, at FS300L
AIRSTAIR UP COMPONENTS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
The production airstair door circuit breaker provides overload protection.
2. OPERATION
NOTE: Aircraft power must be ON when operating the AIRSTAIR UP switch.
The AIRSTAIR UP Switch is an electronically-guarded, momentary switch that activates relay K2LT. The
switch must be pressed for a minimum of two seconds, and then held for the duration of the door closing.
AIRSTAIR
UP
AIRSTAIR UP SWITCH
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
AIRSTAIR DOOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. HANDRAIL RIGGING INSTRUCTIONS

The door handrail (Figure 201) has been modified and handrail pushrods have been re-rigged in
accordance with drawing TM432517-02 to provide additional clearance between the handrail and the
interior trim when the door is closed. The following rigging instructions are applicable when this handrail
modification has been accomplished.
A. This rigging procedure supplements Maintenance Manual PSP 601-2, Chapter 52-12-16, and
supersedes steps 2.A.1.b (rig pin holes do not line up after this modification) and 2.A.2.b (stop bolt
does not contact side of door support link with leg fully extended, Figure 201, Page 202) from that
section.
• From 52-12-00, 2.B.5, “Adjust length of both handrail operating rods to 22.904/±0.021
inches” is changed to “...23.00/±0.02 inches”.
• Figure 202, page 206 (“Pushrod Nominal Dimensions”), rod No. 8 dimension is changed
to 23.00 inches from 22.904, and rod No. 10 dimension is changed to 15.51 inches from
15.280.
B. Measure distance from door hinge line to groundline. Provide suitable support if distance is more
than 66.5 inches, so that vertical distance from hinge line to foot support does not exceed 66.5
inches.
C. Remove access cover and adjust door foot pushrod 600-38003-3 (Figure 201) to 15.51/±0.03
inches length between bolt holes. If rod is removed, install a 4" steel locking pin, 1/4" in diameter,
in door support mechanism to prevent foot from collapsing when door is open and rod is removed.
D. Adjust handrail actuating pushrods (2) 600-31957-3 (Figure 201) to 23.00/±0.01 inches length
between bolt holes.
E. Adjust relocated bracket 600-38121-3 (Figure 201) by centering bracket in mounting slots and
closing door. With door in closed position, bracket should lightly butt against door pull-in lever.
Adjust bracket along slots as required to achieve this position.
F. Check position of bottom of foot with door closed and locked. Foot should be flush with door outer
skin (+0.00, -0.04 inches) with door closed. Adjust 600-38003-3 pushrod as required to obtain
proper flushness (lengthen rod to move foot outboard).
G. Adjustment of door support mechanism stop bolt is set when modification is installed, and should
not need further adjustment. If adjustment is necessary, jack aircraft nose to obtain a vertical
distance of 66.5 inches from door hinge line to ground level (see step 1.B. above). Then adjust
stop bolt (for access, remove cover 600-38094-1 located in riser above bottom step) until it
contacts door foot linkage or until stop bolt is bottomed in travel and in contact with linkage.
H. Safety all pushrods per MPS 150-3 or AMM Task 20-50-00-400-801.
Nov 10/2006
HANDRAIL ASSEMBLY
HANDRAIL ACTUATING
PUSHROD ASSEMBLY
DOOR FOOT PUSHROD

ASSEMBLY
BRACKET
AIRSTAIR DOOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

FIGURE 201
Nov 10/2006
AFT EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR

AFT EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
A stair assembly has been installed for the aft equipment bay door. The assembly consists of three step
assemblies and two struts. The stair deploys from the aft, down and forward. It is locked in place by the
struts, which fold to allow the stair to be stowed.
CAUTION: ROD END ADJUSTMENTS ARE CRITICAL FOR PROPER STRUT POSITION WITH THE
DOOR CLOSED. DAMAGE CAN RESULT IF THE DOOR IS CLOSED WITH THE ROD
ENDS IMPROPERLY ADJUSTED.
EFFECTIVITY: TE-3034e-SMM
Aug 9/2000
A1.0
Aug 9/2000
AFT EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR

AFT EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. INTRODUCTION
A. Purpose
The following procedure provides instructions for properly adjusting the strut rod ends.
(1) Equipment
• No special equipment required
(2) Facilities
• No special facilities are required.
2. TEST SET-UP
3. TEST
CAUTION: ROD END ADJUSTMENTS ARE CRITICAL FOR PROPER STRUT POSITION WITH THE
DOOR CLOSED. DAMAGE CAN RESULT IF THE DOOR IS CLOSED WITH THE ROD
ENDS IMPROPERLY ADJUSTED.
A. Begin adjustment of strut with four threads engaged on lower rod ends, and upper rod ends fully
engaged.
B. Extend upper rod ends as required so that rod seats in receptacle with door closed. Position of
rods must be checked with door fully closed.
4. TEST COMPLETION
A. Remove all equipment used for testing and clear area of debris.
Aug 9/2000
A1.0
Aug 9/2000
EXTERIOR DOORS LOCKING PACKAGE
EXTERIOR DOORS LOCKING PACKAGE - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
Several doors and panels on the exterior of the aircraft are equipped with high-security Illinois locks. The
locks are operated with a common key. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.
Component Location
Door lock Aft equipment bay door
Door lock Auxiliary power unit control panel
Door lock Baggage compartment door
Door lock Center-point refuel door
Door lock External fuel panel
Door lock Lavatory service panel
Door lock Left-hand forward avionics compartment
Door lock Left-hand hydraulic access door
Door lock Main passenger door
Door lock Oxygen service panel
Door lock Nose radome
Door lock Right-hand forward avionics compartment
Door lock Right-hand hydraulic access door
Door lock Water service panel
Locking fuel caps (3) Top surface of left and right wings, forward
side of right-hand wing root
EXTERIOR DOOR LOCKS AND LOCATIONS

TABLE 1
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
SERVICE DOOR INDICATOR SYSTEM
SERVICE DOOR INDICATOR SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The production-installed service door open indication system has been modified by the addition of a
dedicated annunciator and several service door switches. This annunciator panel lists the service doors
monitored by the system and indicates when a door is open. The system also initiates an external door
open message on the EICAS display unit. Table 1 lists the components and their locations.

Annunciator Forward side of bulkhead FS280L
Switch Aft equipment compartment door
Switch Hydraulic pump 3A service door
Switch Hydraulic pump 3B service door
Switch LH avionics compartment service door
Switch Nose radome
Switch RH avionics compartment service door
ACCESS DOOR IND circuit breaker CBP1 E-5
SERVICE DOOR INDICATOR SYSTEM

TABLE 1
2. OPERATION
Opening a service door furnishes a ground through the switch to the annunciator panel, which generates
an EICAS door open message and illuminates the corresponding LED indicator on the door open
annunciator panel. Pressing the ANNUN TEST switch will illuminate all LED annunciators.
NOSE RADOME DOOR FUEL ACCESS DOOR WATER SERV DOOR

AC POWER DOOR REFUEL/DEFUEL PNL LAV SERVICE DOOR
OXYGEN FILL DOOR LH HYD PUMP DOOR APU CONTROL DOOR
ANNUN
LH AV COMPT DOOR RH HYD PUMP DOOR DC POWER DOOR TEST
RH AV COMPT DOOR AFT EQUIP BAY DOOR
DOOR OPEN ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
Nov 10/2006
Nov 10/2006
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS



Chalenger 604

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chalenger 604

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Highlights

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TO: HOLDERS OF SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REVISION A DATED NOV 10/2006

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Aircraft S/N: 5596

For more information please contact:

Bombardier Business Aircraft Customer Support

North America 1-866-273-2638

Outside North America 514-855-7051

To ease the ordering process, the following Document

User Comment Group 514-855-9304

Copyright © 2005-2006 by Bombardier Inc. All rights reserved.

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

System Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - Pages 1 - 99

WARNING: WARNING STATEMENTS IDENTIFY METHODS, PROCEDURES, OR LIMITS THAT MUST

CAUTION: CAUTION STATEMENTS IDENTIFY PROCESSES THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED TO AVOID

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REVISION NO. REVISION DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

First Issue Jun 21/2005 N/A

Revision A Nov 10/2006 Completely revised and reissued

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 07 - LIFTING AND SHORING

THIS SECTION INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 2

CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND TAXIING

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Ch-Se-Su Page Date Ch-Se-Su Page Date

09 - Effective Pages 1 Nov 10/2006

09 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006

09-10-17 1 Nov 10/2006

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 2

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND TAXIING

Subject Ch-Se-Su Page

TOWBAR STORAGE 09-10-17

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 2

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TOWBAR STORAGE - DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

TOWBAR AND TOWBAR HEAD

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Ch-Se-Su Page Date Ch-Se-Su Page Date

11 - Effective Pages 1 Nov 10/2006

11 - Contents 1 Nov 10/2006

11-00-00 1 Nov 10/2006

11-00-01 401 Nov 10/2006

11-30-00 601 Nov 10/2006

11-31-00 301 Nov 10/2006

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY: 5596-SMM Page 2

CL-604 SUPPLEMENTAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS